#god no joke it took me like two hours to find this specific ask
Explore tagged Tumblr posts
navree · 2 years ago
Note
What do you think about people calling Alicent a r eligió zealot? Personally, I find myself quote uncomfortable when people describe her as such and I don't really see it anyway? I think zealot is too extreme to be thrown around so freely
Hey anon, I actually touched on this in the second half of this response, so I won't go into too much detail, but long story short I agree. Zealotry, especially of the religious kind, is a very specific thing, with a specific definition and specific parameters that Alicent just does not fit. She's maybe a bit fanatical, but not extremely so, and a better description would be "devout", and she is not uncompromising about it at all, which is a core tenet of religious zealotry. Alicent is religious, yes, and clearly subsumes herself into that religion deeply as she moves more into adulthood, but that doesn't make her a zealot.
1 note · View note
disneyanddisneyships · 2 years ago
Note
Imagine an AU where Jason tries to do THAT again to Aponi in hell
And Al overhears and is just like:
Tumblr media
Enjoy being sad.
Alastor x OC fic
Warnings: s3xual as*ault, r*pe, ab*se, this is probably triggering so read carefully (talking to u julia).
Today was the day Aponi planned on confronting Jason about what happened when they were alive.
She had been planning this for days and finally worked up the courage to call her ex boyfriend to tell him to meet her at the hazbin hotel.
She paced around her room, hands nonchalantly being placed on her stomach.
She walked downstairs at the perfect time to see Jason walking through the door.
"Jason...." she muttered. He didn't say anything.
Aponi took him up to her room and locked the door. If Vaggie found out he was here, Aponi would have to physically restrain the moth from doing something.
"What do you want Lilly," Jason asked as he sat on the chair in her room.
"I wanna talk about what happened," Aponi replied.
"Oh my God. Here's what happened my little flower; I gave you a few kisses and you went and killed yourself and our baby," Jason scoffed.
"That's not fair, asshole. You and I both know what you did," Aponi defended.
"Oh. You want me to do it again baby girl?" Jason asked as he stood up and walked toward Lilly with a smirk. "No one cares down here. I can do whatever the fuck I want," Jason muttered dangerously as he pinned Aponi against the wall.
Aponi's eyes widened in fear. "Jason no. Get off," She stated calmly.
"No. Stay still you little bitch," he growled as he moved to take off her clothes.
Aponi pushed him away. And went to unlock the door.
Meanwhile from outside, alastor was roaming the halls, specifically next to Aponi's apartment.
"Hel-"
Aponi's scream was cut off.
"Come here, bitch!" Someone yelled.
There was rustling behind the door.
"SOMEONE HELP ME PLEASE!" Aponi screamed.
Alastor was quick to all but kick the door down only to find Jason and Aponi on the floor, Jason on top if her holding her down while Aponi was on the bottom, tears running down her face as she struggled to get up.
"Who the fuck are you? Can't you see were busy?" Jason asked.
Alastor processed what he was seeing, noticing more things such as aponi's pants being down and the forming bruises on her face. Not to mention Jason's hand wrapped around her neck where alastor knew was sensitive.
Alastor's eyes narrowed as the environment glitched around them.
"Get off of her," Alastors voice got deeper as the static got louder.
That's when Alastor made his shadows charge at Jason, knocking him away from Aponi who sat up and began coughing and holding her neck gently.
Alastor wlaked toward Jason who was being held down by the shadows.
"I'll enjoy this," Alastor muttered before charging at him, the screams of the lowerclass demon echoing through the hazbin hotel.
Aponi sat against one of the walls, eyes wide and trying to slow her breathing.
It almost happened again....
How could she be so fucking stupid? She should've known this would happen.....
Tears began to spill nimbly from her eyes as she continued to stare wide-eyed into nothingness.
She was pulled back to reality by Alastor kneeling in front of her.
She was startled and she screamed, pushing away from him as if he was Jason.
"Lilly, darling, it's just me! It's just me!" He soothed as he sat down and pulled her on top of him so he was cradling her.
"He almost did it again......" Aponi whispered.
An hour or so later the two were downstairs at the bar.
"Woah. What happened to you?" Husker asked when he saw the bruises on Aponi's face.
"Ah you shoulda seen the other guy," Aponi joked.
"..... was it your ex?" Husker asked.
Aponi turned away.
"Look I'd say 'I told ya so' but you don't need that right now.... I'll go get some ice," husker stated.
"You told him?" Alastor asked.
"He was the only one I told about Jason coming over..... he warned me against it but i didn't listen," Aponi muttered.
Husk came back with an ice pack.
"Here. This should bring down the swelling, kid. Are you okay?" Husk asked.
"I've been better.... but thanks.... I'll listen to you next time," Aponi gave a weak smile.
Alastor glanced at her neck, the mark around it bruising up worse than usual.
That's when Angel walked through the door.
"Hey hey hey! What up guys!" Angel shouted as he made his way closer to Aponi. He stopped. "Who?" He asked.
"What?" Aponi responded, confused.
"Who the fuck did that to you?! I'll kill em 20 times over if I have'ta!" Angel shouted.
"Calm down Angie.. alastor already took care of it....." Aponi muttered.
"It was ya fucking ex, wasn't it?!" Angel asked.
Aponi nodded.
"Did he get far?" Angel asked once again.
"...... he didn't get what he wanted. Don't worry," Aponi replied.
"Can I hug ya?" Angel asked. Aponi nodded and the two embraced.
19 notes · View notes
elcorhamletlive · 1 year ago
Text
no one asked but here are some of my thoughts on the one piece live action show
the things I didn't like:
Nojiko not knowing about Nami's scheme and plan. I get that it was probably a way to raise the odds and emphasize Nami's loneliness, but to me it cheapened their relationship and took away one of the most touching moments in the manga, when the reason for Nojiko's tattoos is revealed.
humorless, stoic, sexy man Zoro. of all the characters it was the one adaptation that didn't work for me, and Zoro is one of my favorites so it was a bit frustrating. the actor gives a good performance, but whereas the rest of the crew is a perfect translation of their manga selves to the screen, Zoro feels like a fundamentally different character. which is unfortunately because the mix of goofiness and badassery is what makes Zoro so engaging. here's hoping that he's allowed to emote more in season two.
in a similar vein as the previous point, I wasn't a fan of all the "Zoro and Nami exhasperated over Luffy" scenes. imo making Zoro so mature changed the dynamic of the crew and made his relationship with Luffy ring a bit hollow, even when the show wanted me to be emotionally invested in their bond.
Mihawk's introduction makes him come across as way less of threat than in the manga. I get cutting Krieg because they had less time and ultimately I don't think it was a massive loss, but having Gin show up destroyed and hyping Mihawk up is sooo much more effective than just showing him in the middle of a battle.
Nami was also a bit too serious for my taste, but I'll chalk that up to East Blue being when she's still not fully comfortable with the crew yet.
this is the most nitpicky annoying thing but. Arlong was too small. like obviously realistically speaking the actor is jacked but he does not give off the same threatening air that he does in the manga when he's towering over everyone.
the things I liked (most of it!):
from a plot perspective I think they were very smart and strategic about what to cut, they managed to trim everything to make it fit in eight hours and it worked. having Koby and Helmeppo throughout the season was a great way to keep the story from feeling too episodic, and they're both really well cast and I loved watching them. They are in love
removing the jokes on Alvida's appearance: yes. Overall I think they did a good job translating the humor, keeping the absurdness and silliness while also removing what wouldn't fly very well in live action.
Luffy should have been Brazilian but Iñaki Godoy is truly a finding, his performance is top notch and I can't imagine anyone else playing the role. Also in the "might have been created in a lab specifically to play their role" category are: Jacob Romero (there was not a second Usopp was on screen that didn't fill my heart with joy), Craig Fairbrass, Peter Gadiot, Aidan Scott.
special bullet point for Buggy because yeah. you have already heard that but my god he is THAT GOOD. SO much fun to watch.
another special bullet point for Taz Skylar. I didn't mention him in the list above because I guess you can say that technically Sanji is significantly different in the LA than in the mange, but tbh the change was for the better. amping up his charm and giving him a wannabe womanizer vibe was the perfect choice. his chemistry with Zeff was amazing (that one second in which they're fighting and you can see Sanji mouthing along to what he's saying because they've had this fight so many times before? CINEMA). their goodbye broke my heart.
Baratie might have been my favorite arc. and it's a really good arc in the manga so I'm amazed by how much they got it right.
Usopp/Kaya kiss!!!
obsessed with the absolutely random flirting between Zeff and Garp. old men yaoi stays winning
Koby and Luffy's hug was everything I didn't know I needed. also Koby getting drunk. just... Koby.
usually I'd find "omg they did it exactly like the manga panels" kind of a meaningless compliment but the scene where Nami asks for Luffy's help hit me like a brick. it was perfect.
their vows at the ending of the season gave me chills. Watching this show was so much fun and made me relive the excitement this story gave me as a child; a lot is said about an adaption having to capture "the essence" of the original which is of course super vague, but however you interpret it, I think it happened here. This show has so much heart and passion and is just a joyful, fun thing to experience. I can't wait for next season
6 notes · View notes
cosmindart · 2 years ago
Text
Aquafirma: Waters of the clouds
[any excuse to repost my fav old works. Here's an AU story with the AskIsaak cast]
Tumblr media
Aquafirma, a world similar to ours centuries ago back when castles and horses were kings, but twice smaller. Here in place of Humans lived the Anacrees.
They looked quite a lot like Humans but that was just on the surface. The main striking difference between a human and an Anacree was the green pearl-like gem emerging through their chest, however there was much more to them. Their longer lifespan, their innate magical disposition, their stronger bones made from the same gem-like material as their pearls.
Their culture was quite unlike ours, they worshiped a different deity and had holidays divergent from ours. For example everyone wore a shawl on their shoulders, each family having their own cut, color and trim combination. In addition special shawls everyone wore for specific celebrations existed as well. Most celebrations centered around the Salmalion god and the water cycle.
This story follows a group of 5 Anacree friends who, one faithful year, vowed to restore their world from the recent calamity.
Tumblr media
___________
Chapter 1
   Today was the first day of spring and Lionel was excited. Everybody was but for a different reason. Today was the day of the Salmalion festival, the biggest holiday of the Anacree people. Every winter, the fresh waters of many lakes across the world rise into the sky to form huge water bubbles up in the air with a crystal at their cores leaving only salt oceans until spring where the drinkable water finally rains back down in a 2 day long downpour. Anacrees celebrate right before the rain comes every year with dances and feasts. Lionel however wasn’t excited about this, during the celebration he was going to propose to his childhood friend and soulmate of 3 years.
Lionel was running up and down in his apartment itemizing everything. His celebration outfit for this afternoon was ready laid out on his bed, his hair was brushed, his shawl ironed to perfection, his pearl was polished despite its cracks… Everything was in order.
“Chill out! You’re gonna pop a vessel” exclaimed Kennedy, Lionel’s roommate. “The celebration isn’t happening for another hour you know.”
Tumblr media
“I know! I just… I wanna make sure I'm not forgetting anything!”
“I know you’ll nail it and even if you ‘mess up’ I know Isaak will find it funny and just as memorable!” Kennedy patted him on the back to reassure him a little and took off the tan guy’s shawl so he’d put on his celebration one “Let’s go out! Helping out the performers setting up could distract you and stop you from turning into a nervous wreck!”
“Aren’t the pair who are playing the Salmalion new this year?” Lionel asked, his mind successfully distracted”
“Yeah! Micheal is gonna be the head of the beast! He said he had to or his dad would have been sad to have their family tradition broken. I know the second dancer is new too but I heard he didn’t want people to know who he is…” The red head paused then smirked “I will find out! Nothing escapes me!”
“How about you don’t snoop eh! Won’t you be celebrating my engagement after the dance?” He joked “You’d rather weasel your way backstage to expose the guy?”
“Pfft of course I’d celebrate with you!” The two tall guys walked out of their house “That’s why we should help them set up! That way I can snoop now and celebrate later!”
“I agree to help, yeah.” Lionel poked Kennedy’s nose “But I'll make sure you wont get any time to snoop! Leave the man alone alright!”
The two men laughed for a while as they made their way to the grand plaza. Banners were already hung up everywhere, a dozen people were running back and forth setting up more decoration, putting up pillars on which the Salmalion dancers would jump on later during their performance, setting up booth where food and drinks would be served, and more Anacrees just sat and watched the buzzling going.
The duo walked toward the stage with the pillars, ready to lend a hand on Lionel’s side and to pry for info on Kenny’s side. Putting the stage together were two grey-haired dudes in blue stage gear: Pyotr and Shurik. Supervising them wearing green fur covered pants was Micheal. No doubt the pants he was wearing were the front paws part of the Salmalion costume. Kennedy looked around trying to spot someone else wearing matching pants… All he saw around the wooden podium were other crew members in blue. Lionel pulled Kennedy toward the Wojcik brothers and the dancer.
Tumblr media
“Do you need help? Kenny and I are at your service if need be!”
“Nah, we about got it done” said Pyotr, the chubbier one of the brothers.
“We were already done setting-up actually” added Micheal “We just ended up shifting the stage slightly but it’s all good now. Thanks anyway.”
“I heard Eliott ask for strong men to help him 10 minutes ago!” mentioned Shurik
“Ah! He just said that because he’s gay and wants eye-candy! He doesn’t actually need help!” joked Kenny “I bet if we go find him he’ll already be done setting up too!... Anyway I was wonder-”
“We’ll go check anyway!” interrupted Lionel pulling on his friend’s sleeve.
“You really weren't joking when you said you wouldn’t let me snoop uh!”
“Leave the mystery man to his secrets!”
“Mystery who?” Asked the lanky brother.
“He probably mean And-”
“Pyotr! We talked about this already, did we not?” scolded the dancer “He’s hiding away for a reason. Don’t ruin this!”
Micheal had interrupted his helpers a little too late. Keno had heard more than enough for him to connect the dots and Lionel could tell just by looking at the smile forming on the trans guy’s face.
“Well, we’ll get going~” the redhead cooed
While Lionel and Kennedy were making their way around the plaza offering their help here and there, their friends on the other side of the city were busy with their own dealings.
Artyom had called Isaak over to help calm down Vadim who was in a panic. Usually he would have called Kennedy but he knew he would probably be helping with Lionel’s proposal set-up and rehearsal today.
“What’s gotten to him?” asked Isaak, Vadim had locked himself into his room, crying and panicking. “Did you have a fight or something?”
“No! He woke up like this! I tried asking him what’s wrong but between all of his sobs I wasn’t able to properly grasp what the problem is.”
“What’s the best you could interpret?”
“I'm not sure? At one point he screamed ‘the water! The water!’ but that’s about all I caught...”
“What? What about the water? Is he scared of this year's downpour or something?”
“I don't know!”
Isaak sighed heavily before knocking on the distressed twin’s bedroom door.
“Vadim… Can you open the door? Can we talk?” Shuffling could be heard behind the door “You said something about the waters... What is this about?”
“The water won’t come down!” Vee screamed back “It’s just not going to! I’ve seen it! I know it!”
“What? This can’t be true! Why wouldn’t they?”
Tumblr media
“I dreamed about it. The water isn’t going down today… It’s not going down for a while!”
“You dreamed of it?” Arty asked, confused
“Don’t you think it was just a nightmare?” Asked Isaak
“I doubt it!” Veed tried to recompose himself then put both his hands on Isaak’s shoulders “Look… Isaak. You’re smart right. You gotta believe me. I... I’d had multiple dreams before that turned out to be true. Usually they predict things far in the future, like months or years ahead. This one however, it’s so short notice… but I know this is one of them still!”
“W-wha…?”
“H-how?”
“I saw in my dreams that you’d become a transman… I’ve seen months in advance that Arty would get promoted to be the royal artificer.” He started pacing around. “At first I choked it up to coincidence or just me misremembering old dreams. But after 10 or 12 of them happening I’ve come to recognize the specific energy I feel when I'm having a precognitive dream. I know the water not coming down is an event I foresaw!”
“Wait.. You could see the future and never told us?” Asked Artyom “Why keep it from us?”
“All the dreams I had so far where things I felt were better left unsaid. Would you have liked me ruining the surprise of your promotions month before you even applied and risk you not putting in the effort because you’d think you already had it secured? Should I have personally inserted myself in Isaak’s self discovery years before he realized he was trans and potentially make Isaak feel pushed into being trans and make him steer in the opposite direction?! It’s fucking complicated but one thing I can tell you is that it wasn’t my place to say anything. Things were bound to happen without my input. Me saying anything could have made things worse instead!”
“Please calm down!” Whispered Isaak “Forget about the old dreams for now. Let’s focus on the water dream. What can you tell us about it? How do you know it’s gonna be today and not next year that the water won't come down? Wouldn’t it make more sense since all your other dreams predicted things way far ahead?”
“I.. All I know is that the water won’t come down, and since the reserves we got were only enough to have us last through winter we’ll have a huge problem going through spring a d summer.” Vadim retreated back into his room, the door still open. He sat on his bed. “I know it’s going to be this year because of a key event I know is going to happen today… Arty knows what I'm talking about…”
“Oh.. yeah I know what you mean…”
“What’s the key event?”
“Well.. Er…” Arty tried thinking of something to say that wouldn’t expose Lionel’s romantic plans. “The new dancers! This year we got new dancers. We’re probably going to have a reveal/introduction to the new performers that we won't get next year…”
It wasn’t the best excuse but since it technically was true, Isaak wouldn’t catch him in a lie.
Isaak sat next to Vadim. Everyone stayed silent for what felt like an eternity. Isaak was thinking deep and hard about the upcoming event. The waters weren’t going to come down if what Vee saw was true but then what? Neither of them could do anything. They couldn’t just fly up in the clouds and order the water to come down. Warning the population before the celebration wouldn’t help either. At best they’d be laughed at, at worst it would cause unnecessary panic. Had they know earlier maybe they could have told The Highness to make bigger reserves but it was a one-day notice. Nothing could be done.
“Well.. We should get going…”bluntly said Isaak “The celebration will start soon”
“WHAT?! What about the waters!” Vadim cried
“What do you want me to do? There’s nothing any of us can do! The only thing we can do right now is wait until after the celebration to talk to The Highness about it!” He painfully sighed ‘We don’t need to create chaos or have you branded as the bad omen that caused it all, alright? Let’s go.”
“I guess you’re right…”
The twins swapped their usual shawl for their celebration ones before all three of them made their way out to the plaza, they quickly stopped by Isaak’s place for him to change his shawl before finally arriving at the festival.
After a ten minute walk and another five to find their missing 2 friends the group was finally reunited. Both the blue haired guy and the twin had put on a brave face, fainting happiness even if the fear of what might come upon them today. When he saw Isaak, Lionel’s excitement for his proposal was renewed. He was too blinded by his daydreaming to notice the tenseness coming from his partner. He had his plan playing on repeat in his head: First they would all raise their banners, a swig of Pecha would be drunk, they would watch the Salmalion dance and then, right before the rain would pour down, he’d get down on one knee and ask Isaak for his hand. It would be perfect!
“Arty! Vadim! You won’t believe what I discovered today!” Kennedy said with a smug grin, Lionel shaking his head behind him. “Guess who the new dancers are this year~”
“Micheal? That’s not a secret.” replied Artyom
“Yeah yeah we all know about him. I'm talking about his partner. The butt of the beast!”
“Oh? They changed too?” the other twins attention was caught “I thought only Micheal’s dad retired to pass down the role on him.”
“Weeelllllll… Have you seen your brother today? Isn’t he suspiciously missing in action right now?”
“No way Andrei is performing. That’s just too unlike him!”
“Yeah, he’d be way too embarrassed to do something like this!”
“Why do you think the identity of the new dancer is kept hidden! It’s his shame!” Kennedy made exaggerated dramatic gestures “He can’t bear to have it known. Too bad his best friends accidentally let it slip <3”
“Wouldn’t you two know already?” asked Isaak “Wasn’t that the key event that-”
“We shouldn’t talk about the dream thing!” Shouted Artyom, his hand covering Isaak’s mouth “Y-you said it yourself! We don’t need to create unnecessary chaos!”
Isaak nodded. He planned to tell Lionel and Kennedy but maybe it was best not to, Kenny might go around and spread rumors. Besides now that he thinks about it, it was possible Vadim had only seen Micheal in his dream and not the other dancer. Micheal was kind of a bigger deal, family traditions and all.
After reassuring and distracting the two tall guys away from the dream talk, it was finally time for the festival to start. Every Anacree in town were out in the street laughing and partying. One-handed banners branded with the face of their chimera god were distributed throughout the crowds. Some people waved their banner in the air, others attached them to their back with lockbound magic and more simply held onto theirs. Once everyone had their banners the music started. It wasn’t time for the grand dance yet but there was always some form of party dancing before that. People danced, people drank, they looked at the sky brandishing their flags. Everyone was celebrating, even Isaak and Artyom who had forgotten about their prior talk. Only Vadim remembered and looked up with eye full of worry.
“Hey Vitamin!” He thoughts were interrupted by Kennedy. “The Salmalion is about to make its entrance. Should we cheer by saying Andrei names at the end? Don’t you wanna see his reaction?”
“Uh? N-no. Let’s not… We.. We don’t need to torment him.” Vadim whispered, Kenny’s mood suddenly shifting.
“Are you alright? I know you’ve always been the quiet twin but even by your standards you’ve been awfully silent. What’s the matter?”
“It… Youll see later…”
Kennedy looked around at his friends.
“Er..” He leaned in closed and whispered “It’s not about Lionel’s proposal is it? Did Isaak talk about not wanting to be with Lionel when you were away or something?”
“No, no! It’s fine… Just don’t worry about it for now…”
Not worrying wasn’t gonna be easy. He didn’t know what was bugging Vadim but he knew that tonight was a big night for Lio and he really didn’t want this life milestone to be ruined. There wasn’t anything for him to do for now beside smiling and not letting Lionel catch on any potential tension. He’d make sure he was going to propose and everyone would be happy. Just after this dance it will be time. 
Tumblr media
While it was clear it was just two men in a costume, for a brief moment under the projector, it felt like it was a real beast. It jumped effortlessly onto the pillars, standing and bucking as if it was one single living being. It showed how skilled and in prefect synch the two performers were. People probably already forgot these were two newbie performing in front of people for the first time. They weren’t untrained of course, but a first time show in front of so many eye on such an important date was sure to put them under pressure.
Lionel had waited long enough, the show was going to conclude soon and his moment had come. He poked Isaak’s shoulder to get his attention. It was had for the guy to pry his eyes away from the dazzling display. If it really was Andrei under there, he was truly impressed. Seeing that his first attempt was mostly unsuccessful (only getting his 3 other friend’s attention but not Isaak’s), the tan guy nudged his boyfriend a second time. 
“Yeah? What is it?” Isaak said, his eyes still locked on the green creature kneeling and bowing indicating the end of the dance.
“Look” giggled Lionel, his voice coming from much lower than what Isaak was used to
The trans guy looked down toward the source of the voice. Lionel was kneeling down, just like the beast did a moment ago.
“Whe. Wha? Wait. What?!” incoherent questions was all he could mutter
“Will yo-”
“Well yeah?! Of course!”
“You didn't even let me finish!”
“S-Sorry… Go ahead. I won't interrupt this time!”
Lionel stood back up and laughed
“No, no, no really go ahead and do it again! I didn’t mean to cut you off!”
“It’s fine! I can’t deny it didn't go down the way I expected but I think we’ll get to laugh about it for quite some time!”
“At least say it in full! I wanna hear it!”
“Alright! Alright!” Lio paused dramatically, looking straight into his partner’s eye who grew with impatience. “Will you marry me?”
“Yes! Yes I will!”
The blue-haired man hugged his soulmate tightly, a good portion of the crown now looking at them cheering. Proposals were not uncommon on this celebration, to them it was just something more to be happy about and celebrate. To them kissing under the torrential rain of the spring downpour was just so much more romantic… But there was no rain.
Isaak’s mind had been completely focused on the celebration and then the proposal that he had all forgotten about the whole water premonitions. He was only reminded of it when murmurs grew through out the crowds. It should have started raining by now and everyone was talking about it. What was going on? Did they start celebrating a bit too early? Were the new dancers not good enough for the god so he decided not to grant them water? They waited. A few more minutes, then an hour, then two more… The water... It really wasn’t coming down.
Vadim was right.
Panic set in. People started crying, shouting at the sky, banners were thrown, glass shattered. At the middle of it Vadim was frozen. I knew this would happen, and he wasn’t able to stop it. Why didn’t he predict it sooner, before winter back then there was still time? What was the point of him getting his vision right before the fatal event?
Eventually, guards came down to minimize the chaos. Lionel who was a guard currently off duty was asked to join in too and get the population under control. Once the crowd was deemed calm enough The Highness walked onto the stage. Their voice instantly got everyone to look at them. They spoke in the most soothing voice, yet a tinge of coldness could be felt.
“Please. I urge every one of you to stay calm. Surely our dear Salmalion is merely testing us. Showing some slight displeasure at this year’s show perhaps. I'm sure the spring rain will come soon. Please be patient.”
___________
Chapter 2
   It was the next afternoon and the rain still hadn’t started. The entire population was agitated, speculations ran rampant and no matter how many speeches The Highness gave the mass couldn’t be calmed. There was yesterday’s speech, a closed off consort with elites, messengers sent to other towns to estimate the extent of the rain situation, traders deployed to find or exchange money for freshwater supplies, yet another public speech and finally there was today’s consultation with the artificer team.
Artyom was the leader of most of these tinkerers so he knew he had to be on top of his game today. With both Vadim’s info and what he heard from the prior meeting he had already started drafting inventions. He had a number of blueprints tucked under his arms. They were very rough as he had drawn them himself and didn’t ask his artistically skilled twin to clean them up for him. Vadim already had enough on his plate so he let him sleep throughout the night while he stayed up until dawn to work.
“Your Highness, let me start up the meeting with what I have drafted!” he exclaimed, already laying down his papers on the table. “With enough steel and glass we could work out some thermal desalination! We’d need salt water for this. I figured since we can't conjure water out of thin air and we know the oceans don’t rise up during winter we should have no issues with that...”
“Go on” encouraged the royal figure, surprisingly not being bothered by Arty cutting them off.
“My design is for the most part just 3 components. A first container filled with salt water, a heat source placed under the container and finally an empty container linked to the first by a tube.” he explained as he pointed to his scribbles laid down on the table. All the other workers followed in silence. “If everything works the way I think it will, the water will evaporate from the heat then drip down into the second container. The salt being too heavy and not able to turn into gas will remain in the first container!”
Everyone nodded. On paper it sounded logical.
Tumblr media
“Have you tried it out on a small scale?” asked the town leader “How fast would the process be? How much heat would we need to generate to turn a large amount of salt water into fresh water?”
“I-I haven’t had the time to test it out on such short notice but I'm very confident in the process!” Artyom stuttered “Um.. Additionally I… Would it be possible to have a private consultation regarding the issue.. My brother wanted to speak with you on the matter and-”
“I don’t have the time at the present. I understand that everyone is worried but I cannot address everyone’s concern individually.”
“Well actually it was a more helpful insight really..”
“Have him consult the elite Majis then. If whatever he has to say is pertinent enough it will get back to me. Now go and get this unsalty thingy test out. If it doesn't work, report back to me with a new idea. Do not fail me, you would fail the people as a whole”
“Of course your Highness. I won’t disappoint.”
The tinkering twin lowered his head. Well at least he tried and so far his machinery plans were accepted. With this approval The Highness dismissed everyone. From this day until the waters were back or a new source of fresh water was found, they would all have to work on Artyom’s desalination plans. Most of them were quite happy with how the meeting went. None of them had to speak or fumble with their half baked ideas. What Arty had displayed here truly showed why he was picked to be the royal artificer and not just another worker.
Isaak was the one to contact then, he though to himself. Isaak wasn’t an elite Maji officially yet but he had been granted a staff last month meaning he was bound to be promoted in the coming weeks. In this world there was 2 types of magic: Lumos and Silvusion. Lumos allowed Maji to turn pure light into solid objects and projectiles while Silvusion-which technically still was a light based spellcraft- was the art of using mirrors to display images. It’s main use was entertainment and every house had a big mirror in their living room that would be used like a television. However it had its tactical use also; all elites and Highness-approved individuals like the royal artificer got to have a smaller pocket-sized mirror they could use like a cellphone of sorts in order to communicate long distance. Artyom pulled his pocket mirror out. Did Isaak also receive his when he got his staff or were they waiting for his official graduation? He thought.
“Should we start working now?” asked one of the other engineers who was following Arty out of the royal quarters along with everyone else.
“Ah… yeah..kind of. Everyone go get your stuff and meet me at the smithing house. I need to fetch a couple things before we get started… maybe get those prints cleaned up too.”
Tumblr media
“Artyom. I need to talk to you.”
“Is it urgent? I'm kinda busy right now..” he shook his blueprints “Royal duties and stuff…”
“...Hmmm… I guess not…”
“Is it about the dance? I know the Highness said that maybe it didn’t rain because the performance wasn’t good enough but I personally don’t think so. Yo-...Micheal and his partner did a great job!”
“Ah.. Thanks for your input. I'll be sure to forward it to Micheal.”
It felt immensely weird for him to both see his older brother vulnerable like this and having to console him. He hoped his words were enough for the time being. There was just so much for him to worry about and execute. He wasted no time grabbing his equally sulking twin out of the house and on their way to their half-blind friend. On their way there the double got to talk a bit about what was to come and Vadim brought up an interesting point.
“Do you really have to ask Isaak to get us in touch with the elite Majis? Can’t we go to them directly?”
“We cant because a lot of them are snobs who hates me.”
“What? Since when?”
“Since the beginning pretty much. They don’t like how, unlike the others, I do not consider the use of Lumos in my builds. They all think magic is the most important thing and tech needs to evolve with it. I don’t believe in that and still managed to make it as the royal artificer. It pisses them off.”
“I see… But Isaak… don’t you think he’d rather focus on his engagement with Lionel right now?”
“It’s just gonna be a small favor in order to help everyone! It’s not like I'm going to completely prevent him from designing his new family sash!”
He did agree with Vadim and didn’t really want to involve Isaak, but if he wanted the Majis to listen to him and his brother he needed someone the elites had faith in to speak on their behalf.
He wondered how Lionel was dealing with all of this also. Isaak knew about the rain situation but Lionel didn’t. Did he feel like his proposal was ruined because of it? Did he think that maybe he was somehow responsible for the crisis because the god disapproved of their union? He didn’t get to find out just yet since when they arrived Lionel was nowhere to be seen. He was probably on guard duty today.
“Hey Ziki”
“You know I don’t like it when you call me that!”
“Sorry. You know how I am when I'm nervous, being all sweet and stuff. Using nicknames is part of it.”
“Yeah, yeah. What is it?” the blue haired man asked, lifting his head away from the paper he was drawing on. “How did the royal meeting go?”
“Good for the most part. I have all the machinery planned out. I still need to get Vadim heard by The Highness tho…”
“You didn’t get to mention it during the meeting?”
“I did! It’s just that they said he’d need to ask an elite Maji first…”
“I'm.. I'm still technically a scholar Maji. I didn’t graduate to elite just yet.”
“I know but you can talk with them! They wont listen to me plus I need to go work on the desalination system.” Arty grabbed Isaak's hands “Can you talk to them for us? Bring Vee with you maybe?”
“Fine.” Isaak replied as he looked back at his less than stellar drawing of a shawl. “If Vadim help me with this design we can call it even.”
“Of course! I don’t mind” replied Vadim, finally participating in the conversation. “I can whip up something real quick right now and we can check with the Maji later.”
“Hmm no. Let’s go see the elites first. It’s more important”.
Isaak felt both flattered and nervous at the idea that he was the only one able to help the twins in their situation. He left like a small hero almost. If the elites listened Vadim could be bumped up to a trusted position of sort like ‘the royal medium’ and get access to a pocket mirror he’d use any time he gets an important vision. Perhaps the elites could find a way to more precisely channel his ability and get him to see critical events on command.
The trans guy was honestly just excited about visiting the elite's quarters. As a simple scholar he didn't get to visit the noble district often unlike Artyom who had his smithing house there. The trio made their way through the plaza, up the small incline that led to the inner wall separating the commoner’s zone from the noble district and along the housing street. When they passed by the smithing house Arty split from the group leaving Isaak and Vadim to continue toward the elite’s tower.
Out of all the buildings, the elite’s tower was the prettiest according to Isaak. Sure The Highness’s castle was gorgeous as well but to him the slimmer elegant glass tower was much more pleasing to the eye than the wide golden palace. There was no one guarding the tower today. The water crisis probably had most guards in town keeping everyone calm and stop the most distressed individuals from attacking merchants and stealing any water they could get. Lionel was probably in the thick of it right now.
Inside, the two men made their way up the spiraling stairs. It was Vadim’s first time here and Isaak could tell it was scaring him a little.
“The elites can be a bit snooty but they aren’t outright dickheads. Don’t sweat it too much.”
It didn’t completely reassure the guy but Vee appreciated the gesture nonetheless. He remained silent the entire way up, following the scholar around the place. They eventually stopped in a long hallway, dozens of blue doors lining the sides of the crystal-decorated walls. Isaak pointed at one in particular and gave a little nod to encourage Vadim to enter.
“He-hello?” He shyly muttered, a crowd of staff-wielding men turned toward him “Erm…”
“The Highness told us to consult you regarding a matter we dim of utmost importance” declared Isaak
“More important than the water shortage that we have to deal with?!” barked one of the older Maji
“Well… Kind of?” Isaak braced himself a bit “My friend over here has an ability that could prove useful.”
“Can he create water?”
“Locate a freshwater source?”
“Call the rain on command?”
“N-no he cannot do any of that” Isaak was having a harder time than he expected.
“What is it then”
“He can dream of the future. He actually told me about the rain not coming down hours before it happened.”
“How long did he know about it?”
“Why weren’t we notified”
“Eh. I was gonna ask if he was the cause of it but looking at how pathetic and terrified he is I doubt it!”
Tumblr media
“I only dreamed about it the night prior. I had slept in that day so when I woke up it was already too late to do anything! Isaak told me not to tell anyone so as to not cause panic or make me look like a bad omen!” he yelled before taking a deep breath. “While I got this vision only hours before it came true, I usually have most of my visions months or years ahead. If you can find in yourself to trust me I'll be sure to notify the council of any visions deemed important that I get.”
“What other predictions did you get?”
“How often do you get them?”
“How do you tell the difference between a regular dream and a vision?”
“I.. I usually get only 2 or 3 visions per year and they are mostly about my friends..”
“We could potentially weaponize this!” said a very old Maji who had been silent until now. “Let’s say his vision only comes to him if it involves his friends. The water crisis involved everyone so it’s fair to say it still follows the ‘friend parameter’. All we need is to always have one of his friends participating in important events so we can get predictions.”
“Isaak is his friend, we could use him!”
“Yeah!”
“We can’t involve him with everything. We only get 3 predictions a year!”
“You guys are all making plans but we haven’t even got any kind of proof this is true!”
“Hmhmm! Anyone can say ‘I saw it in a dream’ after it has already happened.”
“We could potentially put it to the test using Isaak”
“Do we think? Personally I don’t want to involve anyone not approved in important dealings. Not without the proof Artyom can predict things accurately and within a reasonable time frame.”
“I-I'm Vadim actually... Artyom is my”
“Yeah yeah”
The room of elites was split. On one side some thought using the two young folk was a good idea, on the other were the ones wanting proof first. There was also a smaller pool of ‘wizards’ completely uninterested in the speculated precognitive abilities. In all honesty Isaak was less than thrilled to hear all these people he looked at as peers casually discussing using him as a test subject. Sure, he’d be glad to help with Vadim’s gift but they made it sound like they were going to throw him into dangerous situations just to see what would happen. He was starting to think this was a terrible idea.
“I... Ah…” Isaak hesitated “We’ll let you think about it. Vee and I need to go back to Artyom… Vadim is supposed to help with the blue prints…”
The entire room was too busy debating with each other to reply to the scholar so him and his companion quickly made their exit.
“That’s... That’s not at all how I envisioned this unfold…”
“Yeah… Me neither…”
A bit defeated, they made their way back to the smithing house. Isaak hated that name to be honest. Artyom was the one to name it and he wasn’t the most creative when it came to naming things… well beside giving people nicknames but that wasn’t the same, with nicknames you get a base name to work off.
Inside the tinkering warehouse everyone was huddled around something out of the two friends’s view. They could hear them whispering to each other but couldn’t understand what was said as so many voices spoke simultaneously. A familiar voice drowned them all.
“Alright boys! Time for a taste test!”
Now part of the circle, the scholar watched Artyom take a generous gulp of water out of a beaker. Looking at the guy’s face the water didn’t taste salty. His idea had worked.
“The water temperature aside, it taste decent! I think we’re good to go for the larger scale production!” he declared before spotting his twin in the crowd. “Right on time Vee! Let’s get the schematics polished so we don’t have any mishaps from misreadings! Everyone, while we work on the papers yall can already get the smelters ready. We’ll need a bunch of stuff melted down to make enough stations to generate water for everyone in town!”
Tumblr media
Away from the rest of the workers, Isaak leaned in toward the artificer leader.
“Do you think this will generate enough water for everyone?” he asked
“To be honest? No. But it’s better than nothing. It will probably be tightly rationed with only the nobles getting comfortable supplies at best…”
“Yeah I figured also…”
“My first plan was actually to build a pump that reached all the way up there to siphon the water back down to us… But there’s no way we can build that high…”
“What about the river’s source?” chimed Vadim “the water of our lake came from the Nicolas river.. Maybe if we followed it to the source…”
“I heard e scouting team was sent there already” replied the other twin
“Let’s hope we’re the closest to it.” stated Isaak “If the water crisis is worldwide there’s no doubt any nearby town would also check any close-by water sources and if they capture it for themselves before we do it could get dicey…”
“Yeah…”
“Well at the very least we got some hopes with your water-conversion plants!”
Artyom nodded then started walking away, blueprints in hand. As much as he enjoyed the chitchat it was time for him to get to work. The sooner he got his men to build the faster they could start refilling the water reserves.
Arty wasn’t the only one who needed to go back to work, so did Vadim. It wasn’t the same kind of work however. He gently nudged his taller friend.
“Let’s get home and start drafting those shawl designs shall we?”
Proposals and weddings were completely different in Anacree culture. When proposing there weren't any rings needed, they still did the kneeling thing like humans do but that was about the only thing they had in common. After popping the question there was no month or year-long waiting times until the officialization of the union. There weren't any big party celebrations either. Here things were simple: first one partner proposed, then after accepting the other partner was to design the shawl they and their future children would wear until they too get married.
There were many different styles of shawls but only 3 categories of union shawls. First there were the ones which were designed by mixing attributes from both partner’s shawl such as taking the color of one and the trim-cut of the second. Next there was the one who was brand new, taking no cue from the pre-wedding garments and displaying a completely different color and cut. Finally there were the ‘extensions’, in place of making a new shawl the submissive partner would simply start wearing the same shawl as the dominant’s family kind of like humans (and anacrees to an extent) do with last names. This last one was very common amongst nobles.
“What kind of designs were you thinking of?”
“Hmm I'm not sure… I know Lionel doesn't really care about keeping his shawl and while I love mine I feel like adding a touch of color would make him happy. So regardless of if I merge both designs or make something new, I’d go for something that has some bright trim like on his cloth. I do really like having gold bits on the ends though! It gives the shawl some nice weight to it…”
Vee took mental notes of it all. He already had some designs floating through his head but he pushed them aside at first. He was focusing, searching the back of his head. Had he any dreams that hadn’t happened yet where he saw Isaak with a different shawl? He thought. Had he already seen what he knew was the lovers destined union cloth? No. The only prediction that didn’t remember having taken place yet was one with Artyom sitting down on the lake shores, it taking place after the crisis was over no doubt.
___________
Chapter 3
Tumblr media
The entire month it took to have these made were a decent distraction for the three people involved. They couldn’t completely ignore the drought however. All 5 friends were very concerned, each having their reasons. Kennedy’s crops were shriveling making his harvest pitiful and leaving him and his clients hungry, Lionel was constantly dealing with thieves and people driven mad from dehydration, Artyom was stressed from the responsibility of running the water conversion plant that didn’t produce nearly enough for everyone, Vadim slept more than usual in a poor attempt at triggering his precognitive dreams in order to find a solutions, and Isaak he just.. He felt the pressure of him needing to do something but compared to the other he felt like he wasn’t in the place to be feeling that way. 
He wasn’t a guard, people didn't rely on him for food or water, he couldn’t predict the future either so why did he feel so responsible somehow? Even after finally being officially promoted to elite Maji rank he wasn’t in any position to do anything. None of the elite Majis were from what he had been briefed. As far as they and The Highness were concerned they were just going to wait for the water to come down by itself once the god decided it was time. He didn’t like this idea at all.
Isaak sat at the window back in the elite's tower looking up at the sunset-red skies and watching the humongous watery orb above. It seems almost reachable from up there.
“You’ve missed another meeting” said Uriel, one of the other elites
“My presence wasn’t needed” replied Isaak “I bet all you did was talk about changing one of the tower room decorations again.”
“It was about changing the roof’s golden pole actually…” The pink haired man leaned on the window ledge. “There’s not much we can do about the water situation so for us life goes on. We just focus on whatever we would as if everything was normal.”
“So we just sit there while everyone else dies?!”
“I don’t like it either, you know.”
They stayed silent for a while, looking up at the life fluid hovering high up above.
“What’s the dark spot at the center of it?” asked the new elite.
“It’s a crystal I think… If I recall correctly Salazar confirmed it was a crystal when he looked at it with his spyglass.”
“We use crystal gems in our staves to focus our magic…”
“Yeah.”
“And we pull said magic out of our own crystalline chest pearl right?”
“Hmhmm. And the crystal up there is surely powered or using magic to keep the waters up all winter.”
“What if we broke it?”
“Uh?!”
“The crystal at the core. If we broke it there wouldn’t be any magic to keep the water up! We’d get our water back and we won’t keep dieing!”
“Isaak! Do you even hear yourself? Do you really want to defy God, break one of his gifts and go against his judgment?!”
“Do YOU have a better idea besides sitting on your ass and doing nothing?!”
“Alright.. Let’s entertain for a minute your idea of destroying the crystal. How are you gonna get up there? Because you nor any of us could cast a luminous projectile that would fly that far.”
Isaak remained quiet for a while, trying to think of something.
“Well… er…building with bricks and steel seems unfeasible… Too many resources needed… would take too long aswell…” He hadn’t thought that far.. He hadn’t really thought at all to be fair. The idea had hit in only a few seconds ago. “We could use Lumos to create a ladder or stairs..”
“So have a full team to go up there? Because you can’t have a group on the ground making the ladder since we can’t conjure magic that far and having only one person go on their own they will tire themselves and eventually be too weak to keep their cast solid.”
“Well I suppose yes…”
“What if one accidentally falls off and the entire focus is lost? Everyone would fall to their doom”
“Fine! I haven’t figured it out yet!” The trans man shouted “I still think it’s the best option!”
“It’s a foolish plan.” Uriel gently put a hand on Isaak’s shoulder. “You’re still young and new to the Maji. Trust me it’s not a good idea.”
The fresh Maji pushed away his senior. He wasn’t going to drop it, not yet. Unless he wasn’t able to come up with any method of going up he would keep this as his main plan. Without wasting any time he sat at his desk, completely ignoring Uriel who was still very much in his room. Isaak opened his notebook and started scribbling away.
He did his best putting down every potential method of getting up with Maji that he could think of. Stairs, ladders, ropes, trampolines of sorts. Each and every plan fell flat for the same reasons: they would all either consume way too much energy for a solo expedition or even if a team was used any loss of focus could unmaterialized the Lumos and get everyone killed. Only the greatest of the elite would be able to pull it off and there was no way they’d agree with this plan if Uriel’s reaction was anything to go by.
“Are you done?” said the unimpressed dark skinned elite who kept watching as Isaak struggled to come up with anything viable. “Are you willing to listen to reason?”
“I am NOT done!” snapped the newbie. “I still have plenty of ideas!”
Isaak stormed out. In truth he didn’t have much left in his head. He knew someone who might however: Artyom. His specialty was to build contraptions that could function without Maji after all. Surely he could come up with something. A sort of huge harpoon launcher that could attach a rope to the crystal that Isaak could climb? A catapult that could safely send him up? A precise canon that could swiftly dispose of the crystal perhaps?
He ran straight toward the water plants. He didn’t stop for a second even if his lungs were burning from the efforts. At the moment it didn’t really care about the dryness in his mouth, the sharp pain in his chest or the dizziness getting to his head. He had hopes.
Tumblr media
“Arty! I need a favor from you!”
“U-uh? What?”
“I need you to make a machine that can get me up there! O-Or something that can shoot far enough to penetrate the waters and reach the crystal inside!”
“What?! What are you on about?” The orange-coded twin was completely taken aback and confused. It wasn’t like the guy to talk crazy like this. If anything, cookie plans was his field of expertise, not Isaak. “You want to go up there? To get the water down?”
The former scholar looked around for a moment. Both the artificer Artyom was talking to a minute ago and all the other workers in earshot were looking at him funny.
“I..ah… Let’s talk about it in private okay?”
“Okay?...”
The royal artificer led his friend to a less populated part of the plant.
“So you wanna get up there… What are you gonna do when you’re there? Politely ask the water to come down?”
“I'm gonna shatter the crystal” Isaak stated matter-of-factly
“WHAT?!”
“I'm gonna break it. It’s gonna break the spell that keeps the water up.”
“I-I. Wh.. We-I mean I guess it could work.. But how? Like? What do you want me to build to get you up there? How are you gonna break the crystal?”
“I don’t know how to get up there, that's why I'm asking you. Lumos Maji wouldn’t work as I’d get exhausted before I even reach a tenth of the distance so if Maji won’t work you’d work something out!”
“I'm..flattered you think I could come up with something…” Arty started walking around as he started racking his brain. “Hmmm..perhaps…”
The artificer walked away still in his thoughts, the Maji trailing him closely. Isaak could hear him mumbling as he went along, unable to grasp what was being said. Eventually they reached the twin’s house where Arty shot straight to his bedroom. There he reached for one of the shelves above his desk and brought down a small wooden boat.
“A boat? I'm trying to fly up… not… you know…” Isaak was quite confused.
“I made two of these for Vadim and I to play with. We’d spend entire afternoons on the lake shore to watch our little boats uncontrollably zip by. One day my boat hit a rock but rather than crashing and sinking, it got launched in the air and the sail catching the wind pushed it really far through the air. You know, the same way it can help the boat glide on water but up? Maybe we could do something like this?”
“It does sound a bit crazy…”
“Yeah and so far all my crazy ideas worked out so maybe~”
“I… If you think it can work, I'll put my faith in you.”
“For the take off I’d need a machine that can either catapult the boat or generate a big enough gust of wind.” the brunette said as he started to scribble down ideas. “Once up in the air a steady flow of air could keep you sailing and fall back slowly. The airflow could be maintained with a spinning fan operated with a rotating lever… But then the descent… I don't thin the wind and sail could keep the fall slow and gentle.. Not at this angle at least…” Artyom grabbed his small wooden boat, lifted it up and let it fall to the ground. He gave a small nod before picking it back up, tying up his pillowcase to it and dropping it one more time. This fell noticeably slower this time around. It was still a hard fall for the small toy but it was undeniably slower than before. “Yeah! A bigger horizontal sail could work… It would need to be tucked up or folded during the take off though, otherwise it could prevent the ship from taking off entirely.”
Isaak didn’t understand much of what the tinkerer was saying but it seemed like he had promising plans.
“So here’s what I have so far: we’d need a small boat as a base, anything too big could make the take-off harder but big enough to fit the team.”
“Team?” Isaak asked
“Well yeah, you’d need at least 2 people; one who’ll operate the fan and the other to work the sail… I mean I could potentially see how I could fit things in a way where you’d be able to work the lever with one hand and the sail with the other but then I wouldn’t have any space to put the folded up second sail for the descent.” Artyom scratched his chin. “Come to think of it, depending on how big of a sail it would need to be, I might not have enough space either way… That would need to be tested further first…”
“Yeah and even if I could operate both at once, I would need at least one free hand to cast any spell to get right of the crystal…”
“Oh yeah! That too!”
“A two-man team is inevitable…”
“I mean, would Lionel let you go up there on your own anyway?”
“Ahah! No! No, he wouldn’t!” Isaak paused, realizing he had thought about so many parts of his plan but had yet to even consult with his husband about it. “I’ll talk to him.”
“Take your time with it cause I got a lot to work on if we want this to work.”
Isaak nodded before making his exit. Would Lionel agree to his plan? If he did would he even have the time between his guard duties? If his husband didn't have the time, who would he turn to to be his co-pilot? Arty was still needed at the plant, Vadim would never do anything this dangerous and Kennedy… Maybe Kennedy would agree.
The Maji made his way to the marketplace as it was where Lio was posted most of the time. The market was a shell off itself. Evening was approaching but it should still be active for an hour or two before Lionel would probably patrol around town.Thankfully he arrived on time. He took a good look at the few stands still up around him. The fruits and vegetables were pitifully small compared to previous harvest, the fish booths that would usually pop up this season were nowhere in sight and while the meat stand seemed to still have decent produce it was only a matter of time until all the livestocks that were fattened up during winter would run out.
Tumblr media
Isaak stopped in front of a stand for a moment, it was a tea stand. Tea merchants were the only one to still prosper in these times as people would use the dried leaves to flavor the muddy-tasting waters some people were able to dig out of the soil since the desalted water was distributed in such small rations.
“Isaak?” called a familiar voice behind him
“Uh?!” he turned around, now facing his lover.
“What are you doing here? Aren’t you supposed to be at the tower?”
“Oh, yeah. I was looking for you actually!” the trans man replied, nodding his head to the side to motion Lionel to move away so they could talk in private.
“What’s the matter?”
“I.. Arty and I have started on a plan to get the water back but I’d need your help.”
“Sure?” the tan man was a bit apprehensive. “What do you need me to do?”
“Arty is building a ship to get us up. I’d need you to fly it with me. I can’t operate it on my own.”
“F-Fly?”
“I know it’s a bit of a wild plan but.. I know it’s gonna work!... It has to…”
“Wh… Okay. Have you tested the ship already or…”
“Artyom is still building the schematics for it actually.”
Lionel thought about it for a moment. Flying up sounded crazy, even more so considering they hadn’t even tested whatever machine they wanted to use. He looked up at their end goal.
“What did Vadim say about all this?” he asked.
“Uh? I.. I haven’t talked to him today” Isaak’s confusion didn’t last long. “He didn’t get any visions about it. Not yet as far as I know… If he gets a vision where it ends badly of course I won't go through with it.”
“Hmm..”
“Besides, we can’t really get a prediction any time soon, I think. He said he gets like 3 a year and he already had one last month. The two he has left probably won't happen for a while…”
“Not necessarily.. Even if he used to have visions at regular intervals his last vision was clearly a break in his usually precognitive habits with it being a short term prediction.”
“True…”
Tumblr media
He sighed heavily and made his way to the kitchen. On his way he walked by this twin’s room, he seemed hard at work. He hesitated between continuing his route downstairs or inspecting what his brother was doing. Before he could make a decision Artyom noticed him.
“Hey sleepyhead. How is the dream thing going?”
“Still nothing worthwhile… Looks like you got something going?”
“I.. Isaak asked me to build him a fucking flying machine…”
“You sound both excited and terrified at the idea.”
“Fuck yeah I am! On one hand IT’S A FREAKING COOL IDEA! But on the other hand it’s like… He could crash and die, you know?! BUT IT’S STILL A FREAKING COOL IDEA SO IMMA DO IT!”
It was often like this with Artyom, excitement made almost any danger seem trivial in the heat of the moment. Surely later when he’d be testing things on the field he’d be much more cautious. Sure he liked risky fun but not to the point of putting his friends life on the line.
The artificer spent quite a long time explaining in detail what he and Isaak were planning. Vadim soaked it all up. He prepared himself mentally for his upcoming clean-up of Arty’s blueprints. He knew he technically wouldn’t need to since his brother only asked for clean-ups when someone else would need to follow the drawn instructions. Vee didn’t really care if this was going to be a solo build-job for Arty, he really wanted to draw those prints. He wanted to feel useful in these times of crisis. If he couldn’t bring any predictions, this was the only good thing he could provide.
___________
Chapter 4
   It didn’t take long for word about Isaak’s skyward expedition to spread around and reach the rest of the elite team. Even if words hadn’t spread they would have been found out now that testing would start. Artyom had spent weeks on this vessel and was ready to see it fly.
For now, the elites only watched from a distance but at the first sign of promising success they knew they might need to intervene. They couldn’t let Isaak go up and defy the natural course of nature, they could certainly watch the fool crash and set the example for people not to follow in his footsteps.
Arty had set everything outside of the city walls. The entire group of friend was here: The artificer was checking all of his machinery, Isaak was composing himself the best he could to fight off his nervousness, Lionel was already seated in the boat ready to face it all, Vadim stood aside his eyes closed as if he was trying to conjure any last minute vision even Kennedy was here. He had pretty much given up on his crops at this point and had nothing better to do than watch his friend put all their effort into this outlandish plan of theirs. 
Tumblr media
The boat-like sky-machine was propped up onto a large wooden structure that had some semblance of a giant crossbow tilted upwards. Artyom was going on about the procedure.
“One last time. First I will pull the lever, it will release the cord and will launch you guys up. Once you reach the apex of the curve: Isaak, deploy the main sail and Lionel, start cranking the fan. At any sign of drop or instability deploy the parachute sail. Do not hesitate! It’s better to deploy early and be safe than too late and dead!”
“Don’t worry. We will follow your protocol.” reassured Isaak
“Just making sure. I won’t be able to remind you once you’re up in the air!”
“What’s your pronostic” asked Kennedy to Vadim
“I don't have any” the shorter man whispered back
“I don’t mean in terms of dream predictions. Just in general what do you think is gonna happen?
“I.. I don’t know…”
“Personally I think it will fly… Probably not upward enough for a first flight but it does look promising!”
Vadim stared at his companions fully getting ready to fly. Surely if it were to end in a death he’d have gotten a vision for it, right? They’d be fine regardless of whether it was going to work or not, right? If anything fatal were to happen and he didn’t warn them it would be his fault wouldn’t it?
“Just don’t sweat it with the visions, okay?” said the red head. “If you ask me; the more you focus on it the less likely you are to get one.”
“Uh?”
“Yeah! It’s like when I lose something. When I look for it I never find it but when I stop looking I suddenly find what I was looking for! Maybe your visions are the same. Just try to not think about it.”
“Are you two ready to see history getting written?” shouted Artyom from atop his contraction, lever in hand. “It’s time to take off. I hope you’re watching!”
Kenny and Vadim’s eyes locked onto the boat-thing. There was no turning back now, it was time. Vee looked at both Lionel and Isaak’s faces. Lionel seemed a bit apprehensive yet still very calm and focused. Isaak however… He didn't look sad or scared. He seemed determined, angry even. Rage and passion flowed through him. There wasn’t anyone else more invested in seeing this work, not even Artyom.
“On the count of 3!” Arty declared. Tension rising.
“One”
The artificer held the lever tight with both his hands. Sweat drops forming on his twin brother’s forehead.
“Two”
The two husbands firmly gripped their respective controls, ready to pilot the vessel around. Kennedy held his breath.
“Three!”
The moment Artyom pulled on the mechanism, Vadim closed his eyes. He wasn’t ready to see this. He didn’t want the disaster that could unfold to be forever etched in his brain. He couldn’t live with himself with their faces haunting him. Kennedy and Artyom didn’t notice Vee wasn’t watching, they were too busy following the flying machine with their eyes. It didn't launch far up but it was flying!
They were soaring. They were a bit shaken up by the force of the launch but they were still set on their objective. Isaak opened up the sail and held it’s bar firmly, Lionel getting at his own task on the same beat. With the current angle their best way of gaining altitude would be to gently ascend in a spiral.
Tumblr media
“How are things on your end Lio?”
“All good!”
“Great! This might be a slow climb. Let me know if you get too tired to keep the fan spinning.”
“I can manage. I was able to keep my arms up without resting for a full 6 minutes! This is nothing in comparison.”
Lionel’s strength was his pride. With his pearl cracked he couldn’t use any Maji, not even the very small Lumos spell any commoner could master. With the gem-like material their skeleton and pearl was made of, it was very difficult for Anacree to break a bone. The center pearl was where it was the densest making it even harder to crack. Somehow Lio managed to get his damaged. He didn’t remember when nor how. As far as he knew it was always like this.
The strong man put all his heart into getting that fan spinning and his lover did his best steering the ship upward. They wanted to reach the top but deep down they knew they wouldn’t make it on the first try. Right now it was a matter of seeing how high they could go.
After almost fifteen minutes it felt like they were so high up already, but looking at the water bubble above it was clear they were nowhere near high enough. They didn’t even make it half way there.
“I think we’re starting to lose altitude” Said Lionel
“Already?!”
“It’s kinda hard to judge right now but if we’re not already tipping, we’re about to.”
“Alright, let’s give it a couple more minutes before we initiate the descent.”
“Got it!”
It didn’t take long for them to have confirmation that they were indeed starting to fall. Without wasting any time Isaak folded back the mainsail and Lionel took out the large cloth that would serve as a parachute.
As the huge draping unfolded, part of it wrapped around the center pole of the boat. If it remained tangled it could get the men into serious trouble. Their descent was getting increasingly faster. Panic started to set in as the two started to wrestle with the fabric. They pulled and tugged but they didn’t seem to get anywhere.The tangled sail slapped them with the wind making it even hard for them to focus or do anything. 
“We need to get it off!” cried the younger one.
Both of them were terrified. All their efforts proving unsuccessful, Lionel let his instinct kick in.
“Get down!” He ordered
Isaak obeyed without asking any question. Now that his husband was out of the way, Lio started ramming into the pole with his shoulder. After only three blows the wooden mast splintered away. With the force of the wind, the fabric’s hectic flapping, gravity and momentum of Lionel’s blow, the pole flew up in the air and the sail finally got to open up properly.
The fall wasn’t over however. The delayed sail opening would probably mean they wouldn’t have as much time to slow down enough before impact but it seemed that the pole ripped a small but noticeable hole in the fabric, further impacting the speed of their descent.
Down on the ground Artyom and Kennedy were getting worried. Vadim was completely drowning out the outside world at this point. He hadn’t opened his eyes since the launch, even after Kenny shook him in celebration when he watched the boat glide through the air.
He didn’t move either when his brother called for him to help when the ship crashed nor when Kennedy ordered him to help. Vee was completely disconnected from his surrounding, hiding deep down in his mind bubble to shield himself from the real world and it’s harsh consequences.
Luckily the two pilot didn’t die in the fall. They were badly bruised and a bit concussed but thanks to their stone-like bones paired with the parachute who had still considerably slowed down their fall, they were okay. It took their voice to confirm they were okay and back on the ground safely for Vadim to finally open his eyes again. He was still shaken and speechless, just as much as the two who had just had the biggest fall of their lives.
“Not too bad for a first flight!” Isaak joked, his pain clearly audible in every one of his words.
“Could have gone better” replied Artyom.
“How long will it take you to fix it?” the blue haired man asked, taking pretty much everyone by surprise.
“You already wanna fly again?!” Yelled Kennedy, Lionel slouched on him for support.
“I'm sure Lio and I will have enough time to heal while arty works.”
“Well I can’t just repair it. I’d need to redesign it first.” said the artificer “It’s clear the main pole can cause issue during the parachute deployment…”
“Maybe… Maybe you could put the parachute in a box on top of the poll” Suggested Lionel. “And the top could be opened by pull a rope from below where I’d be sitting?”
“Hmmm… Perhaps… But it might mess up with air flow and aerodynamics… Ill look into it.”
Vadim hated Isaak’s determination right now. He didn’t like how he could be so ready to throw himself into danger like this even if it was to save people. Wasn’t Isaak upset when the Maji considered using him as a test subject by throwing into equally dangerous situations?
 Vee hated this, he hated that they were making good progress, that that would continue, that they would probably reach higher and higher next time, that every tries the chance that they could die with increase along the height… That he couldn’t do anything about any of this. He couldn’t help them nor could he stop them. All he could do was watch and hope they’d survive.
This feeling wouldn’t go away for a long time. As month went by, Lionel and Isaak multiplied the flights. No matter how many time they crashed,got bruised or broke a bone, they got back up and flew again. At that point, Vadim wasn’t the only one with negative feelings about the airship project.
The elite Maji already knew about the entire plan since day one thanks to Uriel, but steady progress of the fliers made it clear it was something serious. Not only was Isaak acting in total defiance of the God by trying to destroy the crystal and force the water back down, but he was dragging with him a good part of the population. The crowds were dying, water supplies kept dwindling as other town started giving less and less of their salt waters instead keeping it for their own conversion, there was little to no fauna left to hunt for meat and crops were suffering from the drought just like everything else. To many, Isaak was their last hope. The Highness wasn’t going to let this slide, an intervention was needed.
Right before their latest flight, the group was greeted by Valliard. Valliard was a tall and strong man just like Lionel and Kennedy. Unlike them however, he was well versed with Maji. He was one of the top 5 elites. Isaak had seen him many times in the meeting but had never heard him spoke before.
“The Highness is displeased with your actions Mr.Lockheart.” his deep voice boomed. “Not just you but also the Alexeev twins.”
“Well I'm displeased with The Highness’s lack of actions! We need water!” shouted Isaak “I'm getting it!”
“This is your first warning. You can try one last time but be assured. If you do damage the crystal or continue to try flying both you and Artyom will lose your ranks. You might be exiled even”.
“Fuck you!” barked Isaak. He was having none of it. “I'm doing what’s necessary! Can’t you fucking see it?!”
“You’re not. You’re rebelling against our guardian.”
“Our guardian is letting his people die in mass all across the lands! And for what? Punish us? What have we done to upset him so bad?”
“Maybe You are the problem! You’re just a massive disappointment!” Valliard declared, shooting daggers at Isaak with his eyes. “We all though you’d grow to become a great Maji like your grandfather Ignacio, but we were wrong… You’re no better than the cracked pearl you married.”
Tumblr media
The launcher was prime. Artyom was on post, lever in hand. Isaak jumped in, ready to go. Lionel was still on the ground however, preventing them from taking off.
“Come on, Lio. Let’s show him we’re worth more than his snobby magic tricks” encouraged Isaak.
Lionel couldn’t hide his pain. Yes his pearl was cracked, but he was still a good man, he already showed he was a productive member of society. Many time he was praised for being a great guard in the market place even without using any Lumos to apprehend thieves.
“I can’t do this without you Lio…”
He was right. Isaak couldn’t do it without him. He needed him, the people needed them. The only reason their friend group made it semi-comfortably this far was because Isaak and Artyom’s ranks as Elite Maji and Royal Artificer got them access to a bit more water than the rest that they would share with the friend group.
With their rank on the edge of being striped and they water supplies cut, it might make it harder to rest, heal and fly in the future. He needed to get in there and pilot this ship straight to the top.
“Yeah” he said before taking a deep breath then climbing aboard. “I'm ready”
With everyone at their post, they lifted off. Just like every previous time the initial launch was flawless. Sure they would be shaken a bit or lose their balance but it was nothing they couldn’t easily recover from. This rather short period of time was the easiest and most peaceful.
Isaak looked down bellow as they progressed upward, after so many flights and rough falls he no longer feared heights or experienced vertigo. They could see it all from up there: the empty lake, the streets only populated by corpses people were too tired to move, the palace and tower where the nobles hid and hoarded most of the waters, Artyom’s water-treatment plant that could no longer keep up. It was all sad.
“Reaching the apex in 5!”  stated Lionel
“Alright! Ready to sail!”
By now they were used to the routine. It didn’t matter how much the ship had changed after all the crashes, all the redesigns to make things smoother. On paper it was still the same steps: they launched, they opened the sail once they started losing altitude, they’d power the fan who’d push then higher and then after they got as high as they could -goal reached or not- they open the parachute and make their descent.
“It’s the highest the launcher got us yet!” said Isaak
“Yeah! I think we got almost as high as our first flight after using the fan.”
Now was the hardest part. Isaak needed to keep the boat in line and carefully pilot it upwards while Lionel would have to work his arms off to keep the fan spinning to keep their wind-push steady. Thankfully, Lionel’s task had been made easier. With a few extra gears and loop Lionel’s lever-cracking was made more efficient as it seemed to more or less multiply the amount of spin the fans would do for one of Lio’s input. It was like for one crank the fan would spin like 5 times as opposed to the 1 to 1 they started with.
The two pushed forward. They kept going higher and higher, following a spiral pattern. Ascending like this was a bit slow but so far they hadn't found a better way to do so. It was working so it’s all that mattered for now. Looking up, the water bubble kept getting closer. Give or take 50 minutes they should be able to reach it.
“Do you think You could do both the cranking and steering at once?” Asked Isaak “I might need both my hands to properly aim at the thing once we get close.”
“Yeah don’t worry about that.”
The boat creaked and groaned the further they got up. It sure had been through a lot so far. Most of its plank had been replaced at least once, most of the cracks have been filled with paste or covered with metal plates. For the most part it looked a lot like the initial boat safe from the mast that had been moved a tiny bit further back and the secondary sail on the side of it opposing the main one. By having it on the side of the pole it prevented it from getting tangled up on it once released.
“How close do we need to be for you to shoot? I doubt we were planning on getting anywhere inside the water bubble, were we?”
“I’ll let you know when it’s time.”
They were close indeed, but not close enough, not yet. Isaak’s heart was beating faster than the fan was spinning. Just a few more minute.
“How are we doing regarding height?” He asked “Still going up?”
“Yep! Still going strong” replied Lionel. Gone was the pain he had in his voice when he was still on the ground in front of Valliard. “Seems like we aren't gonna plateau or descend for a good while!”
These minutes felt like slow motion for Isaak. They were so close! How long had they been going up at this point? Almost two hours logically, but it felt like twice that. Couldn’t they make it up already? Finally get this drought over with?!
If he could, Isaak would have been pacing back and forth in a poor attempt to manage his impatience. However he had a sail to operate, he couldn’t slack and risk messing things up when they were about to reach their goal. Despite the frustration and his eagerness to go faster, he remained focused on his task.
Isaak grabbed his staff with his right hand, the left still tight on the sail handle. He pointed it up toward his target, closing his left eye to aim. He didn’t need to close his left eye to focus his sight better since he was already blind from that eye for a few years now, but it was a force of habit.
“Hold on! Let me get the sail.” Lionel said bending forward.
“No need yet. I'm just calculating stuff.”
“Are you sure?”
“Yeah… I give it at least three more loops.”
By that point, the circle they were making to go up were getting tighter and tighter. Tight enough to ascend as fast as possible while not making the turns to hard to maneuver.
Lionel looked at Isaak as he did his calculations. He’d married a smart man, very bright and resourceful. He didn’t agree with the big elite’s words. Isaak wasn’t a disappointment. Sure he might have not been as powerful as the great Igniacio Lockheart  but he was still a great Maji.
He though back to the many things he heard both Isaak and Artyom say, elite Maji were snobs. They didn’t value people for what they were, only for what they could do that would benefit them. Isaak was worthless to them because he didn’t fall inline with their view of what should and shouldn’t be done to please the god. Artyom was below them because he refused to build machines that would complement their magic. Him, well he was pretty much nothing since he couldn’t cast any spells at all.
“Lionel! It’s time!”
Isaak’s command pulled him out of his thoughts. Without hesitating nor wasting time Lionel reached forward, firmly grasping the sail handle.
“I got it! Fire whenever!”
Tumblr media
Isaak aimed straight for it. Lionel did his best to keep the ship steady while his husband charged his bolt. Light beams swirled around them, merging at the tip of Isaak’s staff. Once the ball of light was large enough, he fired.
The lumos bullet whizzed through the air, Isaak getting pushed backward from the recoil. Both men followed the projectile with their eyes. It pierced the water forming an ever growing whirlpool around itself.
The watched on the edge of their seat. The bullet was barely distinguishable at this point. They could see it’s glow but the refraction of the water made it seem like there were many flying in completely different directions.
They felt their ship starting to lose altitude but didn’t move quite yet. They watched a little longer. And a bit more. Now they had completely lost sight of the bullet.
“I missed it.” whispered Isaak
The projectile indeed didn’t connect. Either that or it did without damaging the core. It was better to think it missed because it meant they could try again, shattering it to pieces this time around.
“F-fire again then!”
Isaak aimed his staff up again. Lights swirling around them once more. Then nothing. It just poofed. No bullet, no fanfare, just a whole lot of nothing.
“I can’t! I used all the energy I had! I can’t!” the trans man cried. “I wasted our chance…”
Lionel pulled his husband close to him with his right arm and held him tight to comfort him, pulling the cord of the parachute with his left. They’d try again. At least he hoped they could. With how close they came to success, he worried the elites might take away everything. Right now he had plenty or time to think about what to do next. The descent was going to take a while.
___________
Chapter 5
 It took a full week for Isaak to recover enough energy to make a new attempt. He spent the whole time locked in his house away from the elites and everything else. Lionel filled him in with how the other were holding up everyday, he also took care of him and stayed by his side as much as possible.
From what he had heard, The highness did not officially removed his and Arty’s rank. The ship and launcher hadn’t been confiscated either. There was a rumor that the elites couldn’t enforce their threats because of the masses. The Maji feared a potential uprising and felt like they had no choice but let them fly as to not upset the crowds.
Tumblr media
“How are you feeling today” Asked Lionel, gently caressing Isaak’s cheek. “I think we should go out together today, the fresh air would do you some good.”
“We should fly today. I’ve rested enough.”
“Hmm.. I don’t know if Artyom’s available today… They’ve been overworking him a lot lately. I guess it’s their way of preventing us from progressing…”
“The boat is in working conditions is it not? I'm sure Kennedy or Vadim can take Arty’s place. All he does is pulling a lever.”
“Ah… about Vadim…” Lionel hesitated for a moment. “He... He still hasn’t woken up.”
“Uh?”
“Y-yeah.. It’s been two days… He’s still alive and breathing! He’s just.. Asleep…”
“Do you think a vision is holding him back in somehow?”
“I don’t know.. Maybe? Or maybe he’s forcing himself to remain asleep until he gets one…”
“We need to put an end to this. The drought is messing with everyone and he’s the one who probably have been hit the hardest aside from the ones who already died.”
Lionel nodded. He didn’t like how long this water crisis was lasting either. Each day he spent ‘wasting time’ was torture to him. Last time they almost had it, they just needed one more try and they’d make it, he was sure of it. He though about how hard it must have been for Isaak. Missing his shot must have weight on him, so did having to wait until he had charged back up.
“Before we fly... Can I go check on Vadim in person? I doubt Ill wake him up but.. I feel like talking to him wouldn’t be a terrible idea. It’s been a short while since I’ve seen him, you know? It kinda feel like it’s been an eternity…”
“Of course. I'm sure Andrei will appreciate you visiting his brother.”
“He’s not mad at us is he?”
“No. He’s upset about Vadim’s seemingly endless sleep and Artyom being treated as a work-mule, but he got nothing against us.”
“That’s… That’s good.”
“He’s been helping a lot actually! Since Arty is so busy these day, Andrei’s been the one to keep an eye on our equipment.”
“Maybe he could be the one assisting us at launch then?”
“I’d prefer not to.”
“Why not?” Isaak was a bit confused. Lionel had just said Andrei was willing to help so why the hold up?
“If we do get any negative consequences for this any time soon, I’d rather not involve him. He could have a good life with Michael once everything is back to normal. Keeping an eye on our stuff while Arty is away isn’t putting any attention on him so let’s keep it that way.”
“Fair enough.”
The trans man finally got out of bed and starting dressing up. It made him feel a bit better. After spending an entire week inside almost neglecting himself, it was a nice change to actually make himself presentable.
They walked slowly to the Alexeev house. Even if Isaak had fully recovered his casting energy, he was still quite drained emotionally without even taking into account the thirst and hunger brought down from the drought. At least they had it fairly good, Isaak though. Everyone else had it way worse without their privileges.
After a long walk through the empty streets of their hometown the couple eventually reached their destination. The twins -and their older brother’s- residence. This house had seen quite a lot. Artyom had cracked and blew hole quite a few times in the past with his experimental machines. Lionel knocked on the door. By now it had probably been replaced at least 7 times. He vividly remembered that one time Andrei had to kick down the door in a panic after Arty had set something on fire when they were teens.
“Oh. It’s you.” said the eldest Alexeev who opened the door. “Isaak is here too. Good to see you’re still holding up okay.”
“I wanted to check on Vee before we go fly again today.” weakly stated Isaak.
“I have great hopes that we’re going to make it this time” cheerfully added Lionel.
“I hope you do.” the scar-faced guy motioned them inside. “We all do. Even the elites… They may be mad and truly believe breaking the crystal could piss off whoever created said crystals… but they want the water back just as much as everyone else.”
Tumblr media
“H-hey… I hope you’re doing okay in there…” Talking to an unconscious friend was much more hard on him than he expected. “I'm.. I'm sorry. I'm both sorry because it all suck and I don’t like seeing you like this and I'm also sorry if any of this is my fault… I know I didn’t cause the drought, I didn’t cause those visions or anything.. But I do feel like my plans to recover the water did stress you out. I know you were terrified we might die the first time we launched. Arty told me you desperately wanted to get vision to stop us from flying if you foresaw things to go wrong and I'm deeply sorry about all this. I never wanted you too feel like you needed to push yourself and your ability to assist us… Maybe I should have said something about it sooner… I mean I did, I think? I probably wasn’t clear enough or worded myself properly to sooth you but… I was just... I was focused on making the plan work, you know?” 
The two taller guys watched silently as Isaak spoke softly. Isaak really did focus too much on the airship mission. Not matter how many time the wooden plants splintered and cut him deep, how covered in bruises he got, how many bones he occasionally broke in the falls. He just got back up and tried flying again the next day.
“Let’s go get Kennedy” said Isaak “Let’s get this over with…”
“You’re not taking Artyom with you this time?” asked the eldest. “I'm sure he’d hate to miss a flight, especially the one that succeed…”
“I totally get that but I really don’t want to waste any time. They barely give him any free time these days, do they?”
“Right…”
“I still have my pocket mirror. Ill be sure to call him so he can watch us from wherever they put him.”
“Alright…Fly safely.”
“Eh. A couple bruises never kept us down for long.” Isaak laughed..he hadn’t done that in ages, he felt.
It warned Lionel’s heart to see his husband smile even if it was half faked. Hopefully he’d be able to see him genuinely smile like he used to very soon.
The two made their way out after waving goodbye. They needed to find Kenny but honestly had no clue where he might be. He wasn’t at his and Lionel’s apartment this morning and probably wouldn’t be at the farm considering how bad it had been these days.
“So… Where are we heading, Lio?”
“Well Kenny told me he’s been spending most of his week checking on people around our place, see if they needed help and all that…”
“So?”
“So we’re gonna go back to my street and scream his name until we find him. Unless you got a better idea.”
“I haven’t seen him in a week! How do you want me to know where he is?”
“Then screaming it is!”
“Urh!” Isaak crossed his arms. “Why cant they give everyone pocket mirrors? It would be so much better! We would be able to talk to anyone at any time of the day no matter where they are!”
“Yeah, that would be nice.”
Isaak didn’t really like the idea of yelling to find Kennedy. Their throats were already dry enough from the lack of water, they didn’t need to make it worse. Going door to door would have probably been smarter but it was undeniable that screaming was much faster. It only took them five minutes to get the red head’s attention.
“What is it? Are you guys okay?!” Said Kenny, panicked. It’s like he expected them to be dying or something.
“We need an extra pair of hands to get the boat flying.” said Lionel
“Oh! I take Arty is still under the elite’s tight grip?”
“Yeah pretty much… I’ll still try to call him once we’re on site so he isn’t completely left out.”
“Okay, Alright. Are we doing this right now or..”
“Yeah.”
“We could wait a little if you’re in the middle of helping someone” contradicted Lio. “We don’t want to force you to bail on anyone.”
“Nah, nah! I'm cool doing it now. There’s no issue on that! Lead the way!”
With Kenny now there, the party was now ready to take off.
The walk to the launchpad was much faster than the one they took to the twins house. Not because it was closer but because Isaak was much more in a rush and the emotional drain weighted less on him despite being still there.
When they arrived there they noticed a few people standing around the machinery. At first they were fearful these were elites or people sent by the elites to sabotage them, but on closer inspection and some conversation it was revealed these were supporting townsfolk. 
Andrei did keep an eye on the equipment in the evening and at night, but during the day this group stayed put. They truly had the whole town supporting them in their endeavor. One of them even said he wanted to fly why Isaak was still resting but had no choice but back down when it was brought up to him that a skilled Maji needed to be on board to shoot down the crystal.
Before any flight could take place, loading the launcher was in order. The boat was already on the machine but the elastic cord that made the launch possible wasn’t pulled back yet. Lionel grabbed the wooden wheel-crank on the back side of the machinery. The more he spun it, the tenser the cord got.
“Are we ready to go?” Asked Kennedy from the top of the wooden platform.
“About to be! Ill give it another spin or two for good measure.” replied Lionel
“Is there anything I nee to do beside pulling the lever? Like, I don’t know… shout commands or something?”
“No. Even if you did, we wouldn’t hear you from so far up. After lift off, Lionel and I will pretty much be on our own but there’s nothing to worry about.”
“We’ve perfected our routine at this point.”
“Figures… To be honest I don't even know why I expected to do more. All the other time you guys went up, Arty just stood still just like I did and just watched…”
“Aw c’mon!” Lio patted his roommate on the back. “Your part is still key to the whole thing! We need all three of us to make it work! You launch us, I provide the airflow for the boat to get to the top and Isaak take down the core!”
“Pff! How much do you want to bet once you two get back down with the water, they will only praise you!”
As the trio joked about who would get the most accolades and who deserved them best, they were interrupted by a familiar face approaching them. It was Uriel. He strutted along as if everything was fine and dandy.
“Lionel, Let’s get in and go. Now” Isaak ordered. The mood had shifted.
“I'm not here to stop you, lecture you or in any way bother you.” Said the black man. “I'm here to wish you luck. As much as I disagree with your action, if this get us out of the hell we’re trapped in then so be it. Fly on.”
“Hand us your staff then!” said one of the townsmen who had been protecting the catapult.
“Yeah give it to us until they are back! That way we’re sure you won’t shoot them down with Maji!”
“There will be no need. Ill be taking my leave shortly. I was just passing by to pass the good word, that’s all.”
Isaak had absolutely no care for Uriel and whatever he had to say. While his superior was busy bickering with the townies, the rebellious Maji jumped aboard the ship. His husband followed suit.
“Kenny!” Isaak called, snapping The beefy guy out of his daydreaming. “On deck! Get ready!”
“Oh! Yeah! Sorry, I was uh… Whatever they can take care of the guy anyway!” Kennedy shook his head. “Alright boys hold on tight! One flying boat coming right up!”
Tumblr media
The ascend had nothing new nor exiting to offer him. At this point it was just an unskippable timewaster. He just wanted to be upther, take the darn thing down and save the people.
The fire that burned in him was too strong for him to be antsy or nervous the whole way up. No. He was still as a statue. His hand gripping the sail so firmly his knuckles turned white.  He was gonna shoot it, destroy it. He was gonna blow it to pieces. If he missed one more time, he’d never forgive himself.
Lionel could feel how tense and passionate Isaak was. He didn’t say a word. Not even when they reached the apex, his husband deployed the sail on his own. They both knew to perfection how and when every tasks needed to be perform, no communication needed. Isaak didn’t need to tell Lionel to scoot over and handle both handles either.
He took a deep breath and held his staff against his chest for a brief moment. Aim. Focus. Don’t miss. He raised his golden cane upward, pointing it at the target. Aim. Focus. Don’t miss. He charged his lumos beam, the bullet growing before his eyes. Aim. Focus. Don’t miss. All he needed was to shoot. Don’t Fucking Miss.
As Isaak released his spell, a loud crackle was heard and he was pushed back hard. Lionel momentarily let go of the fan handle to catch him. The were about to descend anyway so cranking it was no longer necessary.
Both of them looked up to see the conclusion to the fruit of their labor and effort. Just like last time they stood speechless as they watch the glowing projectile cut through the water, the ripple and refaction making it look like a multitude of them dispersed through out.
And then. 
BOOM.
The Crystalline core broke into pieces, releasing a shockwave through the air.They had done it. The Crystal was shattered and the water was raining down.
The water was raining down.
Now they just had to parachute back down like they had done many times before. Lionel went and pulled the cord. The cloth unfolded but didn’t deploy properly. The fabric was too soaked and heavy. They were quickly faced by the horror of the situation they were in.
With the torrential rain hammering down on them, the soaked sail was nearly unusable. It wasn’t going to slow their descent nearly enough. 
Unless they did something, they weren’t going to make it.
“I.. Maybe I can cast something!” Isaak said, holding Lionel’s hand tight. “I can try to male a parachute out of Lumos! It won’t be affected by the rain.”
“C-can you? Didn’t you use all of your energy already?”
“Just give me a moment to rest and focus. Trust me... Ill get us out of this!”
The held each others hand and pressed their forehead together, focusing in unisson. The heavy boat fell down much faster than them and since they were no longer holding onto it, they felt it leaving under their feet. Up in the middle of the sky they poured their heart and last bit of energy into this last spell.
Tumblr media
“Let’s hope it works…”
___________
Myth and legends are plenty on Aquafirma. One tell the story of a man who brought back the world’s water out from the clutch of a greedy displeased god.
Everyone know this story is rooted in truths but these days you’d be hard pressed to hear what really unfolded. There are as many versions of it as there are stars in the sky. Some say the man flew on a winged whale, brought the water down using a Lumos nets then came back from the cloud to be crowned king. Other will tell you he built a ladder, fought the Salmalion himself and became a new god. There are also tales saying he used his Maji to launch himself up like a living missile, sacrificing his life to destroy the crystal.
To most, it mattered very little how he got the waters back. The water was here to stay and the land flourished. That was the most important thing of all.
Tumblr media
6 notes · View notes
akystaracer22 · 2 years ago
Text
I have a habit almost nobody practices. It's stupid, completely inconsequential and I've even been bullied for it. But I like it, and it's become such an important part of me that I can't change it if I tried.
It's called Timekeeping.
A thousand milliseconds in a second.
Sixty seconds in a minute.
Sixty minutes in an hour
Twenty-four hours in a day
Seven days in a week.
My habit goes on.
It's always there at the back of my mind, keeping track of that funny little thing called time.
I know it's been exactly Ten years, Four months, Two weeks, One day, Twelve hours, Thirty-seven minutes and Sixteen seconds as of this moment since I have started this habit. It was hard at first, what with the whole concept of time being all but erased from the planet, but the old internet was still reliable for those who used it. The concept of time fascinated me from the moment I first heard of it, and I couldn't help myself, I became possibly the only human alive to keep track of it.
It had its upsides and its downsides however, like all things did. The adults didn't really like it at first, and my peers bullied the fuck out of me for it. But it almost became a challenge for me, how good could I get at "keeping track of time" as I call it.
Turns out pretty good.
Today when I woke up I was able to tell that I'd been asleep for exactly seven hours, three minutes and twenty four seconds, which is supposedly below average from what I read.
Later, when one of my classmates asked how long it would be until first period ended, before anyone could reply with the stupid boring "Soon" or "When the bell ring's" I blurted out "Twelve minutes and Fourty-eight seconds."
Believe it or not but I'm not trying to sound pretentious. When the concept of time becomes applicable my mouth works before my brain does. My class know the basics of my "Timekeeping Condition" as the adults call it. They know the units and how many are in what but... they don't get it get it.
Being able to "tell time" as the old humans put it is just part of who I am now... and it's weird. I know it is. I tried to stop once too but all it took was my friend joking about how he'd been alive forever and the words "Fifteen years, Eight months, One Week, Six Days, Thirty-two minutes, and Fourty-nine seconds," slipped out before I even had time to process I said them. That was One year, Eleven months, Three weeks, Two days, and exactly One hour ago.
Two day's, Eight hours, Fourty mintues and Two seconds later found me in the office of my local GP, but that moment with my friend was when I realised that it was going too far.
I'd only seen my friends birth certificate once, his family was super traditional and it was the only thing with a time in the house.
It was the first time I was ever scared of my ability to keep track of time.
It was like I'd been cursed with some sort of time related affliction, maybe it was the gods way of punishing the people of earth for forgetting that once so important measurement. That pillar of society that has been forgotten in the changing tides of history.
My parents certainly thought so, yelling at the doctor and Seven Hours, Thirteen minutes and Seven seconds later the Psychiatrist that the doctor referred me to. Pleading to find something to fix me, to save me from myself.
I felt like a madman that day.
I still have to have tests taken, scientists just love to try and figure out just how my brain got so damn good at this. How it's able to latch onto those specific numbers associated with time - my Math grades demonstrated it was just time - and keep track so perfectly that even years later I can tell people with complete accuracy the exact time and date they requested.
"When did the session start."
Fifteen minutes, Thirty seconds, and One Hundred and Eighty-Six milliseconds from now.
"How long has it been since you have last eaten."
Three hours, Twelve minutes, Seven seconds, Eight Hundred and Two milliseconds ago.
"What will the date be in 103... day's? is that the term you use for it?"
April the Third Thirty Twenty-one.
Every Two Weeks, since that fateful day they learned my little habit had taken over too much of me.
I felt like a lab rat... I was one.
I don't know what will happen to me come the inevitable summer holiday's. I'm seventeen now I know what will happen.
My parents never said a word about employment or further education. They talked about moving, about this nice little place I'd feel at home. They talked about a cage.
I have to go to school each day knowing I'm ticking closer to my last day free. I think my friend knows it too, he stopped asking me to play time keeper for me. He started asking me more questions of how it worked. He asked me to teach him how to tell time like I can.
I hate how much it means to me to actually have someone sitting with me every day whenever possible, listening intently as I'm able to explain in depth with an actual person, a friend, how I tell time.
Just Yesterday he was able to announce how much longer until the bell rang to signal the end of lunch. I hugged him for the rest of that time because it just felt so good to have someone else keep track of the time for a second I almost felt human. What my friend did was more than any of the whackjobs "monitoring" me ever thought to do.
He also came over to my house and discussed way's he could potentially become a full on Psychiatrist in the future, he had a whole path mapped out and everything. He definitely has the grades to do it.
He shouldn't be doing all this for me, I'm just too desperate to say no.
When in doubt, just keep the internal clock ticking Horace.
Just keep it ticking.
It’s the year 3020, and humans have achieved immortality through advanced technology. However, with the option of living forever, the concept of time has lost all meaning. Write a story about an average day in this new reality.
4K notes · View notes
storiesofsvu · 2 years ago
Text
Opposing Counsel Ch 2
Tumblr media
Warnings: language, talk of sex, some chaos, brief talk of case work.
“Hey! You busy?” You popped your head into Rita Calhoun’s office, she smiled at you from the desk, you’d been friends from the second you started at her firm 6 years ago. In the years since you’d become closer than any of the other lawyers, often sharing meals, post work drinks, or coming to each other for suggestions on cases, not to mention you were two of the best defence attorney’s in New York. You had a very open and playful relationship, when you weren’t busy tearing apart cases you gave off a relaxing, playful vibe, Rita found herself able to actually open up a bit more around you. Most of your other coworkers simply didn’t get the goofiness you managed to coerce out of each other, but it worked.
“Not really.” She replied, 
“Perfect!” You moved into the office, “I’ve got lunch!” Rita was quick to move the paperwork off her desk, clearing an empty spot for you to plop the bag down onto. She expected you to start pulling containers out, slightly surprised when you moved around her desk,
“What’re you..?”
“Oh just hold on, I need to show you something.” You pulled her keyboard toward you, “Close your eyes.”
“Oh God VanRiel, what now?” You laughed at that, you’d been putting up with each other’s shit for too many years now, she knew something was coming.
You clicked through a couple of screens on Youtube until you found what you wanted, giggling to yourself as you hit play ‘Sometimes, somethin’ beautiful happens in this world, you don’t know how to express yourself, so, you just gotta sing….’ Rita practically howled as The Lonely Island’s ‘I Just Had Sex’ blared through her office.
“Oh My GOD Y/N!” She rushed to turn the volume down, the door was open after all. “I take it the date went well then?”
“No.” You dropped down into a chair, pulling some lemon chicken towards you, “He was a total dick but I ditched him and ended up meeting someone at Spring Lounge.” You took a bite of food, “There’s ginger beef in there for you…” The switch back to completely casual was completely smooth.
“And?” She quirked a brow at you, pulling the food and a pair of chopsticks out.
“The song didn’t explain it well enough? Or did you want specific details?” Rita laughed into her lunch, shaking her head,
“Whether I ask for them or not you’ll tell me.”
“You’re not wrong.” You smirked,
“And…” She repeated,
“Holy fuck. Like, this guy, easily top 3. Not joking, I mean, we got along super well, there was none of that awkwardness, we just…worked. I mean, find a guy who’ll take care of your tab when you weren’t on an actual date? Never happens in this goddamn city.” You rolled your eyes.
“Top 3 hey?” She joked, 
“Rita.” You stopped your eating, “Please…this guy…holy fuck…incredible kisser, his hands, wow, I mean like, wow. And his—“ It was there she finally cut you off.
“Y/N, come on! We’re eating.”
“Sorry!” You both laughed, you’d kept Rita pretty in the loop of your dating life after one of your HORRIBLE first dates ended up on the wrong side of an assault charge a few weeks later. She mainly wanted to make sure you were safe, but was definitely living vicariously through you.
“Did you exchange numbers?” You shrugged, 
“I left him with mine, we’ll see what happens….” 
The conversation moved slowly away from your escapades, asking about Rita’s week, how her current case was going, the sentencing the judge came back with on your last case. An hour easily passed, conversation flowing with ease between two friends, the take out containers empty by the time your phone went off, digging it out of your pocket you answered.
“VanRiel.” A elongated pause, Rita watched as your brows furrowed, taking in the information being conveyed to you, “K, I’ll be there in 10.” You hung up the phone, an exasperated sigh leaving your lips as you looked across at Rita, “You know anything about SVU?” Most of the clients you had were business men, the work you did was mainly white collar crimes, money laundering, nothing violent, you’d never been called to sex crimes or homicide. Rita let out a huff of a laugh, 
“Good luck…”
“Detectives or their A.D.A?” You questioned while gathering your things.
“Both!” Rita replied, “I swear, somedays they have their shit together, other days….it’s a complete disaster…”
“Great…” You rolled your eyes, “We’re still on for drinks tonight?”
“Sweetheart you’re gonna need them after this.”
“Uggghhhhhh.” You promptly left her office, gearing back up into lawyer mode. You may have a playful and fun relationship with your friends, but there was absolutely no doubt you were a complete shark when it came to your job. You knew exactly how to play into the jury’s hands, how to manipulate them into believing whatever it was you needed to. There was a tingle in your chest knowing that this would be different, you’d never dealt with something Special Victims was called in for, but you knew Jonathon Perman, and you already had a feeling it would be an easy win for you.
***
Arriving at SVU, Captain Olivia Benson was quick to greet you, asking if she could help you, you were quick to respond that you were  there looking for your client.
“Perman?” She questioned, you nodded, “He’s with our A.D.A. right now.” You practically scoffed, 
“He lawyered up 15 minutes ago…you better not be questioning him any further.” 
Benson threw you a glare at that (that…you were used to, it came with the business, cops never really liked you and honestly, you couldn’t give a fuck). She led you to an interrogation room, through the window you saw who you presumed was a cop (Rollins) leant up against the wall, and none other than fucking Rafael sitting at the table across from your client. The world had to be playing some kind of cruel joke against you, right? You didn’t spare Benson another moment as you opened the door, 
“I’d like a moment with my client please.” Your voice was hard, cold, lawyer mode activated. Rafael looked over his shoulder at you, the smug grin on his face fading as he realized just who he was looking at. His thought process went from, ‘a new lawyer, perfect,’ to ‘wait…’ to ‘oh fuck…’ to ‘wait…this girl’s a little sub, there’s no way she can win this’. He drank in your appearance, the casualness of your clothes completely changed. Your hair was pinned back in a low bun, a loose piece curled by your ear, your hips tight in a pencil skirt, a red dress shirt, two buttons undone, that matched the pair of red heels completely. You may have been dressed for work but to him, you were dressed like absolute sex. He felt his cock twitch in response to your appearance, you may have been there to work against him but there was something so undeniably sexy about that he couldn’t hold back. Not to mention the image of you shaking beneath him was burned into his eyes for eternity.
“Counsellor…”He managed to stumble out, you moved into the room, extending a hand to him,
“Y/N VanRiel.” His hand encased yours, accepting the greeting despite your previous…encounter… “And I’ll have that moment with my client now.”
You briefly had a moment with Jonathon, telling him not to say anything, you knew they were all still listening through the glass. He’d been accused of raping a bartender at a work function, but vehemently denied it, even after she’d picked him out of a lineup. You…you honestly believed him, there was something off about the entire situation, you said you’d do your best to get him bail, but he’d have to spend the night in Rikers before arraignment. You reassured him that you were the best at what you did, and you weren’t about to let him get put away for something he didn’t do. On your exit from interrogation you found Barba waiting for you, you cocked a brow.
“Can I help you?”
“You know he did it, right? Or are you just used to defending perverts.” You barked out a laugh at that, 
“Counsellor, I’m used to defending people who don’t deserve to go to jail, and Perman here, is on that list.” You heels brought you right up to Rafael’s eye line, and you weren’t about to back down to his crappy intimidation. He scoffed at your reply, 
“Oh please VanRiel, he raped that girl and we all know it, and I’m going to prove it. We both know you’re willing to submit to that, right?” You rolled your eyes at his mention of your sexual submission.
“You can do your best to prove it Barba but you’re wrong. And if you think I’m going to back off that easily, you have no idea how I am in the courtroom.”  You gave him a once over before leaving the bull pen, full of sass and confidence, he couldn’t help but watch the way your hips swayed in the tight skirt, the red heels embedded into his brain, despite the situation he found himself imagining fucking you while you wore only those shoes. 
****
Hours later, after pouring over the weakness of what SVU called a case and talking to a few of Perman’s coworkers, you dropped yourself into a booth across from Rita, groaning heavily.
“That bad?” She questioned, pushing the extra glass of scotch towards you. You rolled your eyes, taking a thankful swig of the amber liquid, “Detectives or the A.D.A.?”
“Honestly you’re not even going to believe me when I tell you…” You needed another couple of gulps of scotch before you could even think of telling her.
“What? That squad does so much shit to get cases thrown out all the time.” Your glass hit the table a little harder than you meant it to, 
“It wasn’t the squad…” You let out a groan, “Mr Mystery from last night…none other than A.D.A. Rafael fucking Barba…” You finished off the scotch as that as Rita practically hollered, collapsing into a fit of laughter at your misfortune, when she’d regained herself (and you ordered another drink) wiping tears from her eyes she looked over at you.
“You can’t be serious…”
“Would I LIE to you about this shit Rita?!” You laughed at yourself, “Fuck! Like…how in the hell does that happen?! He was in jeans, he didn’t come across as a lawyer at all! I never would have thought he was even close to working in law, what the fuck!?” You’d been processing the information in the back of your mind all day, it was amazing that he could come off so differently at work, but there was no way you were about to lose this case.  
“Oh and you’re telling me you were in business wear writing on a legal pad when he showed up?” Rita questioned, causing you to roll your eyes at her, 
“Okay, fine, neither of us mentioned work, we didn’t talk about it…but now I need to walk into the courtroom and win that case like he wasn’t moaning when his dick was in my mouth.” She barked out a laugh at that, 
“Jesus Y/N….” You took a second to thank the waitress for your round of drinks, sipping back the scotch, surprised when she spoke again, “…Top 3…really?” You shot her a death glare, 
“Don’t even start Calhoun.”
“Uhm, if I remember correctly you were the one who came into my office blasting the song about having sex earlier today.” The smirk on her face apparent as you laughed against your drink.
“Fine! Yes….that fucking A.D.A. is in my top 3….fuck me…” You muttered into your drink, Rita laughing across at you. You’d certainly never expected to be in this situation, you did your best to keep your personal and work life separate, but this…this was a whole new level of craziness, at least you knew you had the case in the bag. 
105 notes · View notes
skinnyducky · 3 years ago
Text
made for you // v.h.
hello.. im sorry i havent been posting. school has been keeping me busy but i wanted to post this. this idea comes from @yelenasdarling so thank you ! i recommend listening to halley’s comet by billie eilish (as well as the whole album) bc that’s the song that is being discussed in this (as well as many others), so yuh. enjoy ! and i promise i haven’t forgotten about party @ y/ns !
vinnie hacker x singer!fem!reader
Word Count: 1408, edited
WARNING: MAJOR FLUFF LUV
---------
As the year was coming to an end, so was your debut album. For months, you’d been working with the best producers, musicians, and doing endless promo for this album and within a few days, you’d be playing it for the label. Obviously because it is your first record, you’re protective over it. No one had heard it besides the people working on it. So, you were a bit nervous to let your pleading boyfriend, Vinnie, tag along to the studio with you.
It was Friday, and you two had been chilling in his room when your producer, Sarah, said she needed you to go over it before the label meeting. As you bid your goodbyes to Vinnie, informing him of the reason for your departure, he pouted. “Why can’t I come?” he nearly cried, giving you his puppy dog eyes. Because you couldn’t resist them—and you just can’t say “no” to him—you allowed him to come.
Now here the two of you were, in the studio and listening to Sarah go on and on about how long it took for her to finish mastering it. Your manager, Jen, had came too. She had to hear the album for herself also. She couldn’t have her client looking a mess in front of her bosses. Bad for business and her reputation.
“…and after an hour or two of making sure your vocals were clear, I finally finish the album.” Sarah explained. “Honestly, this is probably the best album I’ve produced in a minute, and I worked on SZA’s album.”
“That good?” Vinnie asked with a smirk, leaning against the studio door. “That’s sick. I’m ready to listen to it.”
As that sentence left Vinnie’s mouth, you felt your anxiety overcome you. “Are you sure, Sarah? There has to be some sort of adlib I need to rework or something. Can’t be ready so soon.”
“Y/n, it can’t get any better than this. This is a solid project. I should know, I spent days listening to it over and over again. Trust me, it’s ready.”
“Besides, it’s too late to rerecord now.” Jen added. “The label meeting is next Thursday, and we don’t have a week for Sarah to mix and master all over again. Once the label gives us the greenlight, if there’s anything to tweak, you can do it before you have to submit the final project. But until then, no changes and no additions.”
You sighed, nodded your head. It’s not that you were afraid of it not being perfect. You were more scared of what Vinnie would think. I mean, he’s the one who inspired the album; more than half of the songs are about him. His opinion meant everything to you, and if he didn’t like an inch of it…that would destroy you.
As you were sulking and picking at your chipped nail polish, Vinnie wandered over to you where you sat at the soundboard with Sarah. He leaned against it and smiled down at you. “What’s the matter, baby?”
“Nothing.” You sighed, keeping your head down. He scoffed and chuckled. “Y/n, you’re playing with your nail polish. You always do that when you’re upset.”
He pulled you up and took you out of your seat before sitting down himself and placing you on his lap. “Tell Santa what’s up.” He joked, wrapping his arms around your waist.
“I’m just nervous. This album means so much to me.”
“Completely understandable. It’s your first one, it should mean a lot to you.”
You shook your head. “It’s not just because of that. It’s also because it’s about you. The only reason you haven’t came with me to the studio until now is because I didn’t want you to hate anything on this, and it would kill me if you did.”
“Y/n, look at me”—you finally met his eyes for the first time—“I could never not like anything you do. Especially if it’s dedicated to me. That’s like throwing away a gift you gave me. I wouldn’t ever do that. So don’t think for a minute that I’d hate this. That’s literally impossible.”
You smiled, planting a kiss on his forehead. “You’re too good for me.”
“I know.” He laughed and turned to Sarah. “Play us the album!” He said dramatically, sending the producer into a fit of giggles.
She followed his orders and with a few clicks and the press of a button, the first song from your album rang out from the studio speakers. You watched timidly as Vinnie bobbed his head up and down as it went from track to track.
“This shit slaps!” He exclaimed as “Y/n Bossa Nova” played. He nearly about died during “Oxytocin”, claiming it to be god tier. Minutes went by until you got to the final track “Halley’s Comet”, and you were scared to play him this song.
While the other tracks were quite playful in nature, this one was different. The song was a bit cynical, but it was also like a love letter to Vinnie. Never before have you ever felt what you had with him. And at first that made you scared. But as the months went by and your relationship started to blossom, you realized he was the one for you. This was just your way of telling him that.
When it started, you looked everywhere but at Vinnie. It wasn’t just because you couldn’t bear to see the expression on his face, but also because this song was quite emotional. You didn’t want him to see you “being a little bitch” as you put it.
The sound of your soft vocals bounced off the walls and you felt Vinnie place his chin on your shoulder. His hold on you grew tighter as he swayed you two back forth. A small smile crept it’s way onto your face as you tried your best to stray away from crying.
“I’ve been loved before, but right now in this moment,” you sung, “I feel more and more like I was made for you…”
When those lyrics hit, you felt Vinnie stop swaying. Hell, you were pretty sure he had stopped breathing too. You didn’t know what to think about that; did he not like the song, is he shocked? What was he thinking and feeling? Shortly after, the song came to an end with you singing, “I think I might have fallen in love…what am I to do?”
And with that, the album finished. The room was silent, the only sound being your sniffles. Although that was broken when Sarah screamed. “Wasn’t that amazing!? Ugh, my power…I really outdid myself on this one.”
Thankfully, Jen understood the impact of that last song. “Sarah, why don’t we go get a Snickers or something from the vending machine?”
“I can’t eat anything fatty, Jen. You know this.”
Jen mouthed some profanities and threats at the woman causing her to shoot up from her chair and run out into the hallway. “We’ll leave you two alone for a minute.” Jen smiled, leaving the room and shutting the door behind her.
Neither of you or Vinnie spoke and that somewhat was comforting. However, part of it made you feel insecure about the album, “Halley’s Comet” in specific. Out of all the songs, that’s the one you wanted him to like the most.
The silence soon grew uncomfortable, so you decided to be the first to speak. “Well, that was the album. What’d you think?”
He opened his mouth, but it was obviously he couldn’t find the right words to say. “I-I don’t know how to even put it in words.”
“That bad?” You sighed.
“No, never.” He laughed. “It was beautiful, all of it really. And that last song, that was amazing.”
You pursed your lips, hiding the grin wanting to break free. “You think so?”
“Yeah, it was definitely one of my favorites. To know I had that much of an impact on you, it’s really sweet. I didn’t think I could simp for you any harder than I do now.”
“Shut up!” you laughed, slapping his shoulder.
“It’s the truth!” he said, throwing his hands up in defense. “I love you, Y/n. I really do.”
“I love you too.” And with that, he laid a sweet and gentle kiss on your lips.
Pulling back, he said, “Oh and just so you know, I agree with you.”
“On what?”
“You were definitely made for me.”
320 notes · View notes
helliontherapscallion · 4 years ago
Note
I'm sorry for adding on to your pile of requests but I just wanted some family fluff with sbi where all of the siblings are having fun on a road trip or vacation
I don't know if that's specific enough for you if you want a little more detail maybe they're just being really dumb and making stupid videos with each other because that's something my sister and I do a lot
(A/N): I hope you don’t mind that I added Kristin and Tubbo (BASED ON THE CHARACTERS, NOT ACTUAL PEOPLE). Real life AU btw (no covid tho)
Okokok so this is deadass something Philza and Kristin is both dreading and looking forward to
1. They love spending time with their family especially now since yall are getting older and don’t spend as much time together anymore/getting ready to fly the coop
2. Have you met the SBI fam? Chaos incarnated.
After packing, yall set out on your trip to the hotel yall rented for a week or so (about an eight hour drive away from the house)
You and your twin Tommy 100% smuggle Tubbo underneath all of the luggage and a blanket
You’ll just ask them for forgiveness when you’re about halfway through
It’s easier to ask for forgiveness than permission 
Wilbur and Technoblade catching you hiding the stowaway and blackmailing you both into doing their chores for a few week 
Seating: Phil and Kristin in the front, Tech and Wil in the middle, You and Tommy in the back, and Tubbo in the trunk (it’s a mom van)
Before getting too far into the trip, a gas station is raided for snacks and drinks
Philza raising a brow at the amount of food you and Tommy get 
Philza’s eyes were torn off from the refrigerator in front of him by his wife lightly nudging him. Looking at her in question, she raised her eyebrows and pointed at their youngest kids. It looked like they were just looking at the Monster drinks, so why- oh god the last thing he needed was two already hyper teenagers hopped up on Monster trapped in a car for eight hours. Before he could go over there to stop them, Kristin grabbed his arm. 
“They’re up to something. Listen to what they’re saying.”
He strained his ears to hear what you both are whispering to each other. “...e like this flavor?”
Tommy shrugged, “I dunno. I’ll text him.”
As Tommy texted someone, Phil looked back at his wife. She wore a similar wary expression as they both stared at each other. He nodded in confirmation, “definitely. How do you reckon we confront them?”
He watched as his wife thought for a moment before she sighed and looked at him with a hint of excitement in her eyes, “let’s wait to see. It might be a pleasant surprise.” 
“What? Are you mad?” He eyed his youngest gremlins once more. It seemed that they finally decided on a flavor and are now moving on to the snack portion. He looked back at his wife and felt his heart skip a beat at the small grin on her face. “...fine. Let’s just see what they’re doing after they do it.” Oh, the things he does for love.
He kept a very close eye on you two after that 
You both are on your phones for longer than usual
Texting Tubbo so that he wasn’t lonely 
Tubbo has fun with hiding too, never being bored at all
The only thing that he (and you and Tommy) struggled with was holding in his laughter
You jumped as you felt someone gently slap your shoulder. Turning around, you saw Tubbo’s hand peeking over the backs of the seats. You glanced at your parents in the front seats, they were deep in conversation. Good. You saw Tommy stifle a laugh and pull out his phone to record. 
Tubbo made grabby hands at something but you didn’t know what he wanted, so you decided to mess with him a bit. Smirking, you put your earbuds in his hand. It snaked back underneath the blanket before he threw it back at you and did more intense grabby hands. You put your metal water bottle in his hand. He did the same thing before he threw it back at you. It collided with your forehead with a loud bong sounding throughout the car. Tommy started to laugh loudly and ended the video. You followed suit in the laughter as Tubbo’s hand froze midair and quickly slinked back into his lair.
All noise in the car came to a halt as they all looked behind them (well, Phil glanced through the rearview mirror suspiciously) to see you and Tommy laughing your asses off with you holding your forehead. Through blurred vision, you could see Kristin looking at you with worry and Techno and Wilbur looking confused and mildly annoyed.
“(Y/n) honey are you alright? What happened?” You opened your mouth to respond, but only wheezes came out making you laugh harder. You could hear Tubbo silently cackling to himself in the back, the blanket shaking slightly. Without being able to speak, you only nodded your head and gave her a thumbs up. 
Tommy sent the video into the siblings' group chat and you could see over Wilbur’s shoulder as he watched it before starting to cackle and save the video to his phone. Even Techno got a good chuckle out and saved it to his phone making Phil and Kristin even more suspicious. Well, Kristin was just excited for what you two (four? Was Techno and Wilbur in on it as well?) had planned. Phil could just imagine the chaotic things you had planned. And he did not like what came to his mind.
When the rest stop came eventually (about three hours into the trip), you all left the car to stretch your legs and take care of business
Taking separate ways to walk in pairs (same person they sat next to in the car)
You and Tommy wait until Phil and Kristin leave before getting Tubbo out of the trunk
You three vibe walking along the winding sidewalks for a bit before you come back to the car and get Tubbo back into the trunk
You, however, forgot to use the bathroom so you leave Tommy and Tubbo in the car 
“Fuck, I forgot to use the bathroom. I’ll be right back.”
“Be quick, I’m not fuckin telling em if we forget you.”
“Pfft, they won’t forget me. Stop joking around.”
With that, you left the car and made a beeline to the bathroom. After that, you went back to the car. Well, where the car was supposed to be. There was no sight of a van anywhere in the parking lot. That asshole, he just let them drive off? He and Tubbo’s probably giggling to themselves in the backseat like school girls. You were only gone for like eight minutes. 
Sighing, you walked over to a nearby bench and sat down, pulling up Techno’s contact and calling him. 
He picked up after a few rings. The second you heard the dial tone stop, you spoke to him, “check the backseat.”
“What? You’re taking a nap, why’re you calling me I’m literally right in front of you.”
“Just fuckin check, Tech.”
In the background, you could hear Tommy snickering to himself. You heard some rustling before Techno started laughing, “Dad, we left (y/n) at the rest stop.”
“YEAH YA FUCKIN DID!” 
You could hear loud laughter from your brothers and muffled cursing from Phil. You heard Kristin tell Techno to hand her the phone. 
“We’re so sorry, we’re turning around right now. We’ll be there in about five minutes. Stay in one place and don’t talk to strangers.”
“I dunno Mom, that trucker looks really friendly. Might do some hitch hiking with him.”
You ended up befriending an old lady when she sat next to you on the bench with her husband. She even gave you some butterscotch and those strawberry hard candies that all older people somehow have but you can never find in stores. Her husband was telling you stories about his younger days when you saw the familiar van pull into the parking lot. Waving goodbye, you thanked them and hopped back into the car. 
After profuse apologizing from your family and scolding Tommy for tricking them, you were on the road again. You glared at Tommy with a small smile on your face, “you fuckin prick. Did you seriously make it look like I was sleeping under a blanket?”
“Yeah, I told you that I wouldn’t tell them if we forgot you.”
“You fuckin dick,” you grabbed a few butterscotches and strawberry candies and handed some to Tubbo after ensuring your parents weren’t looking. He took them gratefully and quickly. You heard him whisper a ‘thank you’ and opened them with plastic crinkling. 
“Wha- are those butterscotches? Gimme some.” He was about to snatch them out of your hands before you moved away from him. “No, you left me at the rest stop. You don’t get any. Do you guys want some? I’ve got butterscotches and strawberry candies.”
After you handed them out to your family, Phil looked at you confused in the rearview mirror, “(y/n), where’d you get these?”
“Oh, I just made some friends with an old couple while I was waiting.”
“You what? What if they kidnapped you?”
“Naw they couldn’t’ve. Ethel has hip problems and Charles was in a wheelchair. They were chill anyway.”
“...Just- just don’t do that again.” “Well don’t forget me again at a rest stop three hours away from home and you got yourself a deal.” 
After a while the family was chill again and everything was back to normal
It was getting closer and closer to when Tubbo would make his reveal
You three agreed that Tubbo would just wait for the perfect time 
That time came about three hours later when Phil and Kristin was asking everybody where they should stop for food
“So kids, we have three options: McDonalds, Wendy’s, and Arby’s. What do you want?”
“Wendy’s is obviously the superior choice.” Tommy proclaimed and you nodded in agreement. You leaned back and whispered to Tubbo, “now would be a great time.” You pulled out your phone to discreetly record the front seat. 
“No it isn’t. Arby’s is you heathens.” Wilbur chimed in, glancing at his twin for back up. Techno shrugged, “I’m fine with anything as long as it’s edible.”
“I’m more of a fan of Wendy’s myself!” Tubbo’s muffled voice chimed in from his makeshift hut in the trunk. You snickered as Kristin whipped her head around to look at the back seat and Phil’s eyes snapping up to look at you through the rearview mirror. 
“...Tubbo?”
“Hi Mrs. Tommy and (y/n)’s mum!” You flipped the camera around just in time to catch Tubbo poking his head out of the blanket and grin sheepishly at them. You panned over to Tommy’s ruby red face as he was holding in his laughter before flipping it back to the front. 
“You absolute gremlins, this is what you’ve been hiding?” Phil scolded you and Tommy, his knuckles whitening from gripping the steering wheel. You could see his shoulders bouncing slightly with a slight strain in his voice from holding in chuckles. 
“Honey, have you been in the trunk this entire time?” 
“Yeah, but it’s quite comfy back here! Tommy and (y/n) gave me pillows and some snacks. Got some stretching done at the rest stop.”
“You’ve been back there for six hours?” Phil’s incredulous voice asked. 
“Yep! Don’t worry, I had a lot of room. Anyways, my vote goes to Wendy’s.”
The car was quiet before Kristin started to laugh, “Wendy’s it is. See Phil, I told you it was gonna be a pleasant surprise!”
Tubbo sat between you and Tommy in the backseat for the rest of the trip 
Techno and Wilbur saying that they knew Tubbo was back there but left out the blackmail part
There was no way they’d risk losing their little siblings doing their chores for them for a few weeks
At the hotel, the rooming was the same as the seating in the car
You, Tommy, and Tubbo having the time of your lives alone in your hotel room
Jumping on the beds, checking for hidden cameras and double sided mirrors (well, that doesn’t sound fun, but you had fun doing it), truth or dare, racing each other down the halls at night time, the works
B L A N K E T  F O R T S (but always cleaning up the hotel room in the mornings bc yall are respectful to the staff)
Getting plenty of videos of you guys ding dong ditching Techno and Wilbur’s room
Them getting tired of it so they tell Dadza and Momza and they tell you to stop : (
Walking around aimlessly around the hotel hallways with Wilbur and Techno
Going up and down elevators aimlessly 
Pulling an all nighter with Tommy and Tubbo on the last day
Philosophical late night talks when yall hardly know what you’re saying anymore (and becoming closer than ever before)
“Tommy, Tubbo?” You three were currently sitting on the balcony chairs looking out at the empty parking lot and the occasional cars driving by. It was about three in the morning and you guys were determined to stay up all night. “If you think about it, a hotdog is puréed meat in an intestine casing. When we eat the hotdogs, we turn it back into puréed meat. It eventually goes through your intestines which makes you the hotdog for a solid couple of hours.”
“...What the fuck, (y/n).”
“No no, they’ve got a point. Don’t you understand, Tommy? We are hotdogs.”
“...I’m starting to think you guys need sleep. Speakin nonsense.”
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
“Do you two reckon we’re alone in the universe?”
“What do you mean, Tubbo?” You glanced at the male next to you and raised an eyebrow. He was looking up at the stars with furrowed brows. 
“Like, do you guys think there’s life out there. Looking down at us right now wondering the same thing.” 
You hummed and looked up at the stars. They were twinkling down at you with the occasional shooting star blazing by. Red lights from far off satellites being the only visible sign of humans in the dark expanse of space. “I think so. I mean, nobody knows how big the universe is. You never really know.”
“Honestly I don’t know what’s scarier, being the only lifeforms and being completely alone or having things out there that we don’t know about.” 
You sling an arm over your twin’s shoulders, “that doesn’t matter. As long as we have each other, we’ll never be alone. We’ll face whatever the universe has in store for us together.”
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
“I don’t know, I just hate it when people only see me as the loud annoying one. It really gets to me sometimes and I don’t know what I should do about it. Fuck, even Wil and Tech see me like that.”
“Toms, fuck them. They don’t know you like we do. You’re caring, ambitious, and brave.” 
“Yeah, don’t listen to what they say. We’ll prove them wrong when we form our own nation one day.”
Tommy’s sullen expression slowly melted into a smile, “yeah, I’d like that. You’d be the president.”
Tubbo grinned back at Tommy, “and you’ll be my trusty vice president and (y/n)’ll be our Secretary of State. We’ll rule together.”
“Our nation would be a place for people to escape tyranny and injustice. Somewhere where men could live free, you two would be amazing leaders.”
“What do we call it though is the question,” Tubbo hummed in thought.
“How about ‘Manberg’?”
You looked at your twin with half lidded, exhausted eyes, “I like it, but it needs more… pizazz. How about L’manberg?”
You watched as he smiled widely at the stars, “it’s perfect.”
Watching the sunrise together on the balcony wrapped in blankets
Sleeping on the rest of the way back home
Best sleep of your life
When you wake up (about an hour or so away from home), you see that there’s blankets over you three and you had your head on Tubbo’s shoulder, Tubbo had his leaned up against the seat behind him, and Tommy’s cheek was squished against the window
You stretch out your limbs a bit trying not to disturb the two beside you
Checking your phone to see pictures of you three sleeping sent into the family group chat with Kristin replying with a bunch of heart emojis
You send the videos and pictures you took along the way of you, Tommy, and Tubbo doing stupid things in the hotel room and in the car
If you looked in the middle row, you could see Wilbur watching the scenery pass by out the window with his earbuds in
Techno is reading one of his books (you have no idea how he doesn’t get car sick)
Phil and Kristin are talking lowly to each other holding hands on the center counsel 
Soft radio music is playing in the background
Life is good
General taglist (comment if you want to be added):
@crybabyjabby  @izzybobizzy13  @goldenstarofthunderclan  @bunnyz-pxstel  @averytiredfanfictionwriter  @dcml04  @sparkling-gayyyy  @bbigbbrainn  @thaticecreambish  @kiinokochii  @satansphatass  @bxkubitch  @bxmentchildxx  @roxy3457  @montygator17  @feverish-dove  @the-fictionwriters-hairdo  @jichuuchaeng  @404rynnotfound  @luluwinchester  @laura--444  @the-cult-classic-bitch  @youngstarfishdinosaur  @nottheotheruser
1K notes · View notes
izzysarchivedblogs · 1 year ago
Text
Tumblr media
KNOWING THAT HE WAS GOING TO GET THE OPPORTUNITY TO CALL HAD CONTRIBUTED IT TO BEING A BETTER DAY.
Overall, what he was experiencing was raw, difficult, and goddamn, he had cravings, but he was feeling. Clint was being taught how to process things, he was being taught how to cope with things better. OR START LOOKING FOR BETTER WAY.
Today was the first day where things had felt a little graspable, and his therapist agreed that if he felt certain of it; he could make this call. SPEAKING OF WHICH, IT'S GOING WELL.
He huffs into the receiver as Tony tells him to keep telling himself that mediation was good for him. THAT HE'D LIKE IT. There was something to say if he could be doing archery right now, he would achieve a sort of zen. GIVE IT TIME. He was trying to do that.
❝ Hey, my therapist says I got that too! The A-D-H-D thing, but I told her that bullshits for the birds; granted I also say that about therapy and group. ❞ HE STILL THINKS THAT. Clint's got a lot to be working on, recognizing his mental health was a thing to be taken seriously was one such thing. ❝ Three hours of mediation. Everyone has one hour and then two hours of workout time. I get three cause cast and brace. IT'S TORTURE. So boring. ❞
He may have gotten in very minor trouble for making up target practice games to supplement the additional two hours of mediation when he absolutely could NOT stand his own thoughts anymore. Clint's zen came from having a singular target. Mediation made the target himself which was a terrible idea. ❝ Hey don't you hear the jokes around the superheroics cooler, I got an empty head anyways. ❞
It does not SURPRISE him that Bucky does mediation. One of the unfortunate side effects of un-numbing himself was that his inferiority problems were coming up. AND BUCKY BARNES KIND OF RUBBED ON ALL OF THOSE. ❝ Futzing Bucky. ❞ He mostly keeps his jealousy contained.
THE FACT THAT TONY IS TALKING TO WHEN HE'S OUT ON HEROICS. It makes something curl up in chest, warm and fuzzy, and he definitely feels embarrassed for the way that he is TOUCHED BY THIS. This trying not to hold things inside was something else. ❝ Tin Can, be careful out there please, 'kay? ❞ HE LETS HIMSELF SAY, voice softer as Tony brushes off that he shouldn't be worrying about him. It means more than he was actually can, comfortably put into words that he took his call.
SOMETIMES YOU NEED TO ASK FRIENDS FOR HELP.
That was what he had with Tony, with what he was going to try to do. It's been rough, and he feels so low; but he does want to climb out, climb up. FIND HIMSELF. Be better.
❝ The God stuff is... I am trying; it just brings up my Aunt Francis and than the nuns from St Ignatius memories a lot. ACTUALLY, my therapist kind of looks like Sister Cathy, that old broad is definitely dead now but therapist's not all god stuff like the Sister was. ❞ He doesn't think he's ever actually talked about any of stuff like this. There's little signs that things WERE working for Clint, and that he was DOING the work even if HE HATED IT.
❝ It's... I hate a lot of this, Tony, and I'm really not sure if ever liked myself, kind of hate me at the moment; but like there is six different groups in the schedule daily. ❞ IT'S A LOT AND CLINT THINKS HE MAY ALREADY BE FEELING FATIGUED WITH IT. Has already felt fatigued with it; kind of had been holding on to get a little glimpse of outside.
He's still not talking much in group, doesn't know what to say when he was-is-was-is Hawkeye. That he doesn't talk about specifics of things, the reasons he blamed on wanting to drink, on why he ran to drinks for coping. ❝ I'm just really tired, feels like I've got worms in my skin and gut, I want to walk and go to a bar, or have gin before I have to talk in front of people. ❞ HIS THERAPIST SHOULD BE PROUD OF HIM. HE'S TALKING. BEING HONEST.
see he can put in the work, wants to. chose this. hates it, but no one said anything about the additional feelings on top.
Tony's actually smiling. He's fighting some asshole with a god complex and stolen tech, and he's smiling. Clint's doing the work. He hates it, but he's doing it. And he sounds better. Healthier. More together. More himself.
Tony wishes he could see him. He has the strong urge to pull the man into his arms and nuzzle his face in his hair. He bets he smells clean right now. He's sure Clint wouldn't even fight it.
Tony's crushing on Clint Barton and he's too happy to even try and second guess what these feeling mean. He just feels them.
He gestures to Rhodey when he spots him and the two fly down the sides of a bank of transformers. The noise is horrific and for a moment he's not sure if Clint paused what he was saying or he just didn't hear it over the cacophony of sound outside the suit.
"You just have to keep telling yourself it's good for you. And you know, sometimes you'll actually like it. I mean - little ol' Attention Deficit and Hyperactivity Disorder here, meditation can be like torture. But sometimes - man - you get that head empty and it's like having a little mini holiday. Freezer Burn does it, you know? I went out to his house in Indiana and he had this little pyramid he sits under. It's very hippy dippy."
He lands in front of Patsy and guards her from an attack. When she shoos him off again, he's smiling at Clint's question. "Me? Umm... I wanna say upstate? But we might have crossed over the border. Fucking guys been trying to - you know what? I don't even know what he's trying to do? Something to do with mom and dad I think? Who knows. Just punching it out, at the moment. But don't worry about me. I want to hear more about you. You know what helps me with the god stuff? Just reframing it? Like you need to believe in a power bigger than you? Okay so most people think that's god, but maybe that's just you can't do it alone. Sometimes you need to ask friends for help."
1K notes · View notes
griffintail · 4 years ago
Text
A Day in the Life (Lost Ones)
Summary: A day with the new parents and how some of their friends reaction to their new bit of joy. 
Pairings: Platonic! Parental! Tommy, Wilbur, Philza, Technoblade, Eret, and Dream x F! Child! Reader
Previous | Next
Warnings : (In Phil’s Specifically) Death, Violence. (Generally) Swearing
A/N: Just so you know (F/L) means First Letter of your first name. Hope you guys enjoy! ♥
Tommy
        Tommy didn’t know what the fuck he was doing.
        Tubbo was even more clueless.
        When Tommy first came onto Tubbo’s doorstep frantically talking about being a father with a crying baby, Tubbo was in a state of great concern for his best friend. Tubbo knew Tommy as a scammer and a very…bold individual, to put it nicely. He did not think his friend had what it took to be any sort of fatherly figure. He was just too young and he was too…outgoing.
        The first day, the pair worked hard to figure out how to make the infant stop crying. They found out she just needed food and a diaper change. Tommy had groaned in relief, sitting on Tubbo’s floor as he held the baby feeding her the milk. From there, Tubbo questioned where he even found a child.
        “She was abandoned in a basket, in a tree. I decided to be a big man about it and take her in.”
        “Are you crazy? Tommy, you didn’t even know her gender until two minutes ago.”
        “Shut up.” Tommy huffed looking at his friend as he stopped giving (Y/N) milk for the moment. “I can figure it out, I’m still new to this Tubbo.”
        “I think maybe we should give her to one of the other guys. We don’t know what to do, we just ran around my house for five minutes trying to make her stop crying for god’s sake.”
        “I’ll figure it out! Even without your help.” Tommy looked back down at the infant, continuing to feed her.
        So, Tubbo went along with it. Tommy was stubborn and to make sure the baby didn’t get hurt, Tubbo said he’d help his friend. To be fair, they didn’t have to do much, it was just a lot of work to do the few things and barely any time to do the same adventures they use to do.
        Tommy was determined to do most of it on his own, only going to Tubbo when he was desperate for help. Which were a few times a week. He got better and better though, learning what (Y/N) needed and when.
        Tommy had managed to make a crib all on his own (with a couple of tries) and he discovered, (Y/N) liked her crib at the end of his bed. She just liked being close to Tommy often and he actually didn’t mind. He was proud to show off his baby.
        When he had shown her off to the others, they had all been in various bits of shock. Of course, when he first introduced her, the first thing he shouted was always;
        “I’m a father now bitch! Meet (Y/N)!”
        As he would, (Y/N) would giggle and babble, his excited energy rubbing off on her. After their various bits of shock (and Bad telling him to watch his language even more now that there was a baby), they would indeed think (Y/N) was cute but give him the same advice as Tubbo. Give her to an adult.
        “None of them! None of them think I can take care of you.” Tommy huffed as (Y/N) finished her milk for the hour. “Isn’t that ridiculous?”
        Tommy did struggle often. He didn’t get as much sleep as he once did, he stayed inside with (Y/N) more. It was a big change, but he was taking it seriously despite all his jokes. Just, no one could see it because they only saw Tommy as a child.
        “Well, they’re all idiots. I know I have this.” Tommy told the infant as he sat back in bed, holding her. “Right Little (F/L)?”
        (Y/N) squirmed slightly, babbling and Tommy smiled.
        “Right! It’s that time.” He grinned as he stood up, going into his chests next to his jukebox.
        As he pulled out one of his discs, Tubbo knocked on the door as he came in.
        “Hey, am I interrupting?” He asked.
        “No, you’re actually in time Big T!” Tommy said as he put the red labeled disc on.
        “For what?” Tubbo questioned confused as Tommy sat down.
        The music started to play and (Y/N) relaxed in Tommy’s arms. Tommy smiled softly, gently rocking her in his arms as he hummed along to the music. Tubbo was staring in amazement from behind Tommy’s seat.
        “Do you…do you do this often?”
        “Of course.” Tommy grinned at his best friend. “She’s got to learn great music. And look, she loves it so much she falls asleep.”
        He was correct as when Tubbo looked, (Y/N) was giving a tiny yawn as she nuzzled into Tommy.
        “Every day after lunch, I play the disc I got when I found her and she takes a nap.” Tommy quieted down; startling Tubbo as Tommy never quieted down. “I want to find more to let her hear more.”
        Tommy put her down in her crib once she was fully asleep, motioning to the door. They both left as the music kept playing.
        “We should go get more discs tomorrow.” Tommy declared, keeping his voice level as he went through his chests. “(Y/N) needs to hear them all and I want to have them all.”
        “You…do that every day?” Tubbo said, still caught up on Tommy’s gentleness.
        Tommy rolled his eyes. “Of course, I do. (Y/N) likes it and I like it so that’s our routine Tubbo. Sometimes it takes a while though and I have to move around the room.”
        He didn’t mention that he danced to the music with her though, laughing with her as she would giggle, slightly embarrassed about the cute routine.
        “So, are we going to go out tomorrow and get some discs or not?” Tommy grinned at his friend.
        Tubbo stood there, thinking over what he had just seen. He thought about how he was actually wrong about Tommy. His best friend really cared about the girl; his own little girl. Tommy had acted drastically different than what he usually did to make sure she was well and happy. The taller boy was actually taking this very seriously and Tubbo couldn’t help but be proud of his friend.
        “Tubbo.” Tommy snapped his fingers, looking at him disapprovingly.
        “Oh, yeah. Let’s get some discs tomorrow. It’s been forever since we’ve gone on an adventure.” Tubbo smiled.
        He thought Tommy could do this whole dad thing right.
        …
        Then he slightly regretted his words in the morning when Tommy showed up with the little girl and his adventuring gear.
        “We are not taking (Y/N). It’s dangerous Tommy!” Tubbo protested.
        “Nothing will happen to her; I wouldn’t let it. Neither would you. And try and say no to this face.” Tommy showed her off, grinning. “Come on now Uncle Tubbo.”
        Tubbo paused, getting slightly giddy. “Uncle Tubbo?”
        “Of course! Now! Let’s go get some discs!” Tommy took lead.
        “…Wait! You distracted me!” Tubbo called exasperated as he followed his best friend.
        (Y/N) giggled as Tommy grinned wider. Tommy was stubborn but in the case of being a father, it was a good thing as it meant his baby would grow up healthy and happy and he could care less about what others would say.
          Wilbur
        L’Manberg didn’t have many secrets but it had one well-guarded one. That would be the simple fact that (Y/N) existed.
        After the first night with the new baby, Wilbur had gathered all the men inside the van.
        “Time to greet the people little one.” He smiled as he heard the commotion of Tommy trying to command the others.
        Coming out, he put on a serious face as everyone went quiet. Of course, Eret and Fundy already knew. The teenager had his arms crossed, looking away from his father and new sister, as Eret gave a small smile. The other two of L’Manberg…
        “Did you fuck another fish?!” Tommy shouted in exasperation to his brother.
        Fundy gave Tommy an offended glare as (Y/N) squirmed at the sudden loud noise.
        “Tommy, quiet down now,” Wilbur told him as he gently rocked the little girl, Tubbo awing at how adorable she was. “Eret found her left outside the walls last night. I’m taking her in as she was obviously abandoned. So, meet the first woman of L’Manberg, (Y/N).”
        “(Y/N) is a wonderful name.” Eret smiled a bit wider.
        “She’s so cute and small,” Tubbo said, taking a step closer to get a better look at her.
        Tommy huffed, already bored as Fundy simply stayed quiet.
        “That being said, we are in the middle of a war.”
        The weight of everything came back to rest on their shoulders as everyone with a smile stopped holding one. It was a dangerous time for all of them, no one able to leave the walls without a friend. Walls that were supposed to mean their freedom.
        “That’s why no one must know (Y/N) exists. She must be a secret from all of the Dream SMP. They’ve shown how ruthless they can be and I don’t want to think about what they’d do if they knew about her. So, beyond these walls, (Y/N) doesn’t exist.”
        Everyone gave a nod at the same time as (Y/N) had started to play with the ruffles on Wilbur’s uniform. He smiled gently as her as he took her hand, letting her play with his finger instead before looking dead serious at his men again.
        “I can’t have just a nod. I need you to be verbal. This will not be taken lightly.”
        Tommy spoke first as he gave a salute. “You have my word, Wilbur!”
        Wilbur cracked a small smile; he could always rely on his little brother. “Good, now quiet down a bit.”
        From there, it was a chorus of promises and she was their biggest secret that united them. Not even a traitor would dare breath word of her place in their walls.
        The men could see a difference in their leader every day since then.
        He left the van more often, actually going to his own home in the walls. Daily, everyone would see him carrying (Y/N) with him in her own little uniform he made on a walk within the walls. He sang more often like he used to before the declaration of war was made in order to soothe the little girl or simply to make her smile. There was a reason for him to relax and be soft and everyone was rather glad after all the weight he had been forced to hold.
        Wilbur also saw the change in his men as the days went on.
        Tubbo found joy with such an adorable new addition. He would sometimes join Wilbur on his daily walks within the walls to have a chance to hold the small girl. The young boy loved to also give her little gifts, usually toys he thought she’d like. He was very excited when Wilbur told him that she slept with a bee plushie he had gotten her.
        Tommy was curious about her. Such a small thing, he was certain he was way bigger than her when he was that young. Wilbur let him hold her on the occasion if Tommy asked, but wouldn’t wonder if Tommy was holding her. He had faith in his little brother, but his eccentric energy just put Wilbur a little on edge. Often, Tommy would brag to the little girl that he’d be the coolest uncle and teach her many swear words when she got older, much to Wilbur’s dismay.
        Eret did like the little girl, he really did as she was such a precious little thing, but he tried not to put too much attachment to her. He had begun…he had begun a different path and he didn’t want to also betray the little girl. And, the more separation he felt from her, the easier it was to lie about her existence. Though, there was the occasion he would do the same as Tubbo and gave her a toy or two, unable to help it as it put a smile on his face.
        Fundy was different. He had been an only child for most of his life and now he had a little sister? It was only natural that he was jealous and sulked at all the attention she got from their father. Their father did try to include Fundy though; inviting every day on their walks, offering to let her feed instead, asking to play his piano while Wilbur sang. Unfortunately, Fundy wanted nothing to do with his little sister, often saying he hated her, which repeatedly broke Wilbur’s heart but he had faith; he’d change his son’s mind.
        “I’m trying to have a peace talk with Dream today,” Wilbur told Fundy as he shrugged on his jacket while Fundy was sitting in the front seat of the van.
        “Ok, and?” Fundy looked up at him.
        “I’m taking Tubbo and Eret, Tommy’s staying guard and you.” Wilbur handed him a piece of paper. “And you are taking care of your sister.”
        “What?! What the hell?” Fundy exclaimed, jumping up.
        Wilbur put the paper in Fundy’s hand. “I have to go and try and make peace. I have faith in you son. (Y/N) would love to spend time with you anyways. Take good care of her alright? I don’t trust Tommy to watch her for so long but if you really need help, get him.”
        “What…Why do I have to watch the brat?”
        Wilbur gave him a stern look. “Fundy, she is your little sister. She is a part of our family. And family takes care of each other. Now, I want you to be nice to her and take care of her. Understood?”
        Fundy clenched his jaw, shoving his hands in pockets. “Yeah, yeah.”
        “Good.” Wilbur smiled at him now. “She’s still sleeping in my room. That paper is what she needs and when. You can do anything with her in-between. I’ll see you in a few hours my son.”
         Wilbur left; his heart heavy as this was the first time he’d leave (Y/N) alone but hope helping it float as he hoped Fundy could love his sister as Wilbur loved her.
        Fundy went into his father’s bedroom and saw the little girl already waking up slightly. He gave a heavy sigh as he picked her up carefully, holding her close.
        “I hate you.” He muttered as she looked up at him.
        The little girl giggled and he lowered his head. She gave pet to his face to feel the soft fur.
        “I hate you’re too fucking adorable to hate.” He huffed. “Just don’t tell dad. Now, come on dipshit, time to eat.”
        Fundy was jealous, yes. But he could never actually hate his adorable little sister. He’d keep her safe and make her happy too.
        Wilbur got back later than he expected as Dream and his goons had chased their peaceful band like sport but they managed out relatively unscathed. The moon was already up and Wilbur was worried as he hadn’t written instructions for this long in the night for Fundy. After Tommy reported no incidents along the walls, Wilbur rushed home but froze, his heart-melting. In the living room, there was a long finished playing record on the jukebox and on the couch, Fundy laid with his arm over (Y/N) securely as she laid on his chest, both of them asleep.
        “Thank you, my little champion,” Wilbur muttered with a smile, gently picking (Y/N) up before putting a blanket over Fundy. “I’m proud of you.”
        Wilbur held (Y/N) close to him as he walked to his bedroom.
        “And you, my little star, a day won’t go by where you won’t be loved. You’re our little star of hope in L’Manberg. You remind everyone what we fight for and you bring everyone smiles. We will bring peace, just so you can see how bright you shine my little star.” He kissed her forehead before putting her in her crib. “Sleep well love.”
          Philza
        Walking took longer than flying but it was definitely safer for his new little angel. He had tried to find her parents, asking around with the survivors but they weren’t there. So, Phil took her with him to meet his sons. When he started this journey, of the list of things he’d thought would happen, he didn’t think he’d gain a new child. Yet, there she slept peacefully in the sash Phil had made to carry her and keep her warm rather than carrying her in his arms the entire walk.
        She most certainly quieter than most of his other children had been when they were this small, which Phil did not mind one bit. When she was awake, he would talk to her to fill her world though. He’d tell her about her new brothers and how he was sure they’d all love her in their own way.
        “Techno will take a little convincing, he has a thing about orphans.” Phil scrunched up his nose. “But he’ll learn to you like you (Y/N).”
        He hadn’t been able to find a name either for the new baby so he gave her one on his own.
        Finally, after days of travel, Phil reached a crest of a hill and was able to see a beautiful town laid before him. From the looks of some decorations, they had some sort of festival recently. The worrying part was the people in armor down below, but, a large portion of them were celebrating. Phil scanned them over then he grew a large smile. Wilbur was patting Tommy’s shoulder as the younger boy was screaming with one of those celebrating, Techno to the side smirking.
        His sons had managed to figure it all out.
        “Looks like we were a little late angel. Your brothers can be smart when they choose to be.” He chuckled. “We’ll wait here and let them have their moment of victory.”
        He sat on the edge of the hill, giving (Y/N) her afternoon milk as he watched the crowd below and listened to the start of celebratory speeches. As he quickly burped the infant, he frowned as Wilbur left his seat in the crowd, walking away as Tubbo was getting on stage.
        “Let’s go see what he’s up to.” He muttered to the little girl, putting her in his sash securely before carefully flying over.
        He landed as Wilbur walked into a room in a hill behind the stage. His eyes went wide as he remembered one of Tommy’s letters.
        Will keeps saying if he can’t have L’Manberg, no one can. He made a room rigged to TNT under our nation. I’m hoping to talk him down but I don’t know if I can.
        “Shit.” Phil sprinted over, walking into the room after his son.
        Inside were mad scribblings as Wilbur stood with his hand on the wall next to a button.
        “What are you doing?” Phil asked him.
        Wilbur jumped, whirling around to see his father standing there, wearing a sash, unable to see the child it was holding.
        “Phil…?”
        “What are you doing?” Phil repeated.
        Wilbur ran his hands through his hair as he looked back at the button then his father.
        “How’d you…do you know what this is?” He motioned to the room around him.
        “I do.” Phil nodded, stepping carefully forward.
        “Have heard the songs on the walls?” Wilbur asked in turn as he ran his hand over a few of the words. “I was just saying to myself, there was a special place where men can go, but there’s not anymore! It’s not…” Wilbur sighed as he looked back at the button.
        “It is there,” Phil told him as he put a hand on the side of the child to calm her down as she squirmed. “You just, you’ve just won it back.”
        “Phil! I’m always so close to pressing this button, Phil! I’ve been—I’ve been here like seven or eight times I’ve been here.” Wilbur threw up his arms as Phil stood his ground when he saw the crazed look in his son’s eyes.
        The little girl tried to give an uncomfortable babble at the loud shouting but Wilbur talked over her, having yet to notice the extra body in the room. In comfort, Phil put a hand over one of her ears as he pressed her close to him.
        “Phil I-I’ve been here so many times.” Outside of the room, they all could hear the sound of fireworks going off. “They’re fighting. They’re fighting.”
        “And you want to just blow it all up?” Phil questioned.
        “I do I think I—”
        “You fought so hard to get this land back.” Phil tried to discourage one of his older sons. “So hard.”
        “I don’t even, I don’t even know if works anymore Phil,” Wilbur said, his hand hovering over the button, making Phil take a step forward. “I don’t even know if the button works I could, I could press it and might not…”
        Wilbur looked back, grinning like a mad man and Phil squeezed the young girl lightly.
        “Do you really want to take that risk? Wilbur…” He went to continue to say, hoping to bring up his new little sister to discourage the man but Wilbur looked away, staring at the button.
        “There was a saying Phil, by a traitor. It was never meant to be.” Wilbur pressed the button, grinning at Phil as the hiss went off.
        “No!” Phil shouted, quickly pulling his son close as he covered the three of them his wings as the blast went off.
        He winced as the blast and the heat singed and damaged his feathers but he didn’t move as he held his two children close. He wouldn’t let them get harmed.
        The sound of white noise rang in their ears as the explosions slowly stopped. Phil raised his wings slightly to look in horror at the destruction before them. Outside their half-destroyed room, Phil slowly started to hear the voices crying with terror at what they just witnessed as Wilbur stood before the hole holding his arms out as he grinned.
        “My L’Manberg Phil! My unfinished symphony forever unfinished! If I can’t have this no one can Phil!”
        “Oh my god.” Phil breathed, the ringing dying down enough for him to be startled at the cries closest to him.
        (Y/N) screamed out cries in the aftermath of the loud explosions and shouting, her own ears ringing. Phil held her close, trying to calm her down despite his horror and disappointment. Wilbur finally heard the cries himself and looked over to finally notice the little girl. For a moment, he could see through his madness.
        “Who’s…who’s this?” Wilbur muttered.
        “She’s (Y/N),” Phil told him as he put his forehead on the little girl’s. “I came to help you and found her. I brought her to show her what her new brothers made. What great work you’ve done.”
        “What great…” Wilbur looked over at what he had done.
        Behind him, he could hear the cries of his new tiny sister he hadn’t been aware he had. Phil had brought her to show her a place of peace and beauty, but instead, Wilbur showed her terror and destruction. Across the explosion, he could see Tommy’s horror-struck face at the sight of their once great nation gone. This was his fault…
        He pulled his sword, holding the handle to Will. “Kill me, Phil.”
        “What?!” Phil looked at his son shocked, still clutching onto the crying girl.
        “Stab me with the sword. Murder me now. Kill me!” Will demanded as he motioned to the crowd. “Look, they all want you to!”
        Phil was stood in shock as he held a crying child in one arm while looking over at the crowd of terrified and horror-filled faces.
        “Kill me, Phil!” Wilbur shouted.
        “I—You’re my son!” Phil yelled. “No matter what you do—I can’t—”
        “Phil!” Wilbur shouted, shoving the sword handle into his hand. “This isn’t—! Look! Look! How much work went into this and it’s gone! Do it.”
        Phil looked from his son to the crowd, to the child in his arms. He couldn’t…why’d…(Y/N) should get a chance to meet her own brother! L’Manberg had ruined his son. He had gone mad…
        “I’m sorry.” He whispered under his breath before plunging the sword.
        Tears filled Phil’s eyes as he let go of the sword and held his son. (Y/N)’s wails only got louder and Phil cried with her.
        “I’m sorry, I’m sorry both of you.” He muttered
        He wished everything could be different…
        …
        Phil sat by the fire with the L’Manberg citizens, one of his hands shaking slightly as the other gently rocked the no longer crying child.
        Tommy had been speechless since the betrayal he received from both of his brothers, but looking up at his father across from him, he stood and spoke.
        “Who’s she?” He asked.
        Phil looked at him as the others looked over as well.
        “This is your new little sister (Y/N). I found her when the village I was staying at was raided and I saved her. Would you like to hold her?”
        Tommy came over and sat in front of his father. Phil helped him before letting his now second youngest hold her on his own. Tommy’s face had held no emotion after everything today but now it softened as the little girl met his eyes. He hugged her lightly as Phil held onto his shaking hand with his other to stop it.
        “I wish you could have seen what L’Manberg looked like (Y/N),” Tommy mumbled to her. “Wilbur and Techno betrayed me but I promise. I won’t betray you. I never will do that to you.”
        Phil looked at his son sadly as Tommy put his forehead on hers softly. At least Phil knew that she’d be well-loved by the brother she got to meet properly.
        From there, the next few days were made for rebuilding. Phil helped the group as best he could but he had to rest to let his wings heal and he also had to take care of his little angel. Tommy made sure the others built Phil one of the first houses so his sister could be in a proper bed.
        It warmed Phil’s heart that Tommy cared so much about his new little sister. Tommy would visit the pair occasionally just to see her, Phil giving him a little bit of trust to take care of her. Of course, Tommy used that trust to be his usual self and brag about how cute his little sister was to anyone that would listen to the boy’s antics. Though many couldn’t deny the boy, she was a very cute little girl and often brought smiles to other’s faces.
        Phil was glad that his quiet little girl could bring joy to people that had been through so much. He just wished that she had had a chance to bring smiles to those that didn’t walk beside them any more…
          Technoblade
        “Phil,” Techno called on his walkie, trying to quiet down the girl crying in his arms.
        “Yes?” Phil answered.
        “She won’t stop crying,” Techno told him, Phil, able to hear the girl, chuckling quietly to himself. “Don’t laugh at this!”
        “Sorry, sorry. Alright, you feed and changed her right?” The older man listed.
        “Yes.” He had done it a few minutes ago, on his usual schedule to do so.
        “Did you burp her after she ate?”
        Techno paused and huffed before burping the child, the cries dying down after she released the gas that had built up.
        “I forgot, she stopped.”
        “Good. Just relax now, alright Techno?”
        “Yeah.” Techno sighed as he put his walkie away, looking down at the little girl. “What now brat?”
        It was often that Techno called his father to ask what to do. To put it simply, he was worried he’d fuck this all up. He had never exactly taken care of a child before; it had been all anarchy and blood before he decided on retirement. Hell, he barely ever took care of Tommy when he was a child, that was usually Wilbur’s thing.
        He didn’t know the first thing he was doing nor did the voices. They always threw out different ideas contradicting each other. So, Techno always did his best and when it didn’t seem like enough, he went immediately to Phil.
        When he did have things under control though, it was just any other day. Brew some potions out of habit, take care of the animals before collecting food for himself and milk for (Y/N), and trade with some of the villagers close by. The only difference was that he brought (Y/N) with him while he did anything.
        To his relief, she was a quiet child and didn’t mind his quiet nature. She didn’t need pointless noise to be happy so he could just simply work. Techno did get Phil to make her a warmer outfit and Phil took it seriously but also made it a joke. He made her a pink outfit from wool and leather and with a bit extra, put fake pig ears on the hood of the outfit, which Techno would never admit looked adorable on her out loud.
        He most certainly didn’t put it on her even if they weren’t going out that day, why would anyone think that?
        Phil most certainly did spoil her though when he would come over. He’d always have something new for the little girl, clothes, and toys. His father also often tried to discourage Techno from using some of his nicknames for his child when the older man was over, such as brat.
        (Y/N) yawned quietly and Techno chuckled, a small smile cracking on his face.
        “Tired early huh? Yeah, ok, I can use a nap.” He nodded as he went up to his bedroom.
        He sat on his bed, leaning back on the headboard as he racked his brain for their daily ritual.
        “I got a good one today.” He laughed quietly. “Let me tell you about the story of Theseus.”
        Every nap and bedtime, there was always a story for Techno to tell. Sometimes he’d tell her about his adventures around the world, about the places he conquered. There were other days when he’d tell her about myths he had memorized. It was when he’d talk the most to the little girl and he rather enjoyed these moments in his day.
        It was their special little thing and he wouldn’t ever want to miss them.
        Close to the end of the story, he stopped as he noticed (Y/N) was asleep. He nodded as he laid back, resting her carefully on his chest.
        A crib was one thing Techno had not invested his time in. He didn’t move in his sleep and it was rare for the little girl to move in hers. So, he slept with her on his chest, giving him and the voices a better piece of mind. No one knew where he was, but he was still paranoid. This was the safest place for her.
        “Sleep well little goddess,” Techno muttered, a hand on her back.
        Despite the trials, he didn’t mind being a father.
          Eret
        Eret put a small flower crown on the infant’s head that matched the one he was wearing, smiling as she giggled, before picking her up, continuing on their daily walk through the SMP.
        It was a lot of trial and error with the pair but Eret was a quick learner and adapted to the needs of his new child. He didn’t do as much as he once did with his friends, fewer prank wars with Fundy, and less involvement with Tommy’s antics, but he didn’t mind. He spent those hours with his little princess now; taking walks with her, playing with her along the way and in the castle, and making clothes that made her the adorable princess that she.
        Of course, he did still sometimes get involved.
        “Eret!” Tommy yelled on the walkie.
        Eret chuckled as he took it from his pocket. “It seems Tommy is having troubles again princess.” She gave a babble and Eret nodded. “You’re very right. Let’s see what he needs. Yes, Tommy?”
        “I need your help at my base ASAP!” Tommy demanded.
        “It’s nothing dangerous right?” He asked.
        “Of course not, now if you could hurry.”
        He shook his head chuckling. “Alright, I’m on my way.”
        Putting the walkie away, he hugged his little girl lightly as he changed direction.
        “Sorry princess, we need to go check on Tommy. I know you won’t mind though.”
        There were other times that had happened similarly and Eret would take (Y/N) with him to meet the younger boy. The younger boy’s energy would rub off on the infant and she would get excited as well, babbling and giggling constantly. As long as nothing dangerous was going on, Eret was glad to bring (Y/N) over as it always brought a smile to his face at how adorable she’d get.
        Walking onto Tommy's property, he saw the young boy waiting impatiently outside his dirt home.
        “There you are! You brought the brat?” He huffed.
        “Come now, Tommy. (Y/N) loves being around you, at least be kind to her.” Eret smiled, knowing the boy meant no ill will.
        “Right, now!” Tommy said dramatically as he opened the door to his base. “I need to make a plan!”
        Following him in, he saw Tubbo was also there looking over a paper with Tommy’s handwriting on it. Tubbo looked up as they came in and grinned seeing the little girl in Eret’s arms.
        “You brought (Y/N)!” Tubbo exclaimed excitedly as he came over. “Can I hold her?”
        Eret laughed as he nodded, helping the other boy hold her. Tubbo enjoyed seeing the little girl, loving to play with her and spend time with her. There were times when Eret would let Tubbo babysit his princess so he could do a few more dangerous tasks.
        “You got a little crown, you’re really a princess now.” Tubbo grinned as the girl babbled at him.
        “We’re not here for (Y/N), we’re here to plan!” Tommy protested now.
        Tommy didn’t mind the small child, he just got annoyed when the focus would come off him.
        Focus went back on Tommy but Eret left after a little while to give (Y/N) her lunch for the day. She had gotten energetic after seeing the two boys, babbling and giggling as Eret played with her on the walk back. As they got back to his castle, he saw a wrapped package and note at the main door. Picking it up, he saw it was Fundy’s handwriting.
        You stand no chance, it’s for (Y/N)
        He raised an eyebrow, opening the package then laughed.
        “It seems Fundy wishes to make you love him more than me.” Eret showed her the fox plushy, making her eyes sparkle as he gave it to her. “But I know that you’ll always love me, princess.” He booped her nose, (Y/N) looking at his sunglasses, babbling. “That’s right. I think this prank was an automatic failure. I love you princess.”
          Dream
        “Come on (Y/N), you just got to hold out your hands to me,” Sapnap told the infant in the crib at the community house.
        “No, she’s going to me,” George argued.
        The little girl looked between the two as they went between bickering and encouraging her to hold her hands out to them. Then she looked directly between them and held her arms out giggling.
        “What?” George looked behind them and yelped seeing Dream.
        “What are you idiots doing?” Dream laughed as he picked up his daughter.
        “We were trying to get (Y/N) to choose her favorite uncle, but then you ruined it.” Sapnap huffed, crossing his arms.
        “Well, I am her favorite person.” Dream bragged as he pulled his mask up while looking at the little girl. “Peek-a-boo.”
        The girl gave a little squeal of laughter and Dream chuckled rubbing his nose against hers.
        “She loves both of you idiots.” Dream told them, put his mask back on. “You’re her uncles.”
        “Yeah, but I got to prove Uncle Sapnap is the best.” Sapnap pointed to himself.
        “No! I’m better than you of course.”
        The two bickered and Dream shook his head at his friends before leaving the community house.
        “Your uncles are stupid.” Dream whispered to the little girl, tickling her stomach making her giggle. “Why don’t we go look at what the new people have built today, sound good sweetheart?”
        After Dream had taken in the little girl, his life had most certainly brightened more as their world around them grew. She was a constant ball of happiness that always made Dream and his friends smile. Of course, they had to power through learning how to take care of a baby, a lot of screaming coming from all parties the first night they had the child. But they were starting to get the hang of it.
        One thing Dream loved to do that always seemed to please the little girl was taking her around to see the new buildings that were slowly starting to appear as more people joined their land of the SMP. She seemed to like taking in the new sights so Dream took her whenever someone new came or a new build appeared.
        “I don’t know what I’m going to do with your uncles when you get older. They’re going to be falling over each other to get your attention.” Dream told her as he walked. “I think they think I’ll like whoever wins. You’re my special little girl after all. But what they don’t know, is I don’t care as long as you’re happy.”
        It was very true that Dream’s two best friends were always falling each other to get the attention of the infant already. They got her many things to win her over, having similar competitions when Dream wasn’t looking. Right now, the score was even.
        To try and balance the two-out, Dream would alternate on who he took out for dangerous adventures and who would stay with his little girl. He couldn’t send the both of them on their own, unfortunately, least one of them “trips” into a lava pool.
        Dream stopped on the edge of the new property, (Y/N) looking at the colorful flowers decorating it.
        He was a bit hesitant to show her off to others as he wasn’t the most trusting but if they were going to be part of his land, he would introduce her out principle. He did say she was going to be the princess of his land.
        “No new faces today doesn’t seem Tommy is around.” Dream said to her. “We’ll see him later I’m sure. How about we go visit Punz for a bit?”
        He walked away from the property. There were so many people on his land now, he was sure it would become a bright place where his little princess could always be happy.
Lost Ones Taglist: @kakamihasatmblr​ @ialexabsuniverse​ @teaguecosmos​ @chaosofsmarty​
A/N: If you want to be in this taglist I have a post on my page you can reply on or just send me an ask :)
1K notes · View notes
ohworm-writes · 4 years ago
Note
hello! :) so u know how kuon has a crush on sniper right ? can i get an imagine where reader is jealous bc of kuon, cuz u know, her crush on sniper etc etc (sorry i'm just vv lazy at typing), and how sniper reacts to it ?? can u make it like they're still friends but have mutual feelings for each other as they hang out as a unit, and they get together in the end bc sum confessions happened !! sorry if u don't get it i'm rlly bad at explaining but thank u in advance if u do this !! <33
High-Rise Invasion/Tenkuu Shinpan: Sniper Mask Boyfriend Imagine
high-rise invasion/tenkuu shinpan masterlist
‼ Jealous Reader (over Kuon) + Make up + Confession ‼
Featuring: Sniper Mask, Yuri Honjo, Mayuko Nise (implied), Kuon Shinzaki (implied)
Warnings: frustrated Y/n, crushes, jealousy
a/n - good GODS this has been in my inbox for a while and i’m so so so sorry for not posting it way sooner! hopefully you see this anon, and i hope you enjoy!
content below the cut!
Tumblr media
you had developed a crush on the man in the mask ever since you first joined Yuri's little group
you couldn't really tell what it was the drew you to him
he was silent, dismissive, and he was a Mask for goodness sake!
but none of that deterred you from the attraction you garnered for him
you always found yourself trying to interact with him
whether it was offering your help with something that he was doing, or simply keeping him company
most times he brushed you off, walking away and not giving you an answer
other times he silently accepted your offer
those times the two of you would sit in comfortable silence, just enjoying one another's presence
you cherish moments like these for a very specific reason
Kuon
now you had nothing against the girl!
... at first
she seemed nice enough, always eager to help, and full of ignorant innocence
but then you realized her (very obvious) crush on the masked man
the way she got flustered around him so easily
the way she clung to him like a lost child
at first, you thought maybe she saw him as a parental figure, seeing how young she was
but that thought was (very) quickly thrown to the wind when you saw her wrapped up in his jacket, blushing like the schoolgirl she was and giggling to herself
so what she liked him? you liked him too, maybe the two of you could bond over that!
that's what you told yourself
of course, you never acted on it
it was simple, you were too jealous to do so
you noticed how Sniper Mask welcomed all her little instances without a care in the world
not giving a damn when she clung to him
or batting an eye at her obvious fangirling
it pissed you off
naturally, you began to avoid Kuon
and Sniper Mask simultaneously
you avoided the two of them whenever you could
when you saw them walking towards you, you kept to the opposite side of the wall and walked quickly past them
when you all usually ate together, you picked up your food and ate outside
you were simply, undeniably jealous
you didn't think Sniper Mask cared about it, not that you could tell under his mask
but in actuality, he was confused as to why you avoided him all of the sudden
so, he opted to ask you one day
You shut the door to the dining room rather aggressively as you exited, but you couldn't care less. You let your body slump against the adjacent wall, your plate of food resting on your lap.
Today had been... exhausting, to say the least. Kuon was on her usual actions of pining over 'Mr. Mask', crossing your way a few more times than you would have liked. During your meeting earlier with her and Yuri, your fellow mouthless masked allies, she had the gall to talk on and on about how much she adored him.
You hated it.
You looked down at your food, a scowl finding its place on your features. You glared at it, pushing the pieces around with your fork, not noticing a door open and close right in front of you.
"Jesus, if that food was alive, it would be 6 feet under with the glare you're giving it." You hear a gruff voice call from in front of you. A voice you would rather not be hearing right now.
You continue to move around the food, staying silent as the man awkwardly stands in front of you, unsure of what to do with himself in this situation. "Is it, uh, okay if I sit here?" He asks, which finally makes you look up.
He had a plate of food between his own hands, his jacket gone and sleeves rolled up to his elbows. His mask covered his face, per usual, but it seemed much more lopsided than usual.
You give him a shrug in response, looking back down at your food again. He stands there for a moment, before taking a seat right next to you, your knees almost touching. "You don't mind if I eat with you, right?"
His question makes your eye twitch. Was he seriously trying to be all buddy-buddy with you now? You shrugged again, not giving him as much as a single word.
You heard him sigh, setting his food to the side before he speaks again. "Alright, what's going on?" He asks, making your body tense up. "Nothing." You shoot back, scowling.
"What happened to the Y/n that stayed up and talked about their life for hours? What happened to the Y/n that told me horrible jokes to try and get a reaction out of me? Huh? What happened to them?"
That broke you.
You were angry, furious even. Was he trying to blame this on you? You didn't do anything wrong! If it wasn't for Kuon, maybe you would still be that person! If it wasn't for her, you could still be friends with him! You could be-
"What?" You hear him say softly, much softer than his previous tone. Shit, did you say that out loud? "Yeah, you did." He says again, looking at you with a concerned expression on his face, not that you could tell.
"I-I'm sorry, I didn't mean to lash out. I just- I’ve been-" You stutter, trying to find the right words. He laughs at that, actually laughs at it.
His laugh is hearty, warm, almost inviting you to laugh along with him. You don't, but he quickly composes himself, making your head turn towards him.
"Why on Earth were you jealous of Kuon?" He asks honestly, watching at how the invisible gears turn in your head, searching for an answer. You sigh heavily, running a hand across your face as you shake your hands while you speak.
"I just- she’s always there with you. She's latched onto you 24/7! I can't get 5 minutes alone with you before she comes barging in." You rant, frustration evident in your shaky voice.
"I just wanted to be your friend, be close with you. I can never do that because she's-she's there." You groan, hugging yourself with your arms. "I sound like a selfish idiot now, huh?"
You laugh dryly, frowning. He sighs, but a smile plays at his lips. "Y/n." He begins, his hand resting you your forearm. "You know she would never purposefully do that. She just, she has an infatuation with me I guess."
He sighs dramatically, earning a chuckle from you. "But." He tells you, watching your eyes as he speaks. "That doesn't mean I didn't miss you."
Your heart skips a beat at his comment, face flushing softly. "Kuon also misses you. You might not have caught onto it, but she looks up to you." He explains, smiling at how your expression softens, mumbling a soft 'she does?' to him.
He nods, laughing once more. "Come on, have dinner with the rest of us. We can't have you sitting alone out here anymore." You roll your eyes, but take him up on his word. He leads you back to the other, Kuon frantically waving over to the two of you the second you pass through the door.
"Y/n! Come sit with me!" She yells excitedly. Maybe you were wrong about her.
after that interaction, the three of you were all on much better terms
yes, kuon still had her habits, but he toned them WAY down after you explained to her how it made you feel
she teased the hell out of you for it too
you, of course, shrugged it off
but you never told her that she was wrong
you were happy to be on good terms with Sniper Mask again
he made a lot more time for you
your old interactions coming back at full force, and some new ones
he loved to take you on little walks on the high rises
he also made it a point to teach you how to shoot his rifle
which was terrifying, but exhilarating
you fell for him harder and harder every day
one day, you ranted your feelings out to Kuon
and while she wasn't surprised, it warmed her heart to see how much you loved him
yes, she crushed on him too, but that didn't take away from the obvious connection she saw between the two of you
unbeknownst to you, Sniper Mask had come to her about the same things
his usually cold demeanor broke whenever he talked with you
he genuinely enjoyed your company, he wanted more of it
and then some
so, she put a plan together
operation "get Mr. Mask and Y/n together" is a go!
she took it all very seriously
making sure you guys get paired together for scouting missions? that's all her
convincing Sniper Mask to get you little gifts and things? of course
overall, the best wing-woman you could ask for
however, the one thing she didn't have anything to do with was his confession to you
he could have used her help with it, that much was clear
but he wanted to tell you how he felt, no help necessary
Sniper Mask had told you earlier this morning to meet you at his room when the sunset before he rushed to get out of your vicinity like you were a plague. Granted, it hurt your feelings, but you couldn't stand him up.
You knocked gently on the wooden door, stepping back and waiting patiently for it to open. After about a minute, while you had heard nothing, you went to knock again.
Your efforts were proved useless as the door swung open hastily, revealing a disheveled Sniper Mask. His usual blazer and fedora were long forgotten, his hair messy, strands pointing this way and that. His mask sat lopsided on his face, still covering it fully.
"H-hey Y/n." He mumbled out, you offered him a wave as he awkwardly shuffled to the side, opening the door as an incentive for you to come in. You stepped inside, walking to the center of the room as you heard him close the door behind you.
You turned to speak to him again, but those thoughts were cast aside as you felt his hands settle onto your cheeks and his lips molding with yours. It startled you, you're eyes open in shock as you looked at him. His mask was completely off, thrown somewhere in the room, but he didn't seem to have a care in the world.
You quickly melted into the kiss, bringing your hands up to gently hold onto his forearms. He hummed, taking a moment before pulling away, leaving the two of you to gasp for air as he rested his forehead against yours. You opened your eyes to meet his, full of adoration.
"I, uh, I think I'm in love with you?" It was more of a question, but you took it happily. You laughed softly, your fingers rubbing small circles in his forearms.
"Was that what that was?"
Tumblr media
699 notes · View notes
starshapedkookie · 5 years ago
Text
Southpaw
Tumblr media
pairing: jungkook x female reader (ft. a little sprinkle of namjoon)
genre: childhood friends to lovers, boxer jungkook, college/frat au
includes: swearing, angst, mentions of blood and violence, pining, smut (public/private, unprotected sex, hair pulling, jungkook is big guys, duh), alcohol, smoking weed, jungkook seems like an asshole but he’s really not, OC having a crisis every two seconds, some fluff here and there as well, also this takes place over many months just saying if time gets confusing
premise: Knowing Jeon Jungkook for the better part of your life, you thought you knew everything about him. Well, that was before you two disappeared from each other’s lives at least. When Jungkook suddenly finds himself buying you a coffee to rekindle your friendship, it leads to much more than you bargained for.
word count: 30k (she’s a monster sorry guys) 
quick note: this is my first story back in a year(?) give or take some weeks!! kind of nervous to post & not sure if my writing has declined in anyway but nonetheless here is the beast that has been sitting on my computer since April 2019!! quick disclaimer I don’t know much about boxing so if I get stuff wrong - I apologize!! please enjoy & let me know what you think ❤️happy 7 years BTS!
recommended songs for reading: pray (JRY, RuthAnne), mushroom chocolate (6lack, quin), hallucinate (dua lipa), wus good/curious (partynextdoor)
_____
The evening was slow—after all, it was only a Wednesday. You had just finished serving a table of two—a young man and young woman—presumably on a midweek date. You didn’t recognize either of them which wasn’t surprising considering the campus grossed about 20,000 people. You began to wipe down tables out of boredom, glancing at the clock every two minutes hoping it would jump to when your shift was over in forty-five minutes. Thankfully, you didn’t have much work to do when you got home, but you are wishing to get in bed before 10:30 to get a full eight hours of sleep for your lectures tomorrow—something you had not had in about two months. Most days, like today, you were running on five hours of sleep and five cups of coffee. It wasn’t healthy, you knew that much, but it’s how you had to live your life. Your schedule was too demanding to hit the snooze button multiple times. You had shit to do—and getting your degree was the top priority.
“Y/N,” your coworker, Mark, called your name from behind of the counter.
“Yeah?” You respond.
“Will you come help me clean this out?” He asks you and you nod diligently.
“Of course,” you say, dropping your current task of wiping already clean tables. Mark was the one student that worked here you could stand to be around. He was very much like you in the sense that school came before anything—he too was on a full academic scholarship. He worked here before you, but he made you feel the most comfortable out of everyone. You would consider him a close friend at this point.
The espresso machine was a pain in the ass to clean and did call for two people most of the time. Besides, you would rather smell the remnants of coffee beans than the harsh chemicals of bleach gliding across a table.
“You have much work to do after your shift?” He asks you.
“No, thank god,” you shake your head, “I got most of my shit done between my classes today. You?”
“I have to write a ten page paper by midnight,” he sighs, “And guess how many pages I have started.”
You give him a short glance, “I’m gonna take a wild guess and say zero.”
“Damn right,” he smiles. A short silence between you two ensues before he speaks again, “Oh! Did I tell you I’m graduating early?”
“What? Really?” You look at him and an excited grin plays on his face. “When?”
“Yeah, I spoke to my advisor this afternoon and turns out, the classes I’m taking this semester is all I need for my degree,” he speaks with a relieved tone.
“Wow, that’s awesome,” you say genuinely, “I wish that was me,” you give out a small chuckle.
“I’m just glad I don’t have to keep stressing over this hell-hole,” he laughs, “The sooner I get out of here, the better.”
“I feel you on that,” you say, “I’m proud of you nonetheless, you’ve worked your ass off dealing with this scholarship.”
He gives you a small smile in return but it’s broken by the bell ringing from the door, signaling a new customer has decided to come in. Your eyes break from Mark’s and glance over to the door, your head doing a double take.
Your mouth goes dry when you see them—more specifically—him. 
No, it wasn’t the first time you’ve seen him, but you couldn’t remember the last time you had seen him outside of a frat party on the weekends. And truly, it was your first time getting a good look at him in awhile. You felt nervous—though you had no reason to be nervous. You had known him since long before your days as university students, but since you weren’t plastered in this scenario, looking at him seemed more like a chore than ever.
“You want me to get their table?” Mark asks you and you look back at him.
“No, I got it,” you say, throwing down the cleaning cloth, wiping your hands on your apron.
The small group of boys are too busy in their own conversation to see you approaching them. You clear your throat before grabbing some menus off of the podium.
“Hey guys, welcome,” your voice breaks their conversation. The three men your age turn to you all at once and a small smile erupts from one of them.
“Y/N? I didn’t know you worked here?” Taehyung—another person you knew all too well—smiles and speaks brightly
“Yup,” you say simply, “Just been here a little over a month,” you explain pressing the best smile you can muster up. “C’mon, I’ll get you seated and get your order in.”
You lead them towards the back of the small restaurant, seating them in a booth. As they follow you from behind, you can feel their eyes burning into your back and you feel like screaming at the top of your lungs. They sit down and you pass out the menus.
“What would you guys like to drink?” You ask, putting a hand on your hip.
“I’ll take a coke,” Hobi—you remember his name easily as you see him around in a few of your classes.
“Coke as well,” Taehyung says.
“Jungkook?” His name rolls off your tongue and it sounds foreign. You couldn’t remember the last time you had said it, let alone to his face. His brown eyes meet yours and he clears his throat.
“I’ll just take a water,” he finally speaks, his gaze breaking just as fast as it met yours.
“I’ll get those right out,” a grimace spreads on your face and you turn on your heels to fulfill their drink orders. You hadn’t expected the encounter to be so awkward and have so much tension—but what did you expect?
Your relationship with Jeon Jungkook was a strange one to say the least. You had known him longer than anyone you associated with—you meet each other at the tender age of eight in elementary school. You remember that day so vividly.
You had been assigned a seat right beside of him the first day of school. He kept his eyes away from you. Being the energetic child you were, you were expecting him to introduce himself but—he never did. It actually took being in school a whole week to get him to talk to you. You nudged his arm with your elbow and his eyes meet yours for the first time. You smiled at him, “I like your shirt,” to which he responded a small, “Thank you.” He picked at his nails and you smiled at him again, “I’m Y/N,” though he would already know that sitting beside of you. “I’m Jungkook,” he spoke again with a shy smile. That day would change both of your lives—all thanks to you and your mouth that couldn’t shut the hell up.
Four years later, at the age of twelve, Jungkook was your best friend. For four years, he was the one person you had came to all about your problems—he as well. The two of you would complain equally about school, he would complain about his older brother picking on him, you would complain about your younger sister bothering you nonstop—the two of you were more alike in more ways than you could imagine. Despite getting older and more different, you and Jungkook shared the same friend group. You had met a girl named Kim Jennie during a pre-algebra class and Jungkook had met a lively kid named Kim Taehyung—no they weren’t related but you often joked about it. It was nice having another close friend instead of just having Jungkook—especially a girl. You and Jennie had more in common than you and Jungkook and Jungkook and Taehyung and more in common than you two. But—the four of you clicked and you spent nearly everyday with each other.
At sixteen, a lot of stuff had changed. Yes, you, Jungkook, Taehyung, and Jennie had all remained best friends, but high school was definitely not the same as middle school. You and Jennie joined the tennis team, Jungkook and Taehyung joined the soccer team—Jungkook also joining the baseball team—which kept the four of you more separated than you would have liked. The four of you all sat together at lunch each day, but as each day passed, something felt different with Jungkook. And then, halfway through your second year of high school, the news broke that Jungkook had a girlfriend—a cute girl named Yuna—who was actually older than him by a year. You felt indifferent about it. He didn’t speak to you as much as he used to and he would ditch you, Jennie and Taehyung to hang out with her. It didn’t bother Jennie or Taehyung as much as it bothered you—but then again—you had known him since you were eight and it felt weird not being Jungkook’s number one girl. You hated to say it—but you were jealous and you had no idea why.
Two years had passed, the four of you all eighteen and fully legal now. It was the end of your last year of high school and you could not be more ready to leave. Growing up through high school together, the thought of all of you going to the same university was a dream. The four of you were excited to move on to new things. Jungkook and Yuna had broken up a few months prior, not being able to work through the distance of her being away at college. Jungkook soon started molding back to how he was before—texting you throughout the day, complaining, just being Jungkook—you were happy, happier than when he was with Yuna. It was May when you had received the news that you had been offered a full ride academic scholarship. You cried and cried tears of joy—finally busting your ass for so long had paid off. Jungkook was so proud of you, though he didn’t outwardly show it, the way he looked at you when you had told him was all you needed. Taehyung suggested it—a small celebration of sorts for you—a.k.a. the four of you getting absolutely plastered in his basement. Taehyung had managed to steal some alcohol from his parents and before the four of you knew it, beers had been downed and half a bottle of tequila had been drank. You were laying on the floor, giggling at everything Jennie did, dancing around the room with a bottle of vodka in hand. Jungkook had laid down beside of you, his eyes boring deep onto you. You crane your neck and give him a small smile, not realizing how little space was between the two of you. Jungkook supports himself on an elbow and it was then you had realized how handsome Jungkook had actually become. He spent so long away from you when he was dating Yuna, you didn’t realize how much he had grown into his features. That night—was singlehandedly the best and worst night of your life.
You had no idea what came over you, but you stood up throwing out your hand for Jungkook to take. He grabbed it with no hesitation, him towering over you as your chests touched and it was the closest the two of you had ever been. Jungkook had looked over to Jennie and Taehyung, still drinking and acting stupid, before grabbing your hand and pulling you into the closest bathroom and shutting the door. Your heart was beating out of your chest and you grip his shirt tightly. The next few moments are a blur—Jungkook kisses you—actually kisses you. He gripped your waist tightly, pushing you against the door. A small whine emitted from your lips as he pulled away and you couldn’t believe this was actually happening. He kissed you again, pulling your thigh up to rest in his hand. This was wrong—so wrong in so many ways. But neither of you stopped until a bang from the other side of the door broke the steamy makeup session.
That night changed everything between you two. Neither of you talked about it ever again. Despite being so drunk to the point of blacking out—you remember every detail—and so did he. That summer, you and Jungkook grew apart. And it was the worst thing to ever happen to you.
Now, at twenty-one, almost through university, you had interacted with Jungkook only a handful of times. You had studied together a few times your freshman year, but after your first year, you could count on your hands how many times you had seen each other. Most of the time, only seeing him at parties with other girls hanging off of him. It was painful to see. Even after 3 years of a drunken kiss in Taehyung’s bathroom, it hurt more than ever to see Jungkook with other girls—but at the same time you didn’t care. You had moved on and so did he. You two were now strangers but your life was good—you didn’t need him like you used to think. And he seemingly didn’t either.
“Y/N? Earth to Y/N?” Mark nudged you out of your obnoxiously long reverie and you jumped out of your skin. “Are you okay?” He asks.
You look down and realize that you haven’t taken the three of them their drinks, the ice now watering them down to shit.
“Y-yeah, I’m just tired is all,” you begin to pour out the drinks to get new ones before Mark stops you.
“Here, I’ll handle them,” he says, “You can go home early, it’s fine,” he smiles.
“A-are you sure?” You ask him, not wanting to leave him by himself.
“Yeah, it’s about closing time anyways. Just head out, I’ll close,” he nods with a smile and you can’t help but to throw you arms around him.
“Jesus, thank you. I promise I’ll make it up to you one day,” you tell him pulling away. You wash your hands quickly and throw off your apron.
“Get home safe,” he says and you tell him the same before grabbing your bag. You glance one last time to the table in the back and unexpectedly, Jungkook is staring at you. It makes your breathing hitch and you turn around on your heel quickly, not wanting to linger on his gaze longer than you need to.
_____
The weekend comes slower than you would like, but it’s Friday which means one thing—time to go out and get a much needed dose of social life. You and Jennie had found yourself at the Beta Tau Sigma crush party at their fraternity house that evening.
“Here you go, m’lady,” Namjoon comes into your peripheral vision, handing you a drink he specially made just for you.
“Thanks,” you give him a small smile. You take a huge gulp without hesitation—you trusted Namjoon with your life. Not only was he on academic scholarship too, he was also the president of this fraternity which meant if he didn’t act straight—he would face serious consequences. The mix of brains, being ridiculously handsome, and being in a fraternity was a recipe for disaster—he was your type—bonafide. You were his type too which is maybe why the two of you clicked so well, particularly in bed.
“My feet are fucking killing me,” you groan glancing down at your heels, rolling your eyes in the back of your head. Namjoon throws an arm over your shoulder, pulling you closer to him.
“At least you look hot as fuck,” he lips brush against your ear and you give him a glare.
“Isn’t hot kind of a degrading term in today’s world?” You press.
He narrows his eyes at you, “Fine—you look beautiful, cute, sexy—is that better?”
“Much better,” you nod playfully and Namjoon gets bold—pulling you even closer to him for a small peck on your lips. Eyes linger on the two of you but you couldn’t care. So many girls would love to be in your position and you feel lucky to have captivated Namjoon at least for now. Besides, he was good at fucking and you needed stress relief, as did he.
Unsuspecting, Jungkook waltzed his way into the room and he immediately stops when he sees the sight of you and his older brother Namjoon. He had heard rumors about the two of you, which he brushed off—you would never go after someone like Namjoon—oh who is he kidding? You and Namjoon are the same person and it kills Jungkook inwardly. The way Namjoon is nuzzled into your neck and the way you're smiling, giggling to every word he says, makes him feel uncomfortable. You looked so different at parties than how he saw you a few days ago at your work. Your legs looked sexy as fuck in your short black dress, your hair flowed down beautifully as opposed to being thrown up, the way red lipstick painted your mouth made him semi hard. Jesus, how after all this time, does he still think about you like this?
Your eyes break away from Namjoon and your smile falls when they meet a familiar set of doe eyes from across the room. Your breath hitches and Jungkook looks so handsome you want to die. His dark hair is slightly parted, his button up is undone at the top, and his legs fulfill his pants better than any guy here. He downs two shots, not breaking his gaze from you. You feel intimidated by his gaze and presence, despite having seen him at these things multiple times. The only difference is that now—he’s giving you some attention that you weren’t ready for.
Your gaze breaks away from each other when a group of loud boys—including Taehyung as well as Kai, another brother within the fraternity—come rushing into the room, hauling a keg in tow.
“Hyung! Come on,” Taehyung teases drunkenly as they set down the keg. There are many hyung’s for Taehyung in the room to not have specified which one he was talking about, until he deadpans on Namjoon. “Namjoon-hyung, come on!”
Namjoon begins to shake his head in protest, “I’d rather not,” he puts his hands up, keeping his distance from Taehyung, “Gotta keep an eye on this one tonight,” he nudges you and Taehyung’s eyes widen when her realizes it’s actually you, standing beside of his older brother.
“Y/N! Hey! What’s up! Didn’t expect to see you here, especially with this one again,” he narrows his eyes to Namjoon.
“Hi Taehyung,” you give him a small smile.
“Do a keg stand with me?” His eyes bulge out like a puppy dog and your own widens in shock at the question.
“Oh no,” you protest, looking up at Namjoon, “Last time I did a keg stand was freshman year and I said never again,” you explain to him. He gives you a pout.
“Fuck,” Taehyung says, “Well who is gonna do this shit with me then?” He sounds impatient and frustrated.
“Get Jungkook too—he’s been looking over in this direction for too long, give ‘em something to do,” Namjoon says and you look up at him. Did he notice Jungkook looking at you? Shit.
“Hell yeah, that little shit will definitely do it,” Taheyung smirks and yells for Jungkook to come over. Jungkook is preoccupied with a girl before Taehyung breaks his mojo from across the room. Jungkook sees Taehyung and you standing together and he furrows his eyebrows. He excuses himself from his pussy date for the night and saunters his way over towards your direction. You keep your eyes anywhere but Jungkook as he approaches you.
“Hey hyung,” Jungkook greets Namjoon, “Y/N,” he says slowly and you tense up. “What do you want Taehyung?” He spits out. He’s clearly buzzed as the attitude coming off of his tongue is stronger than usual.
“Do this fucking keg stand with me pussy,” Taehyung presses and Jungkook scrunches his nose.
“Fuck no,” Jungkook responds and Taehyung rolls his eyes.
“Come onnnn,” he drags out, begging his life long best friend to do it.
“Absolutely not, I’ve done it once and I said never again,” Jungkook says and your eyes nearly pop out of your head. Taehyung looks at you and Jungkook and shakes his head.
“I swear you two are the same person in a different body, it’s weird,” Taehyung says, “Your loss,” and Taehyung is soon leaving your side to find someone else to do his proposition.
Jungkook is left standing in front of you and Namjoon in an awkward silence.
“Don’t forget, you’re on clean up duty Jeon,” Namjoon raises an eyebrow at the younger man.
Jungkook groans, “Fine, whatever hyung,” his words run together as he gives you a final glance, “See you later Y/N,” is the last thing he says before he walks away to find the girl he was smooching up prior.
Namjoon gives you a weird look before you are furrowing eyebrows at him, “What?” You ask.
“What’s up with you two?” He asks motioning over to Jungkook.
“What do you mean?” You gulp down your drink hoping to hide the nervousness in your tone.
“Didn’t you two use to be like, best friends or some shit?” He asks.
You shrug your shoulders, “Yeah, when we were kids,” you chuckle.
Namjoon doesn’t seemed convinced, “I remember you two hanging out a lot during Jungkook's freshman year here, what happened?”
You shrug once again, “People grow apart,” you answer simply, not wanting to go in detail how one kiss basically ruined whatever your friendship was with him. Namjoon suddenly smiles, a dimple showing in his left cheek.
“You know he talks about how hot you are? Not all of the time, but I’ve heard it before,” he laughs and you freeze in your spot.
“What are you trying to prove by interrogating me Joon?” You say with some attitude. That was the least thing you expected to come out of his mouth.
“Hey, I’m just asking questions!” He defends himself, “I just didn’t know if something happened between you two—like you dated or something and shit got weird, I don’t know… just curious,” he chuckles a bit.
You eyes widen and you feel yourself getting warm, “Oh no, we never dated or…anything like that…” you trail off. “We’ve just grown apart, we’re too different now.”
Namjoon raises an eyebrow at you, “According to Taehyung you two are the same person.”
You glare at him, “Get me another drink,” you shove your cup into his hand and see laughs at you before sauntering away for a few seconds. He comes back with a full glass and you down half of it in a few seconds.
“Ew,” you scrunch up your nose. Nice, you think to yourself.
“Maybe you should talk to him? I’m sure having an old friend is nice every once in awhile,” Namjoon continues, clearly interested in your history with Jungkook.
“I have Jennie,” you answer, “Besides, conversation goes both ways. If he really wanted to be friends again, he could talk to me.” You knew that answer was stupid. Jungkook didn’t even speak to you when you were younger. You were the one that initiated the friendship, not him, and you knew that.
“Whatever you say space cowboy,” Namjoon draws out and you give him a glare.
“Did you just quote Kacey Musgraves?” You ask with a small smile on your face.
“Fuck yeah I did,” he smirks, “She’s a gay icon are you kidding me, I’m obsessed with her.”
“Joonie, you’re not even gay,” you laugh.
“So? I love anyone who supports gay rights! Don’t discriminate my quotes!” He defends himself and you cannot help but laugh at him.
“Let’s go dance,” you grab his hand and pull him out of the kitchen onto the main dance floor. Namjoon was perhaps one of the more attractive people you’ve met here in your four years. He oozed sex appeal and charisma, which is why anytime he wanted to hang out or take you to a party—you obliged. If it meant getting in his bed at the end of the night, wearing the heels was worth it.
Namjoon puts his hands on your waist and the two of you dance to music in the crowded dance floor. Namjoon grabs a bottle of liquor from one of his other brothers who you have never met before and the two of you share a nice gulp of the cheap—but very strong—vodka.
You haven’t had too much to drink but you know if you drink anymore, you will not make it back to your apartment. You push the bottle away from you and turn to face Namjoon. His brown eyes stare into yours with a glassy, tipsy appearance, and he smirks at you.
“What?” You question him as his grip gets tighter on you.
“I wasn’t lying when I said you looked hot,” he says smoothly and you roll your eyes yet again.
“How sweet,” you grumble, biting down on your bottom lip. Without a warning, he leans in and pecks your lips gently. The alcohol in your veins surges through you as you lean back in and close the gap. Even in your heels, you still have to crane your neck some to fully reach his stature. His hands grip your waist tightly and you tug at his light brown locks, pulling him impossibly closer to you.
He presses himself into you a little bit harder and you can tell he wants you, his hands gripping one at your waist and the other one in your hair. Everything around you goes blank was it only feels like the two of you in the room together. Unfortunately, your moment is ruined when someone bumps into the two of you, knocking you apart. Namjoon steadies you and he glares at the two girls that ran into you.
“You want to get out of here?” Namjoon says into your ear, his breath fanning over your neck sending chills down you body.
“Yeah,” you nod a little too excitedly and he grabs your hand pulling you away from everyone. Namjoon is taking you up the stairs before someone calls out your name.
“Y/N!” You turn around in Namjoon’s grip to find Jennie holding onto the railing of the stairs, swaying back and forth drunkenly.
“Oh god,” you mutter.
“Is she okay?” Namjoon asks as he follows behind you back down the stairs. No, in fact, she looks terrible.
“Jennie, what’s up? I thought you were with Suzy?” You ask her and her face scowls.
“I was, but then… he showed up,” Jennie says, knowing exactly who she is talking about, “And he brought another girl with him! Y/N, what’s wrong with me? Am I not good enough for him?” Jennie is rambling as tears began to flow down her face. You look at Namjoon as he assesses the situation.
“I-I can get an Uber for her, if you’d like?” Namjoon offers and you nod.
“Please?” You beg and Namjoon grabs your hand squeezing it reassuringly before walking away to get the car.
“Jennie, come on, snap out of it,” you tell her and she continues to sob in your arms.
“Y/N, I don’t get it, I love him and he says he loves me but he does this shit all of the time,” she rambles.
“I know, I know,” you try to calm her down, “Jennie your drunk right now, but you’re so much better than him. I know you don’t realize it, but you are—“
“He makes me feel like shit,” Jennie sighs and you cradle your friend. Unfortunately, Jennie doesn’t have the best taste in men and she finds herself stuck in toxic situations she can’t get out of. You wish you could help more then you do but when Jennie is drunk, it’s hard to get anything through to her.
“Come on, let’s go to the bathroom,” you pull her up before she starts fighting you.
“I don’t need to use the bathroom though,” she pouts.
“Well, you might, let’s go,” you manage to hold her up and get to a bathroom in a hallway that isn’t too crowded. You reach for the handle only to be disappointed that it’s locked. Great.
You beat on the door with your free hand, “Hurry up in there! I have a crisis hanging off of my arm!”
“Hey, don’t call me that you bitch,” Jennie frowns and you roll your eyes, knowing she won’t remember any of this in the morning. You beat on the door again and again and again and finally, someone unlocks it and opens it fully.
The sight makes your eyes widen and your body heat up on fire. In front of you stands Jungkook against the counter zipping up his pants and the girl he was with earlier standing from her knees, wiping her mouth with a smirk. She leaves the bathroom, leaving you standing there with Jennie alone. When his eyes meet yours, his face goes ghostly pale. His mouth parts open and he feels like crawling into a hole to die.
“Y/N, Jennie?” Is all that comes from his mouth.
“Move Jungkook,” you say sternly and he moves to make room for you two in the bathroom.
“Uh, do you need any—“
“Leave Jungkook, I don’t need any help,” you say frustrated at the sight you just witnessed. You don’t know why you felt angry at him. You knew that he slept around like most fraternity boys—but to see him after getting sucked off in a bathroom—was new territory. Not only did it bring up the memory of you and him back in Taehyung’s bathroom all those years ago, it made you physically sick to know that you were just a pawn for him then. Who are you trying to kid? You were nothing to him. Once he figured out what his dick was used for, that’s all he cared about. Christ, you say to yourself, fuck him.
Jungkook leaves the two of you alone and within seconds, Jennie is over the toilet hurling her entire stomach up. You hold her hair back as she heaves into the toilet, trying not to gag yourself.
“Y/N,” she mumbles, “I don’t feel good.”
“I know, just keep it in the toilet please,” you say looking away at the sight.
Thankfully, Namjoon appears at the door. “The Uber is here,” he announces.
“Come on, we’re going to get you home,” you tell her, wiping her mouth with some toilet paper.
“Home?” She asks, “Thank god.”
Namjoon grabs her other side as the two of you carry her outside into the fresh air. You have to admit, the fresh air as sobered you up slightly. You spot the car waiting up front and Namjoon opens the door for Jennie.
“Thank you so much,” you tell Namjoon as he helps Jennie into the car.
“It’s seriously not a problem,” he smiles, “You should go with her,” he suggests and you feel your heart drop.
“A-are you sure?” You ask, subtle disappointment in your tone.
“Yeah, it’s fine—we’ll pick up another time,” he gives you a wink and you smile back.
“Okay, thanks again.”
You load into the back of the Uber with Jennie and you just pray that she doesn’t hurl in the car, for the sake of you and the Uber driver’s car. You were not about to pay the $200 fee for puke in the backseat. 
_____
The next morning comes all too quickly in your deep sleep. When you wake up, you are not expecting Jennie to be in your bed with you. You had nearly forgotten she refused to sleep in her own bed last night, therefore you having to give in to her wishes of sleeping with you. Thankfully, you don’t feel like you have too bad of a hangover. For Jennie though, you know she will probably be in bed all day with a bottle of Tylenol at her bedside.
You check your phone and your eyes nearly burst from your head. It’s 1:07 PM.
“Fuck,” you groan to yourself. You did not need to sleep this late considering you absolutely needed to study for your exams on Monday. Not only was it an exam—it was your midterm exams in your human sciences and financial analytics classes, two classes that were kicking your ass. The longer you laid in your bed, meant the longer you were losing time to cram in your studying. You swig the sheets and blankets off of you to find yourself still in your party dress from last night. You grab a pair of leggings and a sweatshirt from your wardrobe before heading to the bathroom.
Your appearance makes you shudder when you seeing yourself in the mirror. You didn’t even take off your makeup, mascara and lipstick stains spread out on your face. Now it was time to really pray that you wouldn’t breakout from the old layer of foundation on your face. You grab a makeup wipe to get the gunk off of yourself before you step into an insanely hot shower.
You manage to shower quickly, scrubbing your body and face off of any stench left of you from last night. You step out, moisturizing each crevice that you can reach before you throw on your clothes. You feel 200% better now that you have showered and you can hear footsteps coming down from the hallway. Jennie appears at the bathroom door rubbing her eyes harshly.
“Good morning sleepyhead,” you comment and she stretches out her limbs, her dress hiked up far up her legs where her underwear is showing.
“Ugh!” She groans loudly, “My head is pounding. What the fuck happened last night?”
“There’s some medicine out in the kitchen,” you say as you follow her out into your living room and kitchen area. She goes immediately to the medicine cabinet and downs two pills with ease.
“Where are you going?” She asks as you began to gather up your school work into your book-bag.
“I have to study,” you tell her and she closes her eyes again, the sun being too harsh for the light.
“It’s Saturday Y/N,” she says obviously.
“I know,” you zip up your bag, throwing it over your shoulder, “But I have two midterms Monday—I can’t make below a B or I can get in trouble with the dean,” you explain and she nods, her sleepy gaze staring at you.
“Well, have fun. I’ll be here—dying,” she grins and you salute her off, leaving your shared apartment to go to the campus library.
The library is only about a ten minute walk and thankfully, not many students are flocking to the location on a Saturday afternoon. You assume that everyone is either hungover like Jennie or just don’t give a shit enough to come out and study.
You grab a coffee from the small coffee shop outside the library before you go in, sit down, and get to work on your studying. You turn on your classical music radio as you take out out your printed slides, notes, and textbooks. As strange as it is to say, as much as you hated studying—it’s where you felt the most comfortable. You knew you were smart and you knew school was your strongest trait—everyone knew that about you.
You go through each chapter of your human sciences class, writing and rewriting notes on new sheets of a paper. You make flashcards as you go along. You answer the obnoxiously long quiz questions at the end of your textbook as you go along. 
Thankfully, you haven’t had any distractions and before you know it, it’s been nearly two hours since you first sat down. Your coffee is now cold but you don’t care as you need the caffeine to keep you going. You are about to pull out all of your analytics material before suddenly, a coffee cup in placed on the table in front of you. You look at the source and look back down until you look up again. 
“Jungkook?” You ask pulling out one of your earbuds. His face is tired, the bags underneath his eyes prominent. He’s wearing a gray tracksuit, his hair messy underneath his somewhat contained beanie.
“H-hi,” he says simply, “Can I sit?” He asks referring to the chair across from you. You nod as he slings his backpack off and into the floor as he plops down in the chair.
“Hi,” you speak lowly. There’s tension between the two of you. It’s uncomfortable. You hate it, almost as much as you hate the sight you saw last night. “What’s up?” The question is simple, but forced.
He shrugs, “I dragged myself out to study despite my busting headache,” he says scratching the back of his neck.
“Jungkook in the library? To study? Did I hear that right?” You ask and he laughs slightly.
“Yup, unfortunately you did,” he answers before letting out a sigh. “I uh, got you this,” he slides the coffee cup over to you and you furrow your brows. You face heats up. Why would he buy you a coffee? The time Jungkook bought you something was a card and flowers the evening of your high school graduation, why the hell would he buy you a coffee?
“Thanks,” you laugh awkwardly grabbing the cup from him. You take a sip from the cup and realize it’s exactly how you like it. Three creams, an espresso shot, and a dash of vanilla flavoring. “How’d you know this is what I like?” You ask.
“Uh, you told me a few years back,” he says shy, his gaze ripping away from you. “I assumed it was the same, thank god,” he laughs trying to lighten up the mood.
“Thanks,” you repeat, unsure of what to say.
“Uh, how’s Jennie this morning?” He asks you with a genuine concern. You look from him, not being able to hold his gaze without burning up.
“She’s fine,” you say, keeping your eyes on your notes and hands in front of you.
“That’s good,” he says awkwardly. His leg is bouncing uncontrollably underneath the table and he feels like he needs to throw up.
“Why did you buy me this?” You ask him. He wants something, you can feel it.
“Um, no reason, I-I just saw you h-here and I know how much you love coffee,” he stumbles over his words and you meet his gaze again, before giving him a glare.
“Hm,” you mumble.
“Listen Y/N,” he starts, sounding more clear of his words, “I know we don’t really have a relationship anymore but, I-I just wanted to apologize to you about… the bathroom… last night,” he sighs and he hangs his head down for a second.
Your expression is blank and you shrug your shoulders with a small head shake, “Don’t worry about it.”
He nods slowly before a silence falls between you two.
“Listen, um I really have to get back to studying for my midterm tomorrow. Thank you again for the coffee,” you say with a small smile, trying your best to be cordial with him.
He nods getting ready to stand up but he stops abruptly, “What are you doing this week?”
The question catches you off guard.
“Oh, um,” your mouth is dry and it’s hard to find the words, “Probably studying, working, I don’t know,” you shrug again.
“Well uh, I was wondering if you wanted to meet up?” He bits his lip nervously, “We haven’t hung out in awhile, I thought maybe we could catch up?”
Awhile would be an understatement. The boy and you exchange another glance before you begin to nod hesitantly.
“Sure,” you answer simply.
“Cool,” he responds, “You still have the same number?” He asks. The question is weird. How is it that your best friend of so many years has to ask if your number is the same?
“Yeah,” you nod. He nods too, saying a quick goodbye before you watch as his built frame disappears into another corridor of the library, your eyes lingering a little too long on his built frame. What the hell was that?
_____
On Monday, both of your exams go a lot better than you were expecting them to. Your human sciences exam had already been graded and you made a 94 which in turn meant you were over the moon. Now you could only hope for that in analytics.
You know sat across from Jennie at one of your campus’s sandwich shops eating a late lunch.
“I don’t even know why you stress so much about your grades Y/N,” Jennie says, “You always end up with an A.”
“Jennie, I worry because if I don’t get A’s I can get kicked out of the honors program, you know this,” you say with pointed eyes, “Besides, I made a B in that business statistics class I had my freshman year, I’m still pissed about that!”
“Boohoo, I got a C minus in that class,” Jennie rolls her eyes, “All I’m saying is, you just need to loosen up. I know school is stressful but I know that you have to be going crazy.”
“I am going crazy Jennie,” you whine, “I’m just glad we don’t have much longer,” you sigh heavily.
“You and me both,” she adds, “I’m sorry I interrupted your stress relief the other night,” she says.
“What?”
She laughs, “You almost got dicked down by Namjoon and I ruined it,” she pouts and you giggle at her.
“It’s fine,” you shake your head, “He said we could pick it up another time.”
“Good, his fine piece of ass is something you gotta keep,” she smirks. Suddenly, your phone makes a ding on the table and you grab it quickly. Your eyes widen slightly when you see the text message.
[3:32 PM Jeon Jungkook] hey do you still want to do something this week?
“Who is that?” Jennie asks you.
“Uh, nobody,” you shake your head putting the phone back down.
“It most definitely is not nobody—your eyes are huge,” she points out. Dammit.
“Um,” you start, “Well last week at work, Jungkook, Taehyung, and their friend Hobi came in later at night,” you tell her, “And it was awkward and then I saw Jungkook at the party on Saturday.”
“We see him all the time at the parties we go,” she shrugs.
“I know, but then he came up to me in the library the other day…and bought me a coffee,” you finish.
Jennie’s eyes widen. “What?”
“I know right,” you say.
“Wonder what he wants from you?” She purses her lips.
“He asked if he wanted to go out this week,” you shrug, “He said we haven’t in awhile and he wanted to ‘catch up’,” you say.
Jennie’s eyebrows furrow. “Hm,” she mumbles, “Well are you going to?”
“I don’t know,” you tell her honestly, “I think I’ve seen enough of him to last me awhile.”
Jennie grimaces at you, “Come on Y/N,” she says, “You and Jungkook used to be inseparable, I don’t even know what the fuck happened to you two.”
“We just grew apart Jennie,” you tell her.
“Friendships like you and Jungkook don’t just ‘grow apart’,” she uses air quotes.
“Believe what you want,” you mutter, picking at your food suddenly not feeling too hungry.
“Why wouldn’t you go? There’s nothing stopping you is there?” She presses.
“Not exactly, but… I don’t know if it’s a good idea,” you mumble.
“Y/N, he’s your oldest friend,” she says, “You’ve known him longer than anyone else here, I know that you miss him as your friend,” she goes on.
“I don’t know Jennie, we’re not the same people we used to be. We’re not compatible as friends anymore, it’s weird.”
“How can it already be weirder than it is now? It’s weird as fuck that you two grew up together and don’t speak to each other anymore. I’d say go, just hangout, who knows what might happen,” she reasons and you cannot help but agree with her.
You don’t say anything else as you pull your phone back out.
[3:38 PM Me] Yeah I’m free tonight if you want to do something!
_____
Jungkook picks you up at seven on the dot. You feel nervousness settling in your stomach and you suddenly care about your appearance. When you open the door of your apartment and welcome him in, you have to tell yourself to keep your mouth closed.
He’s dressed in a sweatshirt and ripped jeans but he looks…so good? You hope you aren’t overdressed in your dress and denim jacket and he smiles when he meets your gaze.
“Hey,” he greets you and you welcome him into your apartment—a place he has never been.
“Hi,” you say grabbing your keys from the kitchen. “Jennie!” You shout and she emerges from the laundry room
“Yeah?” She stops dead in her tracks when she sees Jungkook. “Oh, hey Jungkook.”
“Hi,” he smiles.
“I’ll be back later,” you tell her, “What are you doing tonight?”
“I have to write a report and I guess I’m going to do your laundry since you’re lazier than shit,” she presses. You throw up your middle finger and turn to Jungkook.
“You ready?”
“Yeah, let’s go.”
_____
“Where are we going?” You ask him as you make your way outside, keeping a relative distance between you and him.
“You hungry?” Jungkook proposes, almost with a playful tone.
“Mhm,” you mumble, looking down at the ground as you walk. This was weird… so fucking weird. The last time you and Jungkook had hung out was around two and a half years ago—not even shitting. You wonder if he still liked the same things, had the same hobbies, ate the same food, but you were completely unsure of yourself in this circumstance. The nervousness hasn’t settled in your stomach and your mind wonders if he’s nervous too.
“Alright, c’mon,” he says and you meet his gaze before he changes direction with you in tow.
It’s not even a five minute walk—mind you, in silence—until we reach the place Jungkook had led you to.
“Really Jungkook?” You raise an eyebrow at him as you step into your all too familiar work place.
“What?” He laughs, “The food is good,” he continues.
“I’m starting to think you brought me here for my employee discount,” you press to him and he tilts his head.
“You have an employee discount?” He repeats, “Good to know,” he chuckles and in turn, you return a small laugh, feeling a little more comfortable.
Mark isn’t working tonight, but unfortunately, a girl named Kyla is and you absolutely despise her. Her biggest personality trait is just being a bitch—a bitch for no reason! Sure, you can have your bitchy moments but you’re not going to be a bitch to someone unless they deserve it.
“Y/N… Jungkook,” Kyla says slowly, looking between the two of you. “Just sit wherever you like,” she says. The restaurant is free real estate as you two are the only ones here.
You choose a booth, sliding in on one side, Jungkook on the other.
“Do you know her?” You ask Jungkook once she walks away from your table.
Jungkook looks pale, ��I’ve met her, once or twice,” he says and it’s all the confirmation you need to understand that means he’s fucked her once or twice.
You don’t say anything else as you look through the menu, already knowing exactly what you want.
“When did you start working here?” Jungkook asks you.
“Oh, about a month ago,” you say. He already knows that. I guess you and Jungkook are really too that point, huh? Small, dull, repetitive conversation?
“How did your exams go?” He asks, chewing on his bottom lip. He’s nervous—you can sense it.
“Better than I thought,” you answer honestly.
“Hm, let me guess—you thought you did terrible but ended up getting an A,” he reads you perfectly.
“Hey! I don’t think like that,” you say even thought you know that is a fat lie.
“Come on Y/N, you’ve been that way since we were fourteen. Lying sends you to hell you know,” he raises an eyebrow at you and you look away from him to suppress your laugh.
“Fine. I got a 94 on one of them, I don’t know about the other one yet,” you tell him.
“See, you’re a genius,” he says and you shake your head.
“Most definitely not,” you say.
“I was always so envious of you growing up, you just sat there in school and you just… got it,” he says remembering back to your younger days, “All of us were jealous of you,” he adds.
“I can guarantee nobody was jealous of me Jungkook,” you give him a grimace, “We all were stupid in our own ways, maybe you more than anyone else,” you decide to pick on him since you’re feeling more relaxed as the conversation keeps going.
“Hey, no need to shit on me like that,” he gives you a pout.
Your phone suddenly vibrates against the table. It’s probably Jennie, you think to yourself as you flip the phone over. To your surprise, it’s not Jennie—It’s Namjoon.
[7:28 PM Kim Namjoon] hope you had a good day
[7:29 PM Kim Namjoon] mine would be a lot better if you were sitting on my cock right now
Your eyes widen and you flip the phone back over with a slam to the table. Jungkook looks at you curiously.
“Whose that?” He asks.
You want to lie, but Jungkook can tell when you’re lying. “Just Namjoon,” you tell him, “He was asking about some homework.”
Jungkook nods slowly before chewing on his bottom lip again, “You and hyung are good friends?”
Your face drops and you don’t say anything.
“I’m just asking since I’ve seen you guys together at our parties,” he adds while clearing his throat.
“Yeah, we’re friends,” is all that comes from your mouth. Jungkook’s eyes are hard to read but you can tell he knows you’re not saying what you’re actually thinking. What he wants you to do is be honest with him and tell him that yeah, you and Namjoon fuck from time to time, but of course, he doesn’t get that answer.
About twenty minutes later, Kyla is bringing your food.Your stomach growls as the scent of the food comes into your nostrils. The two of you begin eating, keeping some small talk between the two of you.
“Are you still a business major?” You ask him as you chow down on your French fries loaded with ketchup.
Jungkook scrunches his face up, “Hell no,” he shakes his head.
You stop your chewing momentarily, “Oh,” is all you can muster. “I’m sure that went over well with your father.”
Jungkook gives you a short glance, a smirk across his face, “It went as well as you can imagine.”
Growing up, Jungkook was expected to go to college, get a business degree of some kind and him and his older brother were to takeover his father’s company by the time he was 30—you would know, Jungkook would secretly complain to you about nonstop as teenagers.
“What are majoring in now?”
“Photography and film,” he answers boldly.
“Oh, wow,” you tell him, “That’s a big move.”
“I’d rather die than being forced to do something I don’t want to do, that’s no way to live life,” he munches on his burger, his eyes looking straight into yours.
“How’s Taehyung?” You ask him.
“He’s good,” he laughs a little bit, “Would you believe it if I told you he has a girlfriend?” He cocks his head slightly.
“Taehyung? And a girlfriend?” You say in disbelief. “You’re kidding, right?”
“Nope,” he chuckles, “It’s weird though, he won’t introduce me to her, hell he won’t even tell me her name.”
You furrow your eyebrows, “That is weird,” you pause, “Maybe he thinks you’ll steal her,” you smirk jokingly. 
Jungkook shakes his head, “Taehyung’s got more game than I do, trust me,” he says with a laugh. 
“I’m assuming you don’t have a girlfriend?” You ask him nervously, biting down on your bottom lip.
Jungkook stops eating and rolls his tongue on the inside of his cheek, “No, I haven’t dated anyone since Yuna really.”
The confession surprises you and you somewhat don’t believe him.
“Why not?” You press.
He shrugs, “Just haven’t found anyone I like I guess, like, really like, you know?”
You nod understandingly. Before Namjoon (whom you aren’t even dating) you had dated this guy for awhile and he was nice but you were bored as fuck in that relationship. Thankfully, you moved on from that onto better things.
Once the two of you finish your meals, Jungkook pays before you can protest and you leave the restaurant around 8:30 PM. You shove your hands into your jacket and walk along beside of Jungkook, lazily kicking rocks when you come across them.
“So, what did I do to deserve a free meal and a coffee from Jeon Jungkook in the span of two days?” You look up at him and he glances down to you quickly.
“I said I wanted to catch up, how else was I supposed to do that?” He smirks and you hit his arm playfully.
You don’t say anything so he continues.
“I don’t know, it’s just when I saw you last week working, I hadn’t seen you in so long… let alone speak to you,” he pauses, “It made me realize that I miss our friendship, I missed us…” he trails off, looking straight ahead.
“Why didn’t you reach out sooner?” You ask him seriously.
Jungkook hesitates some, “You could have reached out too, the phone works both ways” his words are unexpected, harsh. And they somewhat hurt.
You don’t say anything again, feeling a sting in your chest.
“I didn’t mean it like that Y/N,” Jungkook say, stopping his path to stand in front of you, “It’s just… we haven’t spoken in so long. I feel like you’re a completely different person ever since we got here to university. I don’t know what happened—“
“You don’t know what happened?” Your tone is sharp. “Are you stupid Jungkook?”
He looks taken aback, “W-what?”
“When we were eighteen and you fucking kissed me that’s what happened and that’s when shit changed Jungkook, don’t act like you don’t know,” you sound angry to which, you are. Talking about this gets you riled up.
Jungkook lowers his head, “We should have talked about that, I know but—“
“But what Jungkook? It ruined our friendship and you know it.”
“I ruined it?” He now sounds pissed off. “What ruined our friendship was you acting like I didn’t exist once we got here to college. You blew me off and blew me off time and time again,” he runs a hand through his hair, “I tried to maintain this friendship and you know it. If that stupid, fucking, drunken kiss bothered you that bad, you should have been a big girl and told me.”
You feel frustrated and you feel tears are threatening to spill out of you. You want to comeback with something, but you know he’s right. He did try and you were the one to put distance between you both.
“I-I,” you start but no words come out. “I’m sorry Jungkook. It’s just when we got here, things got more complicated and more stressful, and I couldn’t afford distractions—“
“So I’m a distraction now?”
“What? No, no, I didn’t mean it like that,” you shake your head in protest.
“So, hanging out at fraternity houses every weekend, getting hammered with Jennie every weekend, smoking pot once in awhile, and fucking Namjoon isn’t a distraction? But your best friend of fourteen years is a distraction?” Jungkook’s words come out in a frenzy and you feel slightly attacked.
“Excuse me what? Jungkook no—“ you stop yourself from speaking. You know he’s right but that doesn’t give him a right to attack you like that. “So, what’s your excuse then for not being the bigger person than, huh? Getting sucked off too many times in a bathroom and you realized you don’t need my attention anymore? Huh?”
Jungkook’s eyes darken and you can tell he’s pissed off.
“Are you fucking kidding me?” He asks you.
“Jungkook, you’re my oldest friend—“
“You don’t treat me like it—“
“Well neither do you,” you back go back and forth with each other. You’re frustrated. Angry. Sad.
Jungkook is fighting a battle in his head. “I’m sorry okay,” he says, “I think we both can admit we’ve acted shitty to each other.”
You look away from him staring aimlessly at your lap, “I’m sorry too, I shouldn’t have said that.”
“Neither should have I,” he says. “I just wish you had told me about that stupid kiss, we could have talked through it Y/N. I wasn’t thinking back then.”
“Why did you kiss me?”
Jungkook’s eyes look panicked and he scratches the back of his neck.
“I had a stupid little crush on you at the time okay? And alcohol doesn’t help, it only intensified my feelings.”
“What?” Your mouth drops agape at the confession.
“I know, stupid right,” he shakes his head, “Fuck I wished we had discussed this sooner because this is so embarrassing,” he laughs while shaking his head.
You’re in disbelief. Jungkook liked you? How did you not know? It makes your insides tingle at the thought, but you know you shouldn’t get excited so you drown out the feeling deep within you. 
“Well, that was years ago,” you tell him, “All we can do now is look ahead,” your breath is uneven and shaky.
“You’re right,” he mutters, “I really am sorry Y/N, I-I just want you as a friend again—“
“I forgive you Jungkook. And I’m sorry too.”
What Jungkook does next is unexpected but all too familiar. He grabs your chin and squeezes it in his hand. You swat him away with a laugh as he pulls you in by an arm. You oblige his movements and rest your head on his shoulder as the two of you keep walking. There’s something oddly intimate about this gesture. And the whole atmosphere has changed but you like it—it feels… like home.
“Can I ask you something?” You mumble.
“You just did,” he laughs and his chest rumbles underneath you.
“Shut the fuck up,” you lean up from him with a smile, “Namjoon said you talk about me a lot…?” You trail off your question. You could be sneaky if you really wanted to be.
“He did?” Jungkook panics. Fucking Namjoon, he thinks to himself. “W-what did he say?” He stumbles on his words.
“Just stuff,” you respond hesitantly, “He may or may not have said that you called me hot.” Jungkook freezes beside of you.
“Fucking hell, I’m gonna kill hyung,” he mutters underneath his breath, “Look I’m sorry okay—I was really drunk and I saw you at one of our parties in this short ass dress and fuck, yeah I said you were hot—I’m sorry okay? I know that’s so fucking weird jeez, I’m sorry—“
“Jungkook it’s fine,” you laugh interrupting his rambling. “It’s not weird, I just wanted to know whether or not Namjoon was feeding me shit.”
“You don’t think it’s weird?” He asks and you can sense that he is very embarrassed. “I told you, I’m not good with my alcohol.”
You shake your head, “I mean, you’re pretty hot too if I say so myself,” the words tumble from your mouth and you actually want to crawl in a hole and die. Did you just say that?! Jungkook looks at you as you turn your face away from him. Fuck, he thinks to himself. He glances down your body and notices the cleavage coming through your dress and the way you hair is pulled to one side. Fuck, he thinks again, yeah, stupid little crush three years ago my ass.
“Can I tell you something?” His voice his quiet, serious.
“Of course,” you look up at him with a concern face.
“You can’t tell anyone—not even Jennie,” he says, his voice low. You give him a confused look, but nod anyways.
“What’s wrong?” You ask him. He bits at his lip, feeling uneasy.
He takes in a deep breath before exhaling, “When I changed my major a few months back, my parents threatened to cut me off—“
“Whoa, what?”
“And they’re still threatening to if I don’t get my shit straight.”
“Jungkook, I don’t get what you’re saying? Have you done something?” You ask him, feeling already too uneasy about where this conversation is going.
“No, I haven’t done anything—that’s the problem. I haven’t proved to them that I’m worthy for them to keep paying for my school. I haven’t proved to them that I can get a job somewhere. My grades aren’t proving anything to them.”
“What are you gonna do if they cut you off? You can’t pay for this shit-hole by yourself—they know that.” You notice the way his jaw is grinding and his breathing is shaking.
“Please don’t get mad at me,” he mumbles quietly. Oh god. “Recently I started taking up, um… boxing,” he says, unsure of his words.
“…Okay?” You say slowly.
“I’ve been fighting, like underground fighting,” you almost don’t hear him, but then you do, and you want to laugh in his face—but he’s being serious.
“Fighting? Jungkook what the fuck?!” You push yourself away from the comfort of his side, “Are you crazy?!”
“I’m getting paid for the fights—if I win at least,” he tries to sound reasonable but to you, you want to scream at him in anger.
“Jungkook, are you fucking kidding me? You’re fighting? Instead of finding a real job?”
“Y/N you don’t understand—I make thousands of dollars for one fight—it’s my best chance right now.”
“You’ve got to be fucking kidding me,” you shake your head, pulling your hands through your hair in frustration, you cannot believe this man right now.
“What are you going to do about school then? Huh?” You press him.
“I-I was hoping you would help me, at least try to tutor me,” he says hesitantly and your stomach drops. You don’t say anything for a moment, unsure if you want to scream or cry at him.
“So this is the reason why you wanted to rekindle our friendship, so I could be your fucking tutor?”
“What no—“
“Are you fucking kidding me Jungkook? I cannot believe you right now,” your voice is getting louder by the minute. You start to walk away from him back to your apartment by yourself, unable to even look at him right now.
“Wait—no, please Y/N,” Jungkook runs to you, grabbing your hand and pulls you back to him, “I know this is all bad timing but I really did miss having you as a friend and you’re the only person, I could tell this to, at least for now,” he quickly explains.
“What, so you want me to help you through school while you get the shit knocked out of you for money?” You ask him, “Jungkook I don’t want to see you go through that, you have to find another option,” your eyes are pleading with him. His grip moves from your hand to your waist which causes your heart to race irregularly.
“Y/N, please I know it’s not the best but it really is my best option. I need someone there for me and I need that person to be you,” his face is too close for comfort and you back away from him a few inches.
“Jungkook, I don’t know,” you shake your head.
“Please, Y/N, I’m begging you,” he says again.
“Have you told anyone?” You ask him.
“Aside from you, only Taehyung knows—and Yoongi, he was the one to introduce me to it.” Yoongi—a name you’re not familiar with.
“Fucking hell Jungkook,” you lean your head back, trying to contain your emotions.
“Please you can’t tell anyone Y/N, I can get in serious trouble by obtaining money this way.”
“Yeah because it’s fucking illegal,” you spit at him. You find his hand to grip a little too tightly and you want to scream at Jungkook. How could he be so stupid? And how were you going to let him be so stupid?
“I’ll help you with school Jungkook, but the fighting… I don’t know,” you tell him, “You know I’m not going to be okay with that.”
“If you makes you feel any better, I haven’t lost. The most I’ve walked away with is a few scraps and bruises on my arms,” he tries to lighten up your mood but it doesn’t work. “I promise I won’t get hurt, I know what I’m doing,” he nudges you trying to loosen you up some. He hands end up grabbing yours, intertwining them tightly.
“Don’t make me promises you can’t keep Jungkook,” you tell him and his face falls again. Both of you look at your intertwined hands. “At least promise me you’ll be careful,” you plead him.
“Of course. I promise,” he says giving your hand a squeeze. Without warning, he pulls you into a tight embrace, his arms wrapping around your waist tightly. Your hands snake up against his neck and pull him close to you as well.
His scent is all too familiar and it scares you that you’ve missed out on him growing into the handsome adult he is now. And now, you have to fear for his wellbeing. Fuck. Jungkook pulls away from you and your faces meet a little too close for comfort. His nose brushes against yours, his eyes burning holes into you.
“I’d trust you with my life Y/N,” he speaks again, “And I’m trusting you with this.”
Your breath hitches as his nose brushes yours again. Fuck, you think to yourself. You bite your lip, knowing that you wold absolutely die for this boy and it takes all of you to grip his shirt and push him away from you. You feel less suffocated once your space is empty and Jungkook’s hand stays in yours as he walks you home. It’s a good thing, you think, that you’ve had a stupid little crush on him too or you would most definitely not do this shit for him.
_____
“So,” Jennie says slowly, “How was it?”
You hadn’t even walked into your apartment five feet before Jennie is rushing questions onto you.
“Um,” you pause, taking the time to take off your shoes, “It went... well,” you say, unsure of your words. Did it go well? You weren’t sure considering the two of you were in an argument nearly the whole way home.
“Well?” Jennie asks, curiosity dripping in her tone, “I need more details than that. What’d you do? What did you guys talk about?”
“Um, we just kind of caught up on things,” you knew you had to tread your words lightly. “It felt pretty normal.” You add at the last second, giving her a weak smile. She narrows her eyes at you.
“That’s it?” She somewhat frowned.
“What did you want me to say?” You give her a laugh as you begin to walk back towards your room and undress into your sleepwear. She follows your footsteps closely.
“I don’t know! I was just expecting more, more from you! You seem awfully quiet,” she says plopping down on your bed that she is oh-so accustomed to.
You look through your drawers and pull out a big t-shirt and slip it over your head. You turn to Jennie and give her another pathetic attempt of a smile.
“It’s just weird okay,” you tell her, climbing onto your bed with her, “This was the first time we’ve actually hung out by ourselves in years and I don’t know, it was good, like we picked up where we left off you know?” You knew that was a complete lie but you needed to get Jennie off your case or you were afraid you would let your worries slip.
She lets out a sigh, “I guess so. I do think about high school sometimes and we really had it good… the four of us,” she smiles fondly thinking back to simpler times.
“Yeah… we did,” you agree staring up at your ceiling.
“How’s Taehyung by the way? Did Jungkook mention him?”
You give a glance at Jennie and she’s looking at her overgrown nails. “He’s good, Jungkook said he had a girlfriend which surprised me.”
“Hm,” Jennie shrugged, “Interesting.”
You furrowed your eyebrows while looking at her. “Interesting?” You found her answer odd but she brushes it off.
“Yeah, well I have homework to do that isn’t gonna do itself unfortunately,” she stands up from your bed, “See you in the morning, goodnight.” She throws you a quick wink before she leaves, shutting your bedroom door behind of her.
You let out a sigh of relief when she leaves. As happy as you were that you and Jungkook reconnected some tonight, the uneasiness in the pit of your stomach was keeping you from focusing on the good. You couldn’t believe what Jungkook had gotten himself into. Boxing? For money? You knew Jungkook never had much common sense but this takes it to another level. You now knew one of his deepest secrets and not only could that seriously backfire on you if something went wrong. He said he trusted you with his fucking life for Christ’s sake. Who says that to someone they’ve barely spoken to in two years? Someone who is desperate, you think.
You grab a book from your nightstand for one of your classes and flip to your last read page, trying to rid your mind of Jungkook getting the shit beat out of him. And as much as you read your book and your eyelids fall sleepy, you manage to barely sleep that night, as images of your old friend are burned into your brain.
_____
It wasn’t long after your first meetup with Jungkook that he started asking for tutoring help. Jungkook knew your schedule was busy and he didn’t want to pressure you into anything, but the more you were around Jungkook, the more desperate you were to help him. You have known him for so long and despite all your differences, he truly was and will always be one of your best friends. And best friends helped each other. Right?
“Hey—sorry I’m late,” you meet Jungkook in the back of the fourth floor of the library after your last class of the day. “I had a question about my lecture—“
“Y/N it’s fine,” Jungkook says softly, not looking up from his paper, “Don’t worry about it.”
You set down beside of him and begin to take your belongings out of your backpack and you notice Jungkook has already begun some work himself.
“How was classes today?” You ask him opening up your laptop. You give him a glance and he’s focused on the problem in front of him.
“It was alright, I slept through my first one at ten—“
“What’s that?” You ask as you let your eyes focus a little too close on his face. A cut lined across his jaw and up towards his left ear and you felt yourself begin to panic.  “Jungkook what—“
“Don’t worry about it,” he’s being cold and distant and you don’t like it. You look down his arms and onto his hands and notice some cuts and bruises there too. That’s when it hits you.
“Jungkook did you have a fight recently?” You keep your voice low so no one else could hear. He visibly tenses up beside of you and he adjusts his beanie on his to try and cover his ear area.
“Yeah,” he says simply, his eyes not looking at you one time, still focusing on the paper ahead.
“Jungkook,” your tone is deep and not happy, but you suppose there isn’t much you can do in this situation. Curiosity got the best of you and you ask, “What happened?”
“Let’s not talk about that okay?” He turns to you fully and you inwardly gasp, seeing that his right eye is half blacked behind his glasses. You feel sick to your stomach and your mouth parts. Again, you don’t say anything and just give him a nod.
The rest of the tutoring session with him goes smoothly and Jungkook has significantly picked up his understanding of his classes in a short amount of time, but in the back of your mind you wanted to scream. Scream at him. How could he be doing this to himself? He first told you he was fine. He sure doesn’t look fine. It’s getting close to 7 o’clock when you tell him you have to go get ready for your shift at the diner in an hour.
“We can pick up again whenever you need to,” you tell, “And text me if you have any questions.”
“What are you doing this weekend?” Jungkook completely ignores your sentences and you turn to him, trying not to stare at the faint of blue under his eye.
“Um, I have another shift tomorrow that starts at 7,” you tell him.
“Can you get off?” He asks almost nervously as the two of you begin to leave the library.
You chuckle, “Probably not, why?”
“Well, Taehyung and I are having a small get together at our apartment and I wanted to know if you and Jennie wanted to come?”
He sounds genuine and you know it could be fun and a little different from the chaotic frat scene that you’re used to.
“Sure, I’m sure Jennie will be down,” you give him a smile to which he returns one for the first time tonight. “If I can’t get off work I’ll just come after my shift.”
“Sounds good,” he says and you are about to part ways before he grabs your arm to stop you, “Thanks again Y/N, for helping me out,” there’s a glimmer in his eyes.
“No problem, it’s what a friend would do right?” You give him your best smile although it feels weird saying that. His face drops in the slightest way.
“Yeah…” he trails off, his hand trailing down your arm before letting go, “See you soon?”
You give him a nod, “See you soon.”
_____
Your shift at the diner tonight was being particularly slow for a Tuesday and you found yourself aimlessly making lattes for yourself every thirty minutes. You were slightly jacked from the caffeine but you knew you would need it once you went home to finish off the load of your homework for the night. Bedtime as of right now was looking to be 3 AM, possibly 4. Mark is once again working with you tonight which makes it all the more bearable, but the more you stand behind the counter, sipping your coffee, the more you realize you do not want to waste tomorrow night working.
“Hey, Mark,” you say and he looks up from his book.
“What’s up?” He asks, his eyes focussing on you.
“Would you care…. to possibly… take my shifts this weekend?” You ask slowly, dancing around the topic. His eyebrows furrow and you could tell that is not what he wanted to hear from you.
“I mean… I don’t care to, but can I ask why?”
Shit. You couldn’t say it was to go to a small party. That would be an automatic no.
“Well, I’ve been tutoring someone recently and it's taken away from my own study time, so I really need all weekend to catch up on all my shit,” you say smoothly. Not a complete lie, but he didn’t need to know you would be catching up on your “shit” tonight and not this weekend.
“Yeah, sure whatever,” he waves his hand off, “Just be sure to tell our manager before you leave.”
“Right… thanks Mark.”
“That means you owe me a shift in the future,” he says pointedly.
“Yeah, yeah, read your fucking book.”
_____
Friday was a blur. You went to sleep around 3:45 AM. Had to wake up at 7 AM for your 8 AM lecture, dragged your feet to your other classes, barely had time to eat anything, only consuming coffee to suppress your appetite in the afternoon, and now that you were home you couldn’t wait to lay in your bed for a few hours.
Jennie didn’t have classes on Friday’s—fuck her—so she had been chilling all day when you burst through the door exhausted.
“You look horrible,” she said as soon as you flopped down on the couch beside of her.
“You don’t have to tell me that,” you groan covering your eyes.
“Well you better get rested up before tonight,” she says.
“What’s tonight?” You mumble, nearly drifting off to sleep right then and there.
“Jungkook invited us to his apartment, that’s what you said last night,” she gave you a funny look before shaking her head.
Shit. You had forgotten about that throughout your drowsy state all day.
“Yeah, right,” you pause, looking at her through the crack of your arm, “Wake me up at 7 to get ready.” You stand up planning on taking the fattest nap of your life.
“I-I captain!” Jennie says sarcastically and it’s the last thing you hear before passing out on your bed, not even bothering to put a blanket over you.
_____
Jungkook and Taehyung’s apartment isn’t far from yours. You wouldn’t say the exterior is nicer than yours, but the abundance of buildings shows that their community is much larger than the one you and Jennie share.
“This is right?” Jennie asks as you knock on the door heavily.
“Yeah,” you say, faintly hearing music from the other side of the door.
The door swings open and to your surprise, it’s Taehyung.
“Jennie, Y/N!” He smiles widely at the two of you before ushering you in. “It’s been wayyyy too long! You guys want a drink?”
You take a second to look around their apartment, not seeing Jungkook anywhere. There’s about two dozen people here, some playing pong, others sitting around the living area. You knew Taehyung was feeling a little drunk despite it being only 9 from the way he grabs a couple cups, the entire tower of them falling over.
“How have you guys been?!” Taehyung pours some cheap tequila into your red solo cups and hands them over.
“Good, what about you?” Jennie smiles to him and Taehyung pours another shot for himself.
“Fucking great,” he says before putting his cup out. The three of you bump cups and down the tequila, a familiar burn hitting you instantly. It’s oddly reminiscent, the three of you drinking alcohol like there are no problems with the world.
“Where’s Jungkook?” You ask, giving another glance around the apartment, only recognizing some of his frat brothers, but him still not to be found.
“He went to get more alcohol and some other things,” Taehyung says, pouring another shot for the two of you. “I heard the two of you finally got over your bullshit?”
You furrow your eyebrows and Jennie laughs. “W-what?” You have to laugh too, “Bullshit?”
“You know, how the two of you acted like neither of you existed? God it was so annoying hearing that little bitch talk about you constantly,” he rolls his eyes dramatically and Jennie eyes you suspiciously.
“Uh, yeah—“ you were unsure of what to say, “Heard you have a girlfriend now?” You change the subject quickly and Jennie raises her eyebrows at Taehyung.
“Really?” Jennie says almost passively. Taehyung doesn’t glance at you, only looking to Jennie.
“Yeah,” he says, “C’mon, drink your shit. The night is young and you guys need to catch up!”
“Or you need to slow down?” You offer and only giggles again. You down another shot and at this pace, you’ll be passed out by 11, Jennie by 10. You’ve always handle your alcohol better than her, but a shot every two minutes will do anyone in.
The three of you talk aimlessly, somewhat of an unresolved tension between Jennie and Taehyung that is impossible to avoid until you get some more alcohol in you. You’re about four shots of Jose Cuervo in and sipping on some type of seltzer when your phone buzzes in your hand.
[9:46 PM Namjoon] hey, wrud tonight
[9:46 PM You] at a friend’s place tonight, wbu
Your eyes are having trouble to focus as the alcohol begins to settle in your system. You remember vividly how you barely had any food today and you know you should stop drinking otherwise you might puke everywhere.
[9:48 PM Namjoon] damn, missing you. I believe you still owe me a rain check
You laugh at your phone.
[9:48 PM You] soon, I promise lol
“Jungkook! Fuck yes my brother!”
You instantly look up from your phone and see Jungkook walking through the front door, a case of beer in one hand and a brown bag in the other. He smiles as he sets down the case and bag of liquor as his brothers crowd around him to grab a can.
Do you go up to him? Yes, are you, stupid? But shouldn’t he look for you? What are you twelve?
Your internal monologue is interrupted when Taehyung pulls you over to Jungkook with a small push.  
“Hey Y/N,” Jungkook smiles, grabbing a beer for himself. He’s wearing a hat to cover his forehead.
“Hi,” you smile and he gives you a small, somewhat awkward hug.
“Glad you could make it,” he says, the bruises on his face from the other day already looking a lot better.
“I was not going to spend my Friday night at the restaurant,” you laugh, trying intensely to focus on his face and not zone in and out as you tend to do drunkenly.
“Jennie here?” He asks.
“Yeah, she’s uh,” you pause, actually not knowing where she went. “Oh, she’s playing pong with Taehyung.”
“Come on then,” he reaches out his hand, “Let’s play with them.”
“Jungkook I’m terrible, you know that—“
“I never said you were good, but for old times sake?” His brown eyes bore into yours and you give in, nodding your head and settling your hand into his. His hands are warm—always have been. Slightly rough and calloused but smooth—what the fuck, stop it!
The four of you, girls verses boys, start a new game of pong and you’re sure Jennie is just as bad as you. That’s evident when Jungkook and Taehyung lob four in, one after another. You’re lucky you get one in their cups. Jennie, too drunk at this point, can’t even throw straight. The whole sight is very funny as the four of you laugh like you’re the only ones in the room.
“Come on Y/N!” Taehyung yells, “I knew you were ass but really?!”
“Me! What about her!” You defend yourself as Jennie throws a ball at Jungkook’s head.
“At least Y/N can aim!” Jungkook laughs, defending you as well, rubbing his head from the plastic impact.
The game ends with Jungkook calling island and you don’t even care at this point. Pong was and never will be your favorite. Flip cup was your speciality and even Taehyung knew that. You find yourself sitting with Jungkook on their couch, legs tucked underneath you, watching at Taehyung and Jennie take on another round of pong with Jackson—a fraternity brother—and his long time girlfriend—Mina, maybe?
“Are you even drunk right now?” You deadpan Jungkook with your eyes and he gives you a small smile.
“Nah,” he says, “You are though,” he says pointedly drinking from his beer.
“Hey—“ you point, “Only a little,” you whisper close to his ear and he laughs at you again. “You sir, need to drink.”
Jungkook shakes his head before standing up, your eyes following up his jeans to his t-shirt clad chest. Has he always looked like this? You grab onto his extended hand and he leads you away from everyone and your heart rate quickens. Where are you going? What’s he doing?
To your relief, he takes to the small outside balcony, sliding the door nearly closed as you step out. There’s two other people out here smoking cigarettes that greet you and Jungkook curiously. You have seen these boys before, but you know they don’t recognize you. They obviously think you’re some random girl Jungkook has invited but—if they only knew.
The fresh air feels nice, but you can feel a chill running down your spine and you watch Jungkook’s frame go to a dark corner of the balcony, bending down to pick something off the ground.
“What are you doing?” You ask him and he turns back to you and you send some interesting paraphernalia in his hands.
“Not in a drinking mood tonight,” he says, his eyes leaving yours before focusing on the small glass bowl in his hands. He starts to pack it and you’re watching his every move closely. You never knew Jungkook to be a stoner, but the way he packs it quickly and begins to light it, tells you otherwise. He inhales through the end of the bowl deeply, exhaling once, before quickly taking another hit.
“Goddamn,” you laugh and he starts to cough a little bit, a small laugh coming from him.
Jungkook begins to walk back to the corner before you grab his shirt to pull him back.
“You heard of sharing is caring?” You say and he shakes his head.
“No, you’re drunk, you don’t need—“
“I want too,” you say. You hadn’t smoked in awhile, but you knew you could trust Jungkook. “Come on, I’m fine.”
Jungkook hesitates a little before he holds out the bowl. You take it and hold is securely between your lips. He lights the underside and you inhale deeply. The balcony begins to smell like weed, but it doesn’t bother you, it never has. You exhale and give him a small smile. He puts the illegal substances away and stands beside of you on the balcony.
“Alright, that will be five dollars,” he says and you turn to him, your mouth agape.
“Five dollars a hit? Kiss my ass,” you say and you suddenly begin to feel the effects of the marijuana, which makes you giggle a little too long.
“How was your day?” Jungkook asks you and you nearly feel like you could fall asleep.
“Exhausting,” you mumble, “I got like four hours of sleep last night and one of my professors had the audacity to tell me that my answer was wrong on my homework when literally five other people had the same answer and got it right. And then I had coffee as my meals and had a busting headache until I took the longest nap of my fucking life—“
“Slow down,” Jungkook interjects with a laugh, “Too much information that I’m not processing right now.”
You let out an “ugh” before saying, “I’ve had better days for sure.” You leave it at that. “What about you?”
He smiles before turning to you completely, “I’ve had better days, better weeks for sure.” He almost sounds annoyed now, like something is deeply bothering him.
You let a pause presume between the two of you, unsure of what to say. You know you shouldn’t bring it up, but you can’t help it. The bruises on his face, the cuts on his hands—you needed to know what happened to him. Despite your intoxicated state, you could form sentences and think pretty clearly and you weren’t letting Jungkook out of your sight without explaining himself.
“Jungkook,” you say in a whisper, looking around to see if the other guys had left. They had. “Are you gonna tell me what happened to your face?”
He looks down, almost embarrassed. “There was a fight on Tuesday,” he stops when you furrow your eyebrows at him.
“Tuesday?!” You half whisper, “What the hell are you doing fighting on a Tuesday? Jungkook you said—“
“It wasn’t an official fight Y/N,” he interrupts you, “I was fucking jumped with one of my friends,” he says and your eyes widen. You feel your head spinning and your mouth goes dry. From the weed, alcohol, or the conversation? You’re not sure.
“What?” You ask, worry filling your tone, “Jungkook what the fuck! You said you had this under control.”
“Keep your voice down!” He scolds, “I do have it under control, although you can’t really control when you get jumped.”
“W-why? Who would want—“
“His name is Eric. I beat him at the last real fight and I guess he’s a sore fucking loser. He wants a rematch and everything, said he was injured before the fight, so he sent some pussies to jump my friend Jimin and I.”
The information being taken in wasn’t something you wanted to hear. Was this stupid underground boxing that serious? And how stupid could Jungkook be to continue to do this?
“Well you’re not gonna fight him again,” you pause. He doesn’t look at you. “Are you?”
“There’s a lot of money on the line,” he says.
“Jungkook you’ve got to be joking.”
“I’m not Y/N,” he turns to you again, his body now closer than before. His knuckles gripping the railing are pale and cracked. “If I win this fight, I won’t need anymore money before the end of the year. Hell, I’ll probably even have some left over.”
“Okay? And?”
“Then I can be done with fighting,” he sounds genuine but insincere  at the same time. This greatly improves your posture and you feel your heartbeat calming down.
“B-but I figured you would need more money? Your parents Jungkook?” You stumble over some of your words.
“Y/N you don’t understand the money within these things, it’s insane. Trust me, I’ll be set with money for awhile. I just have to win that fight…”
You want to protest him. Tell him he shouldn’t do it, that he should find a normal job, get away from that stuff—but you stay silent. Jungkook always will be as stubborn as you and he seems to have made up his mind about this fighting stuff awhile ago. At the end of the day, whatever happens to him, isn’t necessarily your business.
“You know I’ll never agree with this,” you shake your head, looking down at Jungkook’s hands. They’ve relaxed against the railing and time has slowed down significantly. Every blink of your eyes seem to last 5 seconds and Jungkook could say the same thing.
“I know,” Jungkook steps towards you, overlapping one of his hands with yours, “But like I said, I trust you and you should trust me,” he almost sounds desperate. “Look at me,” he whispers and you slowly turn your head up. Your noses are nearly touching and you can smell him, your vision clouding in the dark.
“Do you trust me?” He asks quietly, licking his lips and you swallow, trying to find your breath.
You nod your head slowly, “Yes.”
You don’t know who leans in first, but when your lips meet, it’s like a siren goes off. The scene feels all too familiar. His lips are soft and they feel just like you remember. He’s gentle with you, his left hand holding your waist to pull you towards him, your bodies flush together. One of your hands finds their way to his hair and you pull him down closer to you. This feels good, really good—but isn’t this wrong? You two have just rekindled your relationship and you two didn’t even last four weeks before you two are snogging—the very reason your friendship became weird in the first place all those years ago.
You try to pull away, “Jungkook—“ he closes the gap once again and it’s like a drug—touch is like heroin in your veins. Both of you are hungry—hungry for each other. You’re not sure when, but you find yourself backed into the wall of the dark-side of the balcony. The door isn’t in view so anyone inside couldn’t see what was going on right now thank god.
“Y/N,” the groan sends your body into overdrive and he begins to trail his lips down your neck and you’ve pulled him so close to you there is barely room to breathe. It’s gotta be the alcohol—or the weed—or just Jungkook—but you’ve never wanted anyone more in your life. You squeeze your thighs together to find some unrelieved friction and Jungkook senses what you’re doing. He stops you, forcing is own leg between your crotch and you subtly moan.
“Fuck, shh,” Jungkook scolds and it makes you laugh as you check if anyone is coming to the door.
“Jungkook,” you whisper and he closes the gap between you again, covering your mouth gently and you genuinely feel butterflies in your stomach. Jungkook’s hand trails from your waist down to the front of you jeans and you pull away suddenly, “Jungkook w-what are you doing?!”
“Do you want me to do this?” He sounds mischievous as he pops open the button to your pants and you can safely say you never thought you would be in this situation with Jeon Jungkook of all people, but you are not about to stop him.
You kiss him this time, pulling on his hair, eliciting another delicious groan from him. His hand makes it way to your center and you shiver in the cold, his hands warm against your underwear. He rubs you through the material, once, twice, three times before he moves aside the fabric—the wetness covering his fingers instantly. You look towards the door again nervous that someone might walk out here and see the two of you compromised—you would die. Especially if it was Taehyung or Jennie.
“Quiet, alright?” Jungkook whispers and you nod biting your lip as he enters a finger into you. You close your eyes, mouth falling open. Your breathing picks up as he enters a second digit. His fingers are long and calloused as you noticed before but it feels so good. He brings one of your legs around his waist so he can get deeper into your center and a small, squeaky moan escapes from your mouth. Jungkook shuts you up by kissing you again and he begins to move his fingers in and out, curling them in all the right places, sending you into a silent mess.
You and Jungkook shouldn’t be doing this—not here, not right now, not ever. But you’re not doing anything to stop it. Neither is he. Is this suppose to be happening then? No—definitely yes. Wait, what? Your brain is so foggy you can’t even think straight.
Jungkook has added a third finger and it’s becoming harder and harder to stay quiet. Jungkook’s face in the crook of your neck, your neck in his—it’s all a little too intimate but it’s hot and heavy and it feels so good. Jungkook begins to use his thumb to find your clit, which he does with no problem—rubbing there and still moving in and out of you. Goddamn, he knows what he is doing.
“Jungkook, I’m gonna—“
“Shh,” he says, “Bite me, anywhere,” he says and you do as he says, your teeth clamping down onto his shoulder as you feel yourself falling off the edge. Your orgasm comes in a huge wave and it’s one of the best you’ve had in a long time—your body is shaking and you whimper into his shoulder, trying to keep as quiet as possible. Jungkook lets you finish before he pulls his hand out of your pants, letting your leg drop. You two stare at each other for a couple seconds, unsure of what to do now. You knew that Jungkook was hard in his pants but you weren’t sure if he wanted you to do anything about it. Should you ask? No that’s fucking weird. Well it’s fucking weird you just let your best friend of a billion years to give you one of the best orgasms of your life.
“Um,” he speaks first, “We should go back inside,” he says.
You nod, “Yeah, we should.”
You follow closely behind him as he slides the door open and you step back into the much warmer apartment.
“Y/N! Jungkook! What were you guys doing?!” Jennie pops out of nowhere until she steps back, “Fuck never mind, I can smell it,” she laughs, her eyes looking between the two of you. “What’s wrong with you two? Are you fighting again? Jesus fucking—“
“No, we’re fine, just high,” Jungkook gives her a reassuring smile and she nods absentmindedly. She is very drunk and then two of you might have to go home sooner than later.
“I need to call an Uber,” you say grabbing your phone from your pocket.
“I can drive you guys if you want,” Jungkook offers and you narrow your eyes at him.
“Absolutely not, you’re high.” You say pulling up the app on your phone.
“I’ve driven high before it’s not—“
“Jungkook, no,” you somewhat snap at him. This kid really knows how to grind your gears. “Thanks for inviting us, I just don’t want Jennie to do something she regrets tomorrow morning.” You try your best to lighten to mood but it’s not helping. As much progress as you and Jungkook had made the past few weeks, that all feels gone now. There’s heaviness with you and him and you hate it.
“Just let me know when you make it home?” Jungkook’s eyes are hard to read. He looks worried, anxious, high obviously, and other potential obscurities.
“I will, I promise,” you give him a smile and he returns one weakly. You look over your shoulder to find Jennie practically draping herself all over Taehyung. Fuck. “Jennie! Come on! We’re leaving,” you stomp over to the two of them and Taehyung doesn’t seemed bothered by Jennie throwing herself at him at all. If anything, they both seem to like it. “Jennie, quit, he has a girlfriend. Taehyung, you have a girlfriend,” you narrow at the both of them.
Taehyung laughs very drunkenly, “You’re right, come on Jen,” Taehyung pushes her away slightly and she stumbles over her feet.
“Our Uber is almost here,” you tell her and she nods.
“Sounds good,” she gives you a thumbs up. 
“Help me walk her Tae?” You ask and he nods.
As you and Taehyung have Jennie up around your shoulders, you look around the apartment to find Jungkook to tell him bye, but he’s nowhere to be seen.
_____
It had been exactly one week since you’ve seen Jungkook. Since he was fist deep into your vagina, pleasuring you with at least 20 people in the room next to you. It has also been the last time you spoke to him. He didn’t reach out for any tutoring this week which was odd—as the two of you set a schedule for it a few weeks back. You were worried. You knew you should reach out to him and talk about what happened—but something was holding you back. You didn’t want to talk over the phone. It had to be done in person and it just had to be done. You didn’t want to lose Jungkook a second time to another drunken mistake.
Mistake? Since when was it a mistake? Was it a mistake?
You had no idea.
It’s why you’ve found yourself at Jungkook’s apartment a week later, waiting for someone to open the door. You wait patiently and no one answers the door. You’re about to give up when a voice startles you.
“Y/N? What are you doing here?”
Taehyung appears to your left and you jump.
“Shit Taehyung,” you hold a hand over your chest, “I’m sorry, I-I was just wondering if Jungkook was home?”
Taehyung adjusts his backpack. He must be getting back from class. “He’s probably at the gym.”
You nod slowly, “Alright, thank you.”
“No problem,” he says and you’re about to walk away and he stops you again, “Everything okay?”
You open your mouth and close it again, “Not sure,” you tell him honestly. He nods without another word, seeming to understand where you’re coming from.
If your assumptions were right, Jungkook would be at a gym about ten minutes from campus, one he frequented as a freshman all that time ago. You wanted everything to be okay, but now, you were sure you have done fucked it up once again.
The gym isn’t crowded and you don’t recognize any cars to be Jungkook’s so your mood begins to dampen as you walk towards the front door. The bell rings and you probably look like an idiot walking in with jeans and sandals, but your eyes ignore the stares as you try to find Jungkook. You walk through the gym towards the back, your neck craning each direction to find him. It smells of sweat and grit, something you haven’t done too much of lately. You’re about to give up until you reach the back, where a cracked door leads into another section of the gym. You open the crack slowly and the sounds of grunting and hard hits fill the room. You stop in your place as your eyes land on Jungkook, downing boxing gloves, a pair of shorts, and nothing else. You gulp.
He’s hitting a heavy bag hard and fast, his movements halting only for a split second before he strikes again. He’s dripping in sweat and you gulp again. Should you interrupt? He’s definitely not expecting you therefore you probably shouldn’t barge in but you’re already here, so what are you supposed to do?
“Come on Jungkook,” another man’s voice comes into play. You’ve never seen this guy with mint colored hair. “Throw a southpaw, let’s go!” 
Jungkook’s stance quickly changes and he’s throwing his right arm and then uppercutting his left arm with all of his weight. 
“Nice Jungkook,” the voice says again. Jungkook steps back with a smile on his face, looking behind him. 
“Hey,” a different voice yells over and you stop to see who it is. A guy slightly shorter than Jungkook appears in the crack of the door, a wide smile across his face.
“Good news, fight is set,” the guy smiles, although his smile reads less than enthusiastic. You notice some bruising along this guys arms, a large scrap on the side of his face. This has to be Jimin, the other guy that was jumped with Jungkook. 
“When is it?” Jungkook breathes heavily, his hair sticking to his forehead as he tries to push it back through his gloves.
“October thirteenth,” Jimin says, “A Friday.”
Jungkook laughs, “A fucking Friday the thirteenth? How cheesy could they get?”
You swallow harshly. October 13th was a less than three weeks away. You’re sure they are talking about the fight with the guy named Eric that Jungkook mentioned.
“I know right,” the nameless guy says, “But I’m sure you’ll kick his ass once again, waste of your time.”
“Don’t have to tell me twice Jimin,” Jungkook sounds annoyed and you’re starting to wonder if you should have came here at all. 
“Come on, let’s do some more sets,” the other guy says says, patting Jungkook on the shoulder.
You take in a deep breath, hoping that this doesn’t backfire. You take your chance and open the door to the room as if you just showed up. Jungkook, Jimin, and the third guy turns to you.
“Y/N?” Jungkook asks, looking confused, “What are you doing here?”
You glance around the room awkwardly, “Uh, I-uh, went to your apartment to see you if you were a-and Taehyung said you were here, so,” you sound like a babbling idiot.
Jungkook’s eyes soften and it’s hard to not stare below his neck, but somehow you manage.
“Jimin, Yoongi this is Y/N,” Jungkook formally introduces you, “She’s a friend.” A friend. That hurt more than it should have.
“Hi,” Jimin gives you a sweet smile and he seems like a person Jungkook would automatically gravitate towards. Yoongi stays quiet. He’s definitely not someone you would strike as Jungkook’s friend. 
“Sorry if I’m interrupting—I didn’t know…” you trail off, feeling more than awkward in this situation.
“No worries,” Jimin shakes his head, “We were almost done anyways.”
Jungkook’s eyes haven’t met yours since you’ve walked in. He’s staring at Jimin and knowing Jungkook, he’s going to try and leave as soon as he can.
“Wanna meet again tomorrow?” Jimin asks towards Jungkook as he packs up his bag on the floor.
“Yeah, sure,” Jungkook mutters, staring aimlessly at the ceiling. “I’m gonna stay here for a little longer though.”
“Alright,” Jimin says, “It was nice to meet you Y/N.”
You smile to him, “You too.”
Jimin and Yoongi leave the room and the silence is suffocating. You cross your arms around your chest feeling vulnerable and insecure. You look at Jungkook and he’s staring at you now. He looks away from you before turning back to the bag, lining up to strike it again.
“Jungkook,” your voice interrupts his chance to punch. He pauses with one more glance to your frame. You begin to walk closer to him wanting to get this over and done with. “What’s wrong with you?” You ask.
Jungkook looks down, “I don’t know what you’re talking about,” he mutters and you nearly jump out of your body when he begins to strike the bag in quick, calculated motions. The bag moves backwards with each punch and his face tenses up, his mind clearly on one thing and one thing only. You exhale deeply, trying to stay calm. If that’s the way he’s going to play—you won’t keep your cool for long.
“Jungkook, stop,” you raise your voice over his movements and he suddenly quits, looking up at you again. “Don’t do this right now,” you say stepping closer to him again.
“What do you want Y/N, I’m busy alright,” he scoffs, stepping away from the bag, turning fully to you. You wish he didn’t look good drenched in sweat but it was hard to stay focused when he was looking like that.
“You know exactly what I want. You haven’t spoken to me in a fucking week Jungkook,” your words are fiery despite your cool demeanor.
“Is that really that big of an issue? We barely spoke for two years until recently,” he sounds annoyed, but also timid—you can sense something is bothering him.
You frown, “Yeah until recently because I thought we moved past that.”
He doesn’t say anything. And that’s what boils your blood. Tears are threatening to spill from your eyes—not from sadness, but frustration.  
“So is that it? I let you finger fuck me and now I don’t mean anything to you anymore?” Your words are seething and once you say this, Jungkook’s face softens that slightest bit.
“What? No Y/N—“
“Then what the fuck is wrong with you? What have I done?!” It takes all of you not to breakdown right there. You just got Jungkook back. You couldn’t lose him a second time.
“Y/N listen,” Jungkook takes off his boxing gloves, throwing them in the floor, “You haven’t done anything alright. It’s just—complicated,” he shakes his head, stepping closer to you. He tries to grab one of your hands but you pull away from him.
“No, no you don’t get to do that,” you say, “What happened to communicating Jungkook? Wasn’t that our issue all that time ago?”
He looks down and back up. You really wish he would put a shirt on. “I know, I know…” he wanders off, “If I could tell you I would, but I’m just under a lot of stress right now and—“
“Then tell me what’s wrong,” you don’t want to interrupt him, but you feel like you two are going in an endless circle. Jungkook steps towards you once again and this time you don’t back away from him.
“Look, I’m sorry alright. I shouldn’t have cut you off this past week—I just thought it would clear my head,” he says. With hesitation, he grabs your wrists gently, “That was stupid I get that okay? I’m sorry, especially after… what happened,” he says and you can tell he means it. Jungkook is a genuine person, you can’t argue that.
Your face warms up and you feel almost embarrassed. Were you overreacting?
“I just don’t understand,” you mutter, “I’m sorry for jumping to conclusions but Jungkook, you’re worrying me. I don’t know what’s going on with us and this whole boxing thing is keeping me awake at night.”
He intertwines your fingers together and it’s comforting. Comfort you’ve been missing ever since a week ago. “Y/N, please just trust me okay? If I can get through these next few weeks I’m set and I promise you don’t have to worry about me anymore.”
“How can you promise that?” You look up fully at him and you’re a lot closer than moments ago.
“I don’t to make promises I can’t keep.”
You sure hoped he was right.
_____
Two weeks have gone by since your talk with Jungkook in the gym. He had resumed talking to you normally, although there was still something off about him. Then again, there was something off with you too. The intimate situation the two of you found yourself in a few weeks back, still hadn’t been fully discussed and it bothered you like no other. It bothered you because you couldn’t stop thinking about it. You’d be lying if you said you didn’t want it to happen again—or even further. Fuck, you shouldn’t be thinking about Jungkook like this. But don’t you have a right to? Jesus you were so confused. It’s why you have found yourself at Beta Tau Sigma once again on a Saturday night, Jennie already lost in tow somewhere, and you’re standing with Namjoon. Even though your mind was clouded with Jungkook, Namjoon was good company at keeping you distracted.
“What’s up with you lately?” Namjoon asks handing you another drink. You furrow your brows before taking a sip. Your face scrunches up at the taste—not the best.
“What do you mean?” You ask.
Namjoon gives you a straight smile, “Don’t play stupid,” he says. You don’t even try to make up a lie. Namjoon is too smart for that.
“I don’t know, Joon,” you sigh, “I’ve just been going through a lot lately I guess,” you mutter over the loud music.
“I get it,” he says, “Wanna talk about it?”
You’re about to answer him when you suddenly spot a familiar head of dark brown hair across the room. It’s Jungkook and he’s with a girl—you recognize her from somewhere. She’s standing in front of him and he’s smirking down at her and says something that makes her laugh. Then you know where you’ve seen her before—the bathroom girl. Fuck her, you don’t even realize you roll your eyes.
Namjoon laughs, “Whoa, what was that for?” He raises an eyebrow at you.
“W-what?” You look back to him and he follows where your eyes had been.
“Looking at Jungkook, eh?” He smirks, “Something going on between you two?”
You shake your head immediately, “No. Absolutely not.”
You didn’t know if that was a lie or not. Sure, Jungkook and you may have swapped some bodily fluids recently, but nothing else. You were also keeping a secret of his, one that if Namjoon found out about—would have him kicked out of the frat faster than he could blink. You glance back over to Jungkook one more time and find his eyes scanning the room. They land on you within 5 seconds and he shifts uncomfortably in front of bathroom girl.
“You sure?” Namjoon finds this situation funny. You don’t.
“Shut up,” you push on his chest slightly and he grabs your hand, pulling you towards him.
“Oh I can make you shut up,” he mumbles and you laugh as he closes the distance between the two of you. Namjoon’s lips are always soft and plump but that doesn’t mean he is always the most gentle. Namjoon is rough and sometimes—it’s just what you need. Jungkook’s lips on—
You pull away quickly from him. What the fuck?
“You okay?” He asks with concern.
You nod your head, “Yeah, I, just uh need some air,” you say. It was true—your head was now spinning and the alcohol wasn’t helping. You couldn’t believe you thought of Jungkook when kissing Namjoon.
“Alright, I’ll be by the bar.”
You leave Namjoon’s side and push your way through the hoards of people and loud music. You spot a door towards the back of the kitchen and use that as your opportunity. The air is cool but crisp. Just what you needed. There’s quite a few people outside surrounding a large bonfire keeping warm. You relax against the porch railings, staring aimlessly at the ground beneath you. You pour your drink out, knowing you don’t need to drink anymore of it. You nearly shit yourself when a voice comes up directly behind you.
“Y/N.”
You whip around, clutching your chest. “Jesus Christ Jungkook,” you say. His hands are stuffed in the pockets of his jeans, a large flannel and sweatshirt covering his torso. He approaches you hastily and you don’t take your eyes off of his.
“I didn’t know you were coming tonight,” he says, obviously trying to make small talk.
“I didn’t either until Namjoon asked me this evening,” you say and you instantly regret bringing up his name. Jungkook stiffens.
“Still good friends with him I see,” he bites his lip nervously, looking over to the bonfire. You squint your eyes at him. He sounds off and annoyed.
“I see you’re still friends with bathroom girl,” you shoot back. You’re not even drunk, barely tipsy, but the thought of Jungkook being annoyed at you and Namjoon nearly sends you. At least you know Namjoon well—the only Jungkook knows about that girl is her fucking mouth.
“Gotta an issue with that?” He runs his tongue against his mouth and he looks at your from the side.
You turn to him and this feels all too familiar. “Yeah, actually I do.”
“Well, I have an issue kissing Namjoon in front of me—are we even?” He cocks his head to the side and you’ve never felt more annoyed yet turned on at the same time.
“Whatever,” you brush him off running a hand through your hair, turning back to your front staring at the fire. “Last time I checked I don’t take orders from you.”
“I know,” he says and you feel him push his body against your side. Your breathing instantly picks up and you bite the inside of your cheek to steady yourself. One of Jungkook’s hands finds its way to your shoulder, trailing it down to your elbow, then pushing it through the crack of your arm to settle on your waist.
“Jungkook,” you say quietly, not wanting to bring any attention to the two of you. Jungkook’s head leans down, his temple brushing against yours. His hand rubs gentle circles on your waist and you inhale his scent deeply. Fuck. “Jungkook… are you drunk?”
He shakes his head, “No, are you?” You believe him. He doesn’t smell like alcohol nor does he seem tipsy.
“No,” you say. Jungkook pulls you impossibly closer to him and your throat feels like its closing up.
“Can I kiss you?” Jungkook asks and you turn your head up, your noses brushing together. What? When has he ever been this upfront? You hesitate to answer but soon nod slowly—just once—you needed to feel it again—just once again. He closes the gap between you and you nearly melt into him. One of your hands grabs his face gently, pulling him down to you. Your own hands find their way to his fluffy hair, entangling into the locks. He presses himself into you and you feel your heart beating out of your chest. You let out a small whine when he pulls on your lip with his teeth and it shakes you back to reality.
You pull away from him—your entire body on fire. He’s got you trapped against the railing and you don’t trust the old wood to support your weight much longer.
“Jungkook,” you whisper and you feel something hard pressing into your front and your throat goes dry.
“Come home with me,” he says, “Please.” Desperation. That’s what laces his tone and you’re sure your heart left from your chest. But—you know this isn’t a good idea. Blame it on being sober, but you’re not sure you should go there with Jungkook. Not right now at least. Your head was spinning and as much as you wanted to—you couldn’t.
“Jungkook,” your eyes focus on his chest, watching your hands grip his shirt gently. “I—We can’t, we shouldn’t,” you bite your lip nervously.
“Please Y/N,” he nuzzles his forehead into yours, his grip on your getting tighter, “I need you, please—“
“Jungkook, no,” you push him off of you carefully and he looks hurt and confused. “I’m sorry, I—I want to but—“
“But what?” Once again, he looks sad and maybe a little angry now? “II’m not Namjoon? Is that it?”
You shake your head, not able to find a good answer in your head. His hands drop from your side and so does your stomach. Without another glance at your frame, Jungkook walks away, pulling at the roots of his hair.
You get home alone that night. Fuck. You think you really may have messed up this time. No, Jungkook wasn’t Namjoon but Namjoon could never be Jungkook. The history the two of you have... god you were so confused. You’re not sure you’ve ever felt gravity pull you to someone more since recently, that someone being Jungkook. As confused as your feelings were, you cry some in your bed. You don’t sleep that night, worried that whatever wedge is driving itself between you and Jungkook again—won’t be fixable this time.
_____
Jungkook, maybe much not to your surprise, cuts you off again the next week. You haven’t spoken or seen him since the party. Since he wanted you to go home with him and you nearly did, but thankfully you used your head some. You missed seeing his face dearly and missed his smile even more. When did things get so complicated with you and him? Ever since fucking graduation in high school—nothing has been the same. It’s been years and years and it’s something you’ve never gotten over. The more you think about it, the obvious reasons begin to show. Maybe Jungkook means more to you than you thought? Maybe he wasn’t just supposed to be your best friend? What if you two had been destined for something else all this time? Or maybe you weren’t meant to be friends at all?
Your thoughts are interrupted when a familiar face walks into your shift at the diner. Taehyung is by himself, his backpack thrown lazily over one of his shoulders. He looks tired, but just like you, getting through the day. His eyes meet yours and give him a small smile.
“Sit wherever,” you tell him and he decides to sit along the bar, sitting across from where you stand.
“Good evening,” he gives you a small smile, running a hand over his face.
“Hey Tae,” you breathe out, handing him a menu. He holds up his hand, not wanting it.
“Just get me a latte, extra espresso please,” he says and you nod.
“Coming right up.”
It doesn’t even take you a minute to make lattes now. The process has become so familiar it’s become second nature. Mainly due to your own obsession with lattes and your determination to perfect them yourself. You top the mug off with some foam before sliding it over to Taehyung. He doesn’t wait for it to cool before taking a big gulp.
“Rough day?” You ask, leaning forward on your elbows.
“You don’t even know,” he grumbles, “I had a quiz in my hardest class today that I didn’t know about, therefore didn’t study for,” he pauses, “I had to pick up all the slack on a group project that’s due on Saturday and then I have had to deal with Jungkook’s dumbass all week and he was at his worst this morning,” he rolls his eyes.
The mention of Jungkook makes your heart flutter yet stomach feel nauseated, “What’s wrong with Jungkook?”
Taehyung raises an eyebrow at you, “Don’t you know?”
“Um… he hasn’t talked to me in a week,” you look down at your hands, your mouth dry.
“Jesus fuck,” Taehyung groans, “No wonder he’s been in such a fucking mood. What did he do?”
You weren’t sure how to go about your answer. Um, yeah, so like Jungkook wanted me to go home with him to have sex and I did too and I didn’t and I don’t know why. Sounds great.
“It wasn’t him. It was me,” you pause, “He asked me to go home with him.”
Taehyung’s eyes widen slightly, a small smirk on his face, “Did you?”
You shake your head, “No, I couldn’t bring myself to. I wanted to but…” you trail off, slightly embarrassed to be telling Taehyung this.
“Goddammit,” he nearly laughs, “No wonder he’s pissy. Between you and tomorrow, kid’s got his work cut out.” You pick up Taehyung joking around but you still furrow your eyebrows.
“What’s tomorrow?” You ask.
“The 13th. Did he not tell you?” Fuck. His fight. Without talking to Jungkook everyday, you had forgotten about the fight.
“He mentioned it.”
“Are you going?” The question catches you off guard.
“What, oh no,” you shake your head, “No, he didn’t ask and I don’t think that’s something I wanna see anyways.”
“Trust me, he wants you there,” he says, “He’s just being a dick.”
“He’s got a funny way of showing it,” you snap. “Every time something happens between us… he shuts me off. I don’t fucking get it.”
“Y/N he does this to everyone when he’s stressed,” Taehyung pauses, “Especially since, you know,” he shrugs. The fights.
You nod, “I get it,” you slump, “It’s still frustrating.”
“You don’t have to tell me that—at least you don’t live with him,” he gives you a laugh and you send a smile in return.
“How do you feel about it?” You ask him genuinely, “The boxing I mean…”
Taehyung squints his eyes briefly, “I think it’s stupid personally,” this answer warms your heart until he continues, “But if I was as good as Jungkook I would probably do it too. The money in these things are insane.”
You raise your eyebrows, “So I’ve heard.”
Taehyung nods before he gets a text on his phone. He reads it before smiling.
“Your girlfriend?” You probe curiously.
He clears his throat, “Uh, yeah,” he responds quickly before turning his phone over. “So, what exactly is going on between you two?”
“Uh, what do you mean?” You laugh sarcastically.
Taehyung deadpans his face, “You know what I mean. I know you guys have this weird chemistry, it’s obvious. Plus he hasn’t shut up about you since you started tutoring him. Y/N this, Y/N that… it’s disgusting.”
Did Jungkook really talk about you?
“Ask him, not me because I don’t even fucking know. I could tell you what Kim Namjoon and I are before I could define mine and Jungkook’s relationship.” You let out a laugh and other eye roll.
“I’m assuming you and hyung are… what do they say? Friends with…?”
“Yeah yeah whatever you wanna call it,” you swat your hand slightly embarrassed.
“Jungkook hates it you know,” he says, switching tones. “You and Namjoon.”
You slightly snort, “And why is that?” You could tell Jungkook didn’t like seeing you with Namjoon, even before last weekend after he voiced it.
“Because he knows Namjoon is the type of guy you’ve always wanted, not him.” This takes you completely off guard.
“Why would Jungkook care about that?” You furrow.
Taehyung shrugs, staying silent this time. You weren’t stupid—you knew what Taehyung was implying by saying what he said. It makes your stomach drop. Maybe Jungkook felt more for you than he supposed to as well?
“So are you gonna come tomorrow?” He asks.
“No Taehyung,” you say, “I don’t want to see Jungkook get the shit beat out of him.”
“Jungkook won’t get the shit beat out of him, I can promise you that.”
You eyes glance over to the door as a small group of people walk into the diner. You don’t say anything else to Taehyung as you walk over to greet them. You seat them and make your way back to Taehyung, but you can’t chat much longer as you now have a table to tend to.
“Listen Y/N,” Taehyung stops you before you can walk back over with menus for the group, “If you wanna come, just text me. Like I said Jungkook wants you there, whether he’s said so or not. Also, another latte please, you’re slacking woman.”
You swat him with the menus before walking away from him. Goddamn, these next 24 hours were going to be hell.
_____
You couldn’t remember the last time you were ever this nervous for someone aside from yourself in a very long time. You remember how nervous you were in high school when you got injured and Jennie had to double with a girl on the bench of the tennis team. You remember being nervous for your parents when you left for college. And now, you don’t ever recall a moment in your life where you have been this nervous for Jeon Jungkook of all people.
It was Friday at 3:43 PM and you day was slow but painless, and you had no official plans set for the evening. Taehyung had texted you, wondering if you wanted to hitch a ride along with him to the match. You had yet to answer him. His text mocking you from your screen and you wanted to pretend that you knew nothing of the boxing match but that was impossible.
[You 3:59 PM] What time should I be ready
You send the message before you could regret it and delete it. Jennie has yet to be home from going to the store and you would need a good, yet believable excuse for your absence tonight.
[Taehyung 4:00 PM] i’ll pick you up around 8
[You 4:00 PM] Sounds good. Have you spoken to Jungkook today?
[Taehyung 4:02 PM] no he’s been quiet all day. have you?
[You 4:02 PM] Nope
You don’t receive another text from him and you slump down on your couch. It had been nearing two full weeks since Jungkook had spoken to you. You felt like all of this was your fault, sending him mixed signals and unsure of your own feelings for him. From the secretive finger fuck to the gentle kiss you shared last week, Jungkook was on your mind 24/7—aside from taking exams of course—but he was all you could think about lately. Growing up, you obviously loved Jungkook and was practically glued to his hip, but even then you don’t recall thinking about him every single fucking second.
You pull at the roots of your hair and let out a frustrated groan. Maybe you should reach out? After all, without your initiation of friendship all those years ago, you wouldn’t be here now.
You pick up your phone and find Jungkook’s contact and before you can stop yourself, you tap the call button. Your hands are clammy and you know he probably won’t answer, but it’s worth a try. The line rings for about thirty seconds before it goes dead. That dumbass doesn’t even have voicemail set up.
Pissed off even more, you slam your phone against the coffee table and let out an exasperated ‘fuck’ before going to your room to take a nap. Fuck Jeon Jungkook, is the last thought you have before you drift off into sleep.
_____
Taehyung picked you up at 8:02, though you told Jennie it was Namjoon who picked you up and the two of you were having a night in. You think she believed it but left her before she could ask anymore questions.
“I just don’t fucking get it Taehyung, one second he’s fine and another he’s like a child throwing a fit,” you filled Taehyung in on how you tried to call him but to no avail.
“You don’t have to tell me how he is Y/N, I fucking live with the guy,” he groans from his drivers seat. “I just think he’s going through a lot right now… with school, his parents, the boxing, you… he’s never handle stress that well you know that.”
You let out a sigh, leaning against the window, “It’s just so frustrating trying to help him only to get cut off like this…”
Taehyung looks at you with an eyeful glance though you don’t notice. “Y/N, in his eyes you’ve cut him off too, you do realize that right?”
You furrow your eyebrows. “What? No I haven’t?”
“Come on the little brat can’t keep his mouth shut. I know what happened with you two a couple weeks ago,” he says. You don’t say anything, cheeks getting warm. “And the weeks before that on our fucking balcony—“
“Okay what then Tae!” You interrupt him, too embarrassed by the memory.
“Jungkook is trying Y/N,” he says with a hint of a smirk, “He thinks you’re rejecting him,” Taehyung says matter-of-factly.
“Rejecting? C’mon Taehyung you know that I—“
“I know that you and Jungkook like each other, even though neither one of you have said anything, Jennie says it too.”
You narrow your eyebrows at your friend. “I don’t know what I think about Jungkook okay?” You’re being honest. You know you like Jungkook… but you’re scared of what that entails for the future. You want Jungkook in your future, you just don’t know what the right path is.
Taehyung doesn’t say anything else as he pulls his car into a fairly full parking garage. It’s dimly lit and slightly freaks you out. Taehyung had to drive to the other side of the city to get here and you don’t recognize the neighborhood around.
“Stay close to me, alright?” Taehyung opened your door for you and you nod without any argument. You follow Taehyung out of the parking garage into the chilly air and you huddle by his side. The two of you walk down a couple streets before he turns down a dark, dimly lit alleyway.
“Taehyung what the fuck,” you whisper and come to a halt. His brown eyes bleed into yours despite the darkness and he takes your hand into his.
“It’s okay,” he says reassuringly, “I promise.”
You nod reluctantly and the you continue to walk down the alley, coming to a stop at the end where you spot the familiar face of Min Yoongi. He’s standing down a small flight of stairs beneath you two and he greets Taehyung with a stiff smile.
“Taehyung, what’s up,” he says, his eyes immediately looking over at you, “Y/N?”
You tighten your grip around Taehyung’s hand, Yoongi’s stare quite intimidating.
“She should be on Jungkook’s list.”
You stay quiet knowing Taehyung doing the talking is the best strategy. Yoongi looks down at a clipboard—old fashioned but effective you guess—before nodding.
“You guys are good. Hurry and find a seat, there’s a lot of people down here tonight.”  
“You got it,”  Taehyung gives him a small smile before you drag behind him down the stairs and enter through a heavy door. You already hear plenty of commotion as you enter a huge space a few feet from the door. Your eyes look around and you could see nearly a hundred people just in your line of sight.
“Holy shit,” Taehyung says.
“What?” You get nervous by his tone.
“I’ve never seen this many people here, goddamn.”
“Why are there so many people here?” You spot a large boxing ring, dead center of the room and your mouth goes dry.
“I guess people like rematches?” Taehyung raises an eyebrow at you.
“Where’s Jungkook?” You ask, noticing how some eyes are staring at you, making you shift uncomfortably in your boots.
“Probably in the locker rooms… wanna see him?” He asks.
You bite your lip. “Does he wanna see us?” You hope Taehyung says yes. It’s killing you inside not being able to see him, hear him.
“Guess we’ll find out, c’mon,” he smirks and you follow him closely. As you look around, you do notice people you somewhat recognize. Whether it’s from walking around on campus or some of your classes, all these faces are not too unfamiliar. Taehyung takes you away from the crowd of people, through another set of doors and down another hallway. With this much walking and standing, you would have worn something other than booties. You enter the “locker room” area and you suddenly feel queasy. What if Jungkook is mad that you’re here? What if he doesn’t want to see you after all? What if—
“Y/N?” Your thoughts are broken by a honey-like voice and you focus in on the source. Jungkook sits a few feet away from you and Taehyung, back leaning against a wall. He looks confused, but also pleasantly surprised. “What are you doing here?” He gets up and does the unexpected—he embraces you in a tight hug. You return it without a second though, holding him close to you. He pulls away from you after a few moments and gives Taehyung a small hug too.
“Hey,” you say shyly.
“How are you feeling?” Taehyung asks his friend and Jungkook shrugs.
“I’m alright.” Jungkook looks at you again. “I didn’t think you’d ever come to one of these,” he laughs awkwardly.
“Me either,” you say with no expression. As much as you wanted to be happy—you couldn’t. You were pissed at Jungkook for ignoring you and you were pissed that Jungkook was about to fight. You eye his frame, a white t shirt and navy sweatpants hang low on his hips. He looks calm, too calm for your liking.
“Will you give us a minute?” Jungkook suddenly turns to Taehyung and he nods glancing at you.
“I’ll get some seats.”
Taehyung leaves you and Jungkook alone and you nearly feel like crying. What the fuck is this mess?
“Y/N listen to me,” Jungkook says stepping towards you, “I’m so sorry about thess past two weeks. I-I’ve been a dick for no fucking reason and it’s not fair to you.”
You don’t say anything as you stand there with your arms crossed over your chest.
“Fuck I know I’m idiot and there’s no excuse… I’ve just been so stressed lately and you’re the best fucking part of my day—“
“Well why don’t you fucking act like it Jungkook? I’m sick of something happening between us and you acting like a I don’t exist for god knows what reason,” you raise your voice slightly.
“Y/N I,” he pauses, his hands finding their way to your shoulders, “I haven’t been honest with you and,” he pauses again and you feel your heart speed up. What’s he talking about? “I just wanna say—“
“Jungkook, you got five minutes,” the two of you turn to Park Jimin who seemed to come in at the wrong time.
“Fuck,” he says, “We’ll talk after okay?”
You nod hesitantly and before you can push yourself away from him, Jungkook places a kiss on your forehead and it makes your insides melt. Fuck, you meet his brown eyes, biting your lip nervously. 
A revelation springs into your mind; you think you might love him. He pulls you in for another hug, though this is one much shorter as Jimin is ushering you out of the locker room in the blink of an eye.
As much as you wanted to be mad at Jungkook, those thoughts had quickly subsided and replaced with butterflies and nausea. Did you really love Jungkook? You always have, but the feeling in the pit of your heart is pulling you to a different type of love. You cared about him, sometimes even more than yourself. You’ve always wanted the best for him, even if that meant sacrificing your feelings in the process. Now you were stuck between a rock in a hard place, much like you were back in high school when you had a crush on Jungkook. Fuck. And now you have to watch him fight someone like dogs,  
You shake yourself from your thoughts, as loud music flows through your ears and you look around for Taehyung. Luckily, his ashy hair color is easy to spot amongst the crowd and you push yourself to him, squeezing in between bodies and their chatter.
“My bet’s on Jeon,” a voice says.
“Fuck no, Eric isn’t gonna let the same guy beat him twice.”
You try to ignore the snide comments about Jungkook and when you get to Taehyung, he greets you with a smile.
“Hey, everything good?” He asks.
You lick you dry lips, “I don’t know,” you say honestly. Taehyung’s eyes drop and he nods. 
Suddenly, all the lights go out in the venue and a roar of screams and cheers fills the void. You stay still, pressing your body close to Taehyung. It’s not that you feel unsafe, but this environment—it wasn’t for you at all. You heart rate quickens when a man, give a few years on your age, gets into the boxing ring before you, the crowd cheering even louder for him. He bumps a microphone with his palm before bringing it to his mouth.
“Welcome, welcome!” He beams with a smile, “What an outstanding turnout we have tonight! You guys choose a good one to watch because tonight is the rematch of two of the best fighters I’ve seen in a long time…”
“Let’s give a welcome to our first fighter, weighing in at 148 pounds, 5 foot 11, Jeon Jungkook!”
Being an underground fighting ring, there isn’t a posse escorting Jungkook to the ring. He’s got Jimin by his left side, Min Yoongi on the right. Jungkook is shirtless, wearing only a pair of navy shorts, black and white boxing gloves on his hands. He enters the ring with cheers and you inhale and exhale deeply. You look up at Taehyung and he gives you a nod of reassurance to calm down. Jungkook jumps around in place a few times, shaking his arms and shoulders out. From your seat, you can’t read his eyes or facial expression—but he looks calm and unnerved.
“Coming in next, weighing in at 145 pounds, 6 feet tall, Kim Eric!”
Jungkook’s opponent walks in next, three guys surrounding him. He walks slow and steady, his bare chest tattooed beautifully, his boxing gloves a dark red. He enters the ring to cheers and this Eric guy’s gaze doesn’t leave Jungkook’s body one time. Jungkook hasn’t spared one glance at the guy and you find yourself somewhat smiling. Jungkook has always been a cocky-fuck when it’s come to sports which would usually annoy you, but here right now—he looked hot as fuck standing there as if he had no care in the world. Jungkook stands on the left corner of the ring, sitting on a small stool as Jimin and Yoongi talk to him. Jungkook nods, absorbing their information. Eric and his guys do the same.
Suddenly, both men stand and Jimin is putting a mouth guard in Jungkook’s mouth and with one last nod, he finally looks over at Eric, who has already made his way to the center of the ring with the announcer. Jungkook stalks over slowly, his eyes dark and hungry.
“Alright guys, I want a clean fight. No kicking, no cheap shots. If you get knocked down, I give you ten seconds to get up. You look me in the eyes and say you’re good before anymore fighting happens alright. We go for five rounds, unless more is needed. A knockout wins. Touch gloves.”
Jungkook sticks out his gloves for Eric but Eric only stares at him, ignoring the sign of solidarity.
“Fuck you,” Eric says to Jungkook and sends a chill down your spine. Jungkook rolls his eyes, backing away from him, but stays silent.
“Alright… ready… fight!”
Time slows as a bell rings loudly, the cheers get even louder, and you find yourself gripping Taehyung’s arm for support. Jungkook starts to move around the ring slowly, but Eric isn’t having that—immediately rushing to Jungkook to get a few jabs in. Jungkook manages to dodge them perfectly before Eric can corner him. Jungkook keeps his gloves high and never looks away from Eric. Eric comes after Jungkook again, jabbing once—twice—the third time hitting Jungkook square in the face.
“Shit,” you breathe out, eyes widening.
This time, Jungkook comes for Eric, his jabs coming quick and calculated, landing Eric in the body once. Jungkook jabs again and hits him in the face. Eric moves around quickly, Jungkook not quick to follow him. Eric comes after him again, Jungkook blocking his jabs, but missing at the end, leading to Jungkook getting hit in the face once again as well as a body shot.
Eric is coming in hot, throwing punches and jabs left and right, making Jungkook dance around to dodge them. After a few moments, Jungkook begins to fight back, landing Eric square in the face twice. You notice that Jungkook must have busted Eric’s lip as blood now protrudes from his mouth. This seems to send Eric into overdrive and attacks Jungkook quick and fast. You cover your mouth when Eric has Jungkook trapped against the rope, landing body punches after body punches.
“Alright!! Enough, break it up!!” The announcer gets Eric off of Jungkook and Eric starts to laugh in a very showman's way. Jungkook is breathing heavy and he tilts his head—a habit of his that comes out when he’s frustrated or angry. This seems to be both.
Jungkook and Eric continue to throw jabs at one another. Within a few seconds, the whole fight seems to change as Eric manages to slip past one of Jungkook’s blocks and lands him straight on the cheekbone. Jungkook’s body almost freezes before he falls back on the floor and you gasp at the sight.
“Fuck! Taehyung—“
“He’s fine, he’s fine,” he says but his eyes never met yours.
The announcer is on the floor with Jungkook counting down from ten and Jungkook finally sits up when he reaches the number four.
“You good son?” The guy asks Jungkook.
He nods, “Yeah, let’s go.”
Jungkook gets up and walks around, stretching his neck around, waiting for the ref to announce the second round.
“That’s what you get motherfucker,” Eric says walking past him to his corner. Again, Jungkook says nothing before sitting down. Jimin takes out his mouth guard and lets Jungkook drink some water.
“Why is Jungkook letting him hit him like that?!” You ask Taehyung, looking up to him, “He’s getting his ass kicked!”
Taehyung shakes his head, “Jungkook’s smart Y/N… he’s trying to run Eric’s energy out. If Eric keeps swinging the way he right now, he’ll be passed out on his own soon.”
The second round commences and this time, it’s Jungkook who comes out fast. Jungkook soon has Eric trapped against the rope, landing jab after jab. The ref intervenes and lets them get some air. Jungkook’s skin is sweaty and red hot and you don’t think you’ve ever seen him look as mad as he does right now.
Eric counters quickly, catching up with Jungkook again, landing punch after punch. Jungkook escapes but Eric sticks out a foot, causing Jungkook to trip. The whole crowd—yourself included—start to yell at the action. The referee pulls Eric back and points his finger at him. You can’t hear what he’s saying, but you know it’s a scolding by the way his mouth is moving quickly. You look over at Jungkook who shakes his head disapprovingly. He’s talking to Jimin as Yoongi cares to a cut on Jungkook’s eyebrow.
“He’s a fucking asshole,” you make out Jungkook saying.
The third round starts and it seems both Eric and Jungkook are equally fighting this time. Jungkook’s combinations are cleaner than Eric’s, anyone can see that, but the way Eric keeps landing in on Jungkook—makes you feel like this isn’t going to end well for him.
“Come on Jungkook!” You find yourself yelling in the chaos, your whole body shaking as Jungkook dances around the ring to get away from Eric. Eric has him trapped again, but with Jungkook’s strength, gets Eric off of him to turn the tables. There’s sweat and blood coming off both fighters and it’s got to be the most horrifying thing you’ve ever seen.
“Come on you little bitch,” Eric spits at Jungkook, “Is that all you’ve fucking got?”
Jungkook says nothing again, jabbing when he needs to.
“Fucking hell why won’t you speak to me you fucker?” Eric speaks again.
“I don’t have shit to say to you,” Jungkook finally retorts back. “You lost my respect when you sent those pussies to jump Park and I.”
Eric swings hard and Jungkook ducks, barely missing it by an inch. Eric is tired, Jungkook too, but Jungkook can see a weakness in him now.
“Come on it was all in good fun,” he says with a smirk, “You know what else would be good fun?”
Jungkook doesn’t say anything.
“Kicking your ass,” he pauses and before Jungkook can do anything else, Eric swings down hard, landing on Jungkook’s body knocking the breath out of him. Jungkook stumbles backwards, holding his stomach, he lands again on the ground with a clunk. Eric stands over him, before taking out his mouthpiece, “And stealing your bitch you invited tonight.”
“Goddammit,” you mutter watching the scene unfold in front of you. No one knows what they’re saying to each other over the noise and you honestly couldn’t care. You just want Jungkook to get up and finish this shit.
Jungkook stands up, though with a visible wince in his face. He’s breathing heavy and is filled with pure rage. The fourth bell rings and it doesn’t take long for Jungkook to attack him. Jungkook is fast and furious, landing punch after punch and you’ve never been happier for someone to get their ass kicked. Jungkook lands a punch straight across the face, causing Eric to stumble backwards. Even though you know nothing about boxing, Eric looks exhausted where Jungkook looks ready for more. With everything left in Eric, he starts coming after Jungkook. Jungkook blocks until he can’t block no more, but something in Jungkook’s stance changes. Jungkook steps forward, his right hand landing straight on Eric’s face cause his form to break. Jungkook steps quickly again, his left hand bringing an uppercut to Eric’s jaw.
The room nearly falls silent as Eric loses balance, going down straight on his back and head. When he hits the ground, the room erupts in a roar so loud it nearly deafens you.
“Holy shit!” Taehyung exclaims. The ref is down on the ground, counting down from 10, and then it’s at 5 and then 3 and then—
“Ladies and gentlemen, Jeon Jungkook wins this rematch!” The ref grabs Jungkook’s hand and holds it up over his head and you find yourself jumping up and down, pulling Taehyung down for a hug.
“Taehyung oh my fucking god!” You exclaim. He smiles brightly at you.
“I told you, he knows what he’s doing,” he says and you nod. You couldn’t deny it now—as stupid as Jungkook was for getting involved in this, his talent for the sport was extraordinary. “Come on, let’s get to his locker room,” Taehyung pulls you by your hand and you make your way back to where you were earlier.
Jungkook hasn’t arrived yet, but you find Yoongi already in there, setting out a first aid kit.
“Hey guys,” he says, “Great fight, huh?”
“Yeah, it was brilliant,” Taehyung says. The door opening catches your attention and Jungkook walks through with Jimin.  Your eyes instantly meet and you can’t even stop yourself from running to him and throwing your arms around him. He exhales deeply with a sharp wince, returning your bone crushing grip with his own.
“Alright lovebirds, he needs to get fixed up,” Yoongi’s voice interrupts you two. You hesitantly let him go and he sits down in front of Yoongi, sitting forward on his knees. He’s still breathing heavy, dripping sweat everywhere.
“Fucking hell Jungkook, since when do you box southpaw?” Taehyung pushes his shoulder slightly and Jungkook only laughs as Yoongi wipes away the blood on his eyebrow.
“I’ve been working on it for awhile,” he says, “Just never had the right time to use it… until tonight at least,” he says giving you a glance. “Eric is all talk, no bite. I can’t fucking stand him.”
“Well, I don’t think you’ll be boxing him again anytime soon,” Jimin says, “He’s embarrassed himself twice now.”
“Yeah, agreed,” Yoongi chimes in, placing one of those bandaids that pull the skin together like stitches above Jungkook’s eyebrow. “No one will want to box you now knowing you can southpaw.”
Jungkook looks at you and you furrow your eyebrows at him. He said he wasn’t going to fight after this, but the way they are talking—it sounds as if he is.
“Well, I think my boxing career is probably over after tonight,” Jungkook speaks up as if he could read your mind. He tears his eyes away from you as the others look confused.
“What?!”
“Why?”
“Jungkook c’mon!”
“Guys,” he breathes out, “I made a promise, okay? Besides, I have enough money now, I don’t need anything else.”
Your features soften as you listen to his words. His promise was to you. A smile grows on your face as you watch his body calm down from his intensified state. Once Yoongi is finished, he packs everything up. The five of you talk amongst yourselves before Taehyung turns to you.
“You ready to go home?” He asks.
“I can take you home,” Jungkook says before you can answer.
“Okay,” you give him a small smile that he returns.
“Okay then, I’m gonna head out, I won’t be home tonight Jungkook,” he says.
“I know I know, at your girlfriends,” Jungkook swats his hand and Taehyung flips him off before leaving.
Jungkook stands up throwing on a shirt and slipping into Birkenstocks. “Come on,” he says to you, holding out his head. You gladly take it and it feels more like home than home ever has.
_____
“Fuck Jungkook, how much money is this?” You ask him as he hands you a white envelope as he unbuckles himself in the driver seat. The envelope is thick and you peak out of curiosity, your jaw dropping.
“I told you,” he says snatching it back from you, “As much food as I’ve bought you lately, hopefully this will last.”
You swat at his sarcastic comment before letting out a laugh. Instead of going home, you asked Jungkook to go anywhere but there. You’re parked outside of his apartment complex, which was fine with you. The two of you needed to talk. Not much talking goes on as a silence falls between you two.
“Y/N.”
“Jungkook.”
The two of you laugh as you speak at the same time.
“You first,” you say, turning your body to face him fully.
He takes a deep breath before speaking, “I know I said it earlier but I really am sorry about this past week. There’s not an excuse that justifies me acting like a complete dick to you, especially when you’ve been nothing but nice to me.”
You stay quiet, unsure of what to say.
“And when I said you’re the best part of my day… I fucking mean it. I’m sorry for coming onto you like I have, I just,” he doesn’t finish, his eyes looking everywhere but you.
“Jungkook,” you get his attention again, reaching over the console to grab his hand, “Don’t apologize for that. Yeah, you’ve been a dick each time something happens between us but that’s the apology I care about.”
“I just don’t know how to say it,” he mutters, caressing your hand gently.
“So you’re really not going to box anymore?” you inquire. Jungkook was good, more than good... it couldn’t be easy giving up on that. 
He shakes his head, “No. I told you I didn’t want you worrying about me anymore. I keep my promises,” his smile his sweet and you swear your feel yourself melting more and more into his touch. 
“Jungkook,” you let out a deep sigh, “I didn’t realize how much I needed you in my life until we became friends again. You know almost everything about me and I don’t want anyone else to ever take your place…”
It’s hanging there by a thread—the words on your tongue—and you’re not sure you can say them and they feel constricting—but you know you have to and—
“I love you,” the words come from your mouth and you feel like you could puke. “I don’t know when or why, but I’m in love with you Jungkook. You’re all I think about anymore and I don’t want anyone else when you’re right here.”
Jungkook parts his mouth, staring at you with a look you can’t read. Fuck, you fucked this up for sure.
“Shit—I know that was so rushed and stupid. Fuck I’m an idiot—“
“Y/N,” Jungkook’s voice interrupts you and you try to hide within your own body from embarrassment. With your hand of yours in his, he pulls on it, forcing you closer to him. You look at him wide eyed before he presses his lips against yours firmly. As usual, his lips feel so good and you melt into him. This is good right? What the hell is going on? You pull away from him after a few moments, an unsure look on your face.
He nuzzles his nose against your own before speaking, “I’ve wanted to tell you that since the night of our graduation.”
“Really?” You ask as you feel your palms sweat, heart racing.
He nods, “I’ve been in love with you for god knows how long now.”
A smile creeps upon your face and you let out a sigh of relief. Jungkook watches you with interest, tucking some of your hair behind your ear.
“I can take you home whenever,” he says quietly.
You’re quick to shake your head,  “No, it’s okay… I can stay, if you want,” your voice trails off and you suddenly feel shy under his gaze.
You don’t notice how Jungkook bites his lip but he does say, “Yeah. Of course.”
_____
Jungkook’s apartment is how you remember it, though a lot quieter without Taehyung here. You’re sure the reason Jungkook’s apartment is spotless is because of him. He has always been clean and organized and Taehyung… well he was Taehyung.
“I’m gonna get in the shower, my room is in here if you wanna chill,” Jungkook says and you give him a small nod. He rids his shirt before he even closes the bathroom door and it makes you gulp. This is new territory for the both of you. The two of you just admitted your love for one another and you’re about to spend the night with Jungkook? And not in a friend way? Jesus Christ you could be tripping.
You walk into Jungkook’s room and it smells just like him. His bed is neatly made and his desk is sprawled with two computer monitors and some notebooks from school. His walls are decorated as you’d expect—a Korean flag hanging, a ‘Saturday’s Are For The Boys’ flag—typical—and a few Beta Tae Sigma plaques scattered. What catches your eye is a wall of neatly lined photos taped to the wall. You look around at all of them with a smile. Most of them are Jungkook and his frat brothers, Taehyung, a few of his older brother, there’s even a picture of you, him, Taehyung, and Jennie from high school. One that catches your eye the most is one of just you and him. It’s an old picture but the memories from that day flood your mind. It was from your first week of freshman year here at university. Both of your smiles are wide and you two are hugging each other’s frames closely. Jennie took the picture you remember. It makes you smile to yourself, butterflies entering in your stomach. Did you love Jungkook then and didn’t know it? The way you’re looking at him in the picture would say so.
You suddenly feel an urge to be close to him again. You’ve never been a ballsy person but as you look back at the bathroom door that’s closed, your desire to be touched again by Jungkook again overwhelms your senses. Closing your eyes briefly, you don’t need much more convincing before your stripping yourself of your jacket and shoes. You kick off your jeans and sweater, leaving you only in your undergarments. You tip toe to the bathroom, grabbing the handle, opening it easy.
The shower water is loud and there’s steam in the small quarters. Jungkook is humming to himself as you start to take off the rest of your clothing. With a deep breath, you grab the shower curtain, pulling it back. Jungkook’s back is facing you but he hears you instantly.
“Shit Y/N you scar—“ he stops mid sentence as he takes in your naked frame getting in the shower too.
“Hi,” you mumble meeting his eye contact.  
“H-hey,” he nearly chokes on his own air, trying to keep his eyes up from your breasts.
“Scooch,” you smirk at him to move to get underneath the water too. He does as you say watching you curiously. You’re in the process of wetting your hair when his chest is pressed firmly against your back.
“This wasn’t expected,” he says into your ear, his hands moving to grip your waist from behind.
“You’re the one that wanted me to go home with you,” you say giving him an innocent glance over your shoulder. He laughs biting his lip, pressing them against the skin behind of your ear. You lean into the physical contact, feeling almost all of your stress go away instantly.
You spin around to look at him fully as it’s a frenzy whose mouth collides with whose. He leans down to grasp your lips in their entirety, pulling you closer to him than you ever have been. He pulls you away from the water so it doesn’t get in your face as he presses you against the shower wall. His tongue dips in and out of your mouth, his hands free roaming over your breasts and down to your ass, whatever he likes within the moment. Your hands grip his dark locks as he moves his mouth from your mouth, to your neck, down to your chest. He waste no time taking your right nipple in his mouth and you exhale deeply at the feeling.
You pull his face back to yours, kissing him again not able to get enough of his lips. His hands trail down from your ass to the front of your thighs, getting closer and closer to your wet center.
“Is this okay?” He asks as his fingers rub slowly back forth between your entrance. You can barely speak as his touch is setting you on fire but you manage to nod.
“Yes, please, Jungkook,” you say. He enters one finger, then another stretching you out nicely. Fuck you forgot how good this felt with him.
“Fuck you’re so wet,” he breathes heavily and you glance down at his hardening cock. Your mouth waters at the sight. Jungkook lifts one of your legs and starts to take his fingers in and out of you slowly and agonizing. He fingers you deep and rough and you can already feel a climax coming.
“Shit,” you croak out as Jungkook rubs one of your nipples, kissing your neck. There’s a pain at the back of your head at his force pushing you against the wall but it’s easy to ignore when it feels so good below your waist. “Jungkook, I’m gonna come,” you say as the snap inside of you is about to break.
“Come on baby,” his voice is deep and groggy. As if on cue, you feel your climax wash over you and you’re not shy to be loud. You know no one is here so it doesn’t bother you one bit. Jungkook kisses you against feverishly as he pulls his fingers from you. You feel impossibly empty but you know what you want to do and you’re not near anywhere tired. Your hands travel down to his front, grasping his hard dick in your hands. God, he’s so big.
“Oh fuck,” Jungkook seethes through his teeth as you pull on the sensitive skin, all the way from his pubic hair down to the tip. He places a hand beside of your head, leaning forward against your forehead. His eyes are shut tightly and you lick your lips, wanting to take him in your mouth.
You push him away from you slightly and move down to your knees, your face front and center with his beautiful dick. You take no time to put him in your mouth which causes Jungkook to groan loudly.
“Y/N,” he says looking down at you. He’s never seen a better sight. You make sure to keep eye contact as you bob your head up and down his shaft. While one of Jungkook’s hands stays against the wall, his other grips your hair, fisting it into a makeshift ponytail. “Oh fuck—He pulls on your hair and it only makes you want to please him more. Your left hand go to his balls, the right helping you up and down his length. He pulls your hair again and you take as much of him as you can. His tip reaches the back of your throat and you gag around his length and Jungkook thinks he could actually cry. Watching you through half open lids, he decides this isn’t how he is going to come—not tonight at least.
He grabs your hair and pulls you away from him and you’re slightly confused when he brings you to your feet.
“Come on, I need to be inside of you,” he says and you nod eagerly as he turns off the shower. He leads you out of the bathroom in a frenzy, pulling up into his bedroom. You shut the door behind you and he pins you against it, kissing you hard and deep.
Both of you are dripping wet but neither of you care to dry off as he carries you to his bed. You settle on his lap as his hands rest on your waist tightly. Your hands grip his face just as tight but you’re careful not to touch his injury above his brow. You couldn’t believe he was just fighting two hours ago—that seemed like forever ago compared to now. A lot can change in a short period of time and it makes you slightly chuckle against his mouth.  
“What?” He breaks the kiss asking you with a hazy grin.
You shake your head, “Nothing,” you smile pushing his hair from his forehead. You liked seeing it. “I love you,” you repeat. And you probably won’t stop, ever.
“I love you too,” he says, “So much.”
“Let me ride you,” you whisper in his ear and his eyes light up like a child. “Are you clean?” You ask him. 
He nods quickly, “You?” You nod in response and both of you feel excited and anxious. 
You rub your hand against his length again and you hold it up as you adjust yourself to sit on him. As soon as his tip enters you, a shiver runs down your spine. As you sink yourself lower, groans come from both of your mouths, a deep moan erupting from you when you bottom out.
“Oh my god,” you breathe in and out to control yourself.
“Ride me baby,” he says and you start to move your hips against his. He fills up every inch of you and it feels so good. Your hips lift away from his and he chases them with his own thrusts. He kisses your neck as you throw your head back, your hands digging into his shoulders for leverage.  
“Fuck Jungkook,” you say seeing stars in your eyes, “You feel so good,” you whine.
“You have no idea,” he says against your sticky skin, one of his hands bruising into your waist helping you ride him in a fluid motion. “Goddammit,” he says.
As you grind against him, your clit rubs against his pubic hair, sending your toes curling. He senses that you’ve found your sweet spot against him and places his thumb there instead to rub the sensitive bud.
You feel yourself inching closer and closer to a second climax when Jungkook stalls your motion.
“Lay on your stomach,” he breathes and you do as he says climbing off of him quickly. He doesn’t even give you time to get there all the way before he’s grabbing your hips to pull your ass to him. He slides right into you and you nearly scream into his mattress. Your hands grip the sheets as he fucks you deeper from behind. He smacks your ass once, twice sending a loud whine from your mouth.
“Fuck, fuck, fuck,” you mutter trying to focus on Jungkook’s whines and small ministrations from his mouth. He reaches forward, rubbing your clit again and you want to die and go to heaven at the feeling. Neither of you try to be quiet anymore as you feel the second orgasm coming over you. You clench and unclench around Jungkook’s length as he stalls his thrusts to feel the action.
“Come inside of me,” you say, knowing both of you are clean and you have an IUD.
“Jesus,” he breathes, picking up his pace again chasing after his own high. As the sensitivity becomes too much, Jungkook finally lets go, coming deep inside of you. He holds your hips close against him, trying to deepen his climax as far as possible. The hot cum inside of you feels good and you moan at the feeling.
When Jungkook finishes completely in you, he pulls out with a sigh. You collapse against the bed, completely spent. Jungkook finds a clean rag in his pile of clean laundry and is quick to clean yourself and him up. You feel like you can barely move as Jungkook joins you in his bed. He turns you over to face him and he kisses you gently which you return happily.
“I love you,” he says for the third time tonight, kissing your nose.
“I love you too,” you entangling your legs together. The room is silent apart from your breathing and you’re about to go to sleep when he nudges you with his hand.  
“Come on,” he says.
“What?” You ask.
“Let’s actually take a shower now since someone wouldn’t let me,” he eyes you with accusation.
You squint at him before flipping him off. “Fuck off.”
_____
The next morning you wake up with Jungkook hugging you from behind, his face nuzzeled in your hair. You have no clue what the time may be, but you since it’s early by the way the birds chirp out the window. You stretch out your arms as best as you could and try to move your legs, but it doesn’t work since Jungkook’s heavy legs are tangled with your own. You’re tempted to fall back asleep but when Jungkook moves behind you, you turn to see his ruckus. You’re met with his brown eyes and you jump slightly, not expecting to see him awake. Both of you let out the faintest of laughs, not saying anything.
Jungkook leans over and kisses your lips, “Good morning.” His voice is groggy and he shuts his eyes again as you fully turn your body to his.
“Good morning,” you respond, watching the way his chest rises and falls gently. “How’d you sleep?”
“Hmm, really good,” he mumbles. You are about to join him in closing your eyes again until a loud rumble comes from your belly. Jungkook laughs.
“Hungry much?”
“Starving,” you groan, “I didn’t eat dinner last night.”
“Why not?”
“I was too nervous before your match… I thought I would yak if I ate,” you answer. Stupid, you know, but it was your train of thought last night.
He opens his eyes again, “Let’s go to the diner for breakfast… employee discount.”
You glare at him, “Is that all I am to you? A fucking employee discount,” you say saracastically.
“And my girlfriend if that helps?” He raises an eyebrow. Your cheeks heat up and you smile.
“Welllll, since my boyfriend is rich now and gets a discount, I’m assuming he’s paying.”
He smirks, “Obviously.”
“Will you take me to my place so I can change? And then we’ll go?”
He nods, his hand caressing the side of your body, “As much as I wanna stay in bed, I could really go for pancakes right now.”
“Waffles are superior,” you remark.
He frowns with a disgusted face, “Get the fuck out of my bed you heathen.”
_____
Jungkook insisted on coming up to your apartment with you because he didn’t want to wait in the car, but you know he just wants to see you change in front of him. Boys are all the fucking same.
As you fumbled with the key, the door opens and whatever Jungkook is saying to you is suddenly drowned out when you see—
“Jennie?”
“Taehyung?”
The names leave yours and Jungkook’s mouth as you watch the scene in front of you. Jennie is sitting on the counter, Taehyung in between her legs with a coffee cup in hand. Could be worse but what the fuck is going on?!
“Shit,” Jennie says pushing away Taehyung. “Hey guys,” she smiles awkwardly. You and Jungkook look at each other confused before Jungkook speaks.
“Uh, Taehyung?” He asks and Taehyung is. as red as a tomato.
“Oh fuck,” Jennie mutters shaking her head. She looks at Taehyung for backup.
Taehyung pinches his nose before speaking, “Um… we’re dating.”
You and Jungkook have the same reaction as your mouth drops.
“Jennie is your secret girlfriend?” Jungkook asks.
“Surprise,” Jennie smiles again looking at you.
You look at Jungkook and shake your head at the four of you. What a fucking cliché.
The four of you go to breakfast together that morning and it’s like old times, just with a sprinkle of something new. As long as the four of you have known each other, you’ve always had each other’s backs. Even now, with you and Jungkook and Jennie and Taehyung—you know that would never change from here on out. Turns out, Jennie just thought her and Taehyung were friends with benefits, while Taehyung was telling everyone he had a girlfriend because he was that smitten with her. The four of you laugh at the situation at hand and you couldn’t believe everyone was back together... like this. As Jungkook’s pancakes and your waffles arrive, Jungkook’s beaming smile lighting the whole room you think to yourself—this is how it’s supposed to be. 
8K notes · View notes
queenshelby · 4 years ago
Text
Just Friends - Cillian Murphy Imagine
Featuring: Cillian Murphy x Reader
Warning: SMUT
Words: 5034
Foreword:
I have never written anything for an actual person. For my own comfort, I will not be referring to Cillian’s actual family and, instead, I have created two small biographies for the Reader and Cillian.
Biography:
The Reader:
The Reader is 24 years old and recently moved to Dublin with her 5 year old son, Max in order to take up a fantastic job offer.
Max’s father isn’t interested in a relationship with his son and separated from the Reader pretty much as soon as she found out that she was pregnant. 
The Reader is a novelist and editor for the Irish Times. 
The Reader’s interests include books, listening to records, theatre and attending live music gigs. 
The Reader has a close relationship with her grandmother who is 65 years old and a writer herself. She also lives in Dublin with her second husband, who is originally from Galway.
 Cillian: 
Cillian is 42 years old in this story. He is divorced from his wife Siobhan and has two kids, Charlie (6) and Hendricks (8).
He lives in a town house in Dublin and shares custody.
In this story, he finished filming Season 4 of Peaky Blinders about three months ago, which is when the Reader first met him.
---------------------------
JUST FRIENDS
Three and a half months ago you moved to Dublin to take a position as editor at the Irish Times. Initially, the move was daunting to you as you were a single mother and moving your son to a different preschool concerned you.
Fortunately, your grandmother was living in Dublin as well and offered to help you with looking after your son, Max. She was a retired novelist herself and you always had a close relationship with her. Having her around was a blessing.
Over the years, you also met some Irish writers and established good relationships with them. Therefore, finding friends in Dublin was not an issue.
One of your best friends was a play writer from London and was working in Ireland at the time, promoting her theatre play called ‘Blessings’. She introduced you to a bunch of people, most of which were working in the entertainment industry in some way or another.
Whilst all of your new found friends were a fair bit older than you, you related to them. You had interests in common and most of them had children, just like you. They understood that sometimes plans had to be cancelled and flexibility was limited. Having children is a commitment which many of your younger friends didn’t understand. You weren’t interested in late nights because a young child meant early mornings. For this reason, you would much rather attend a dinner and board game night as a opposed to a night club.
And this is how you met a very interesting man named Cillian. Three months ago, your friend Orla invited you to a board game night with a couple of her friends. Cillian was pretty much the only other single person in attendance and, since this was a board game that had to be played in teams of two, you and Cillian were paired up with him.
He was funny and smart and very attractive. You had a good time that night and even won the game with your combined knowledge of random trivial facts.
He was a fun person to be around and you had several common interests.
Over the next few months, you spent a fair bit of time together, mostly with other friends but sometimes alone when your friends were doing things as couples with their partners.
Just recently, you went record shopping together and the weekend before last you and another friend of yours would take all of your kids to Dublin Zoo for the day. Your son Max developed a great friendship with Cillian’s youngest son Charlie. Playdates were a common occurrence.
While both of you separately explored the dating world, you really enjoyed Cillian’s company as a friend and he enjoyed yours and you would often chat about the mishaps you encountered and laugh about them. Dates gone wrong was one of your favourite topics.
The last relationship Cillian had was with a co-worker, which was far from ideal. They’ve met on set of one of his movies about a year after he divorced from his wife, but things didn’t go as planned and the relationship didn’t last. It ended about four months ago, being just one month before you met.
The last relationship you had was over a year ago and it also didn’t last as your boyfriend couldn’t deal with the fact that you were a single mum and that your son always came first.
For Valentines Day this year, your friends set up dates for each of you. It was disastrous. Neither of you were interested in committing at this point and you both were rather flustered about your friends’ efforts after you both had told them not to bother.
You were happy singles.
Theatre Night
As happy singles, you decided to go and see your friend’s new play ‘Blessings’ with some of your other friends on the night you all managed to be child free for once. It took a while to organise but was worth the effort.
‘Hi Max, how was preschool?’ Cillian asked as he opened the door to your townhouse for Cillian while you were in the bathroom, putting up your hair.
Max met Cillian numerous times and got along with him very well. After all, Cillian had a son the same age as Max.
‘Good. Do you want me to show you what I made?’ Max asked while you waived at Cillian from the bathroom.
‘Absolutely, show me’ Cillian said with a smile as he followed Max into the living room.
‘Look’ Max said as he held up two paintings.
‘Wow, is that a T-Rex?’ Cillian asked, causing Max to nod with excitement.
‘That’s very cool…he looks super scary’ Cillian added just as there was another knock on the door.
It was your grandmother who was here to pick up Max for his sleepover at her house.
You opened the door and asked Max to get his bag from the living room which you had packed for him earlier.
‘Nan, this is my friend Cillian’ you said as you introduced Cillian to your grandmother.
‘Hello Cillian, I am Margot. I loved Grief is a Thing with Feathers. It was such an intense play’ she said, knowing right away who he was despite the fact that you had never mentioned him to her before.
‘Thank you Margot and I loved By The Sea, it was a fantastic book’ Cillian responded. He read the book after you told him about your grandmother. Your writing style was very similar to hers and he always loved a good book.
‘Oh thank you very much. Now Max, are you ready?’ your grandmother asked.
Max was ready and you said goodbye, giving him a big hug and thanking your grandmother for looking after him for the night.
While Cillian waited in the living room, you finished your make up and slipped on your shoes.
‘Thank you for picking me up. I really have no idea where this place is’ you said as you grabbed your bag and the two of you were heading out of the door.
‘Any time Y/N, it isn’t far from here actually’ Cillian said.
As you were walking to the Arthouse Theatre you talked about all sorts of things, music, childcare and books.
It was a cold night in Dublin and you were probably underdressed for the occasion.
At the Arthouse Theatre you met up with another two friends of yours. They were both married, to each other, and shared three children. Luckily for them, they had a baby sitter that night.
The play was amazing and you all enjoyed it with a few glasses of wine which were served at the theatre. Cillian had good taste when it came to wine and you usually sought his guidance on what to order.
After you left the theatre, you felt awfully hungry. You hadn’t eaten dinner that night.
‘I am starving, is anyone else up for Pizza?’ you asked your three friends, including Cillian
‘We would love to, but only have a baby sitter until 9pm, sorry’ Amanda said, explaining that she and her husband had to head home fairly soon.
‘What about you Cilly?’ you asked.
‘I would love some Pizza, let’s go to Pizzinis’ he said.
Both you and Cillian said goodbye to your friends and made your way to Pizzinis.
As usual, it was packed and there were no table available.
‘Wanna grab them take away and go back to my place? I’ve got wine and you can show me this new album you were talking about earlier’ you said.
‘Sounds good, let’s do that’ Cillian said before ordering two pizzas.
More than Friends
You arrived at your apartment about 30 minutes later and Cillian put on some music. He found this new Irish band he liked and you were really keen to hear them.
‘Hmm Indie…I like it’ you said as he connected his i-phone to your speakers.
‘Wine?’ you asked as you grabbed a bottle of wine from the shelf.
‘Yes please and thanks’ Cillian said as he put the pizzas on the table.
‘I was meant to ask you, how was your Valentine’s date?’ Cillian asked before taking the first bite of the pizza.
‘Oh god, don’t remind me on it please’ you said with a laugh.
‘That good ey? What happened?’ Cillian laughed.
‘He was weird. He basically left after I told him about Max’ you responded.
‘I think that sometimes guys your age might be a bit freaked out by the fact that you have child. I can’t say that I blame them. I couldn’t imagine myself becoming a step father when I was in my 20s’ Cillian said.
‘He was 32’ you responded.
‘Well maybe he was just weird and you are just unlucky when it comes to dating’ Cillian laughed.
‘Yeah, maybe…I am just over dating’ you said…’What about your date?’ you asked.
‘Pretty average. I mean she was nice but had no sense of humour’ Cillian said.
‘Oh what, wait…she didn’t laugh at your Irish jokes?’ you laughed.
‘Outrageous I know. I mean how could she not?’ Cillian joked.
‘Here is to failed dates’ you said as you held up your wine glass for a toast.
‘To failed dates’ Cillian responded with smile.
Over the next hour or so, Cillian and you finished both pizzas and talked about books, including the book you were currently writing, music and embarrassing things your kids had done.
Quite music was playing in the background by then while you talked and laughed together until Cillian brought up a specific book he had read recently, written by a writer named J A Hanson, which he said reminded him on you in a way.
‘I have read all of her books and I really wish I could write romance as well as her’ you said.
‘Her books aren’t exactly romantic’ Cillian responded.
‘Her storylines aren’t romantic, but the character she uses in all of her books involves herself romantically with several other characters throughout the series. The way she writes makes you relate to the character even in these intimate moments’ you explained.
‘She is 60 and probably speaking from experience. I have read in a paper a few months back that she had quite an interesting and adventurous youth in the 70s and 80s’ Cillian said.
‘Free Love…Yeah, I have read this too’ you laughed. ‘Perhaps I just need some inspiration to get over my block, otherwise I will never finish this damn novel’ you said as you poured yourself some more wine.
‘You don’t have to answer this, but when was the last time that…?’ Cillian asked and, before he could finish his question, you interrupted him.
‘That I had sex? Gosh…well over a year ago’ you responded, causing Cillian’s chin to drop.
‘Over a year? Seriously? I mean, surely, a woman like you would get plenty of offers…’ Cillian said, not knowing what else to tell you.
‘A woman like me? What do you mean by that Cilly?’ you asked with a slight giggle.
‘Well, you are attractive, smart and funny. You would get a fair bit of interest’ Cillian responded.
‘So, you think I am attractive?’ you asked with a smirk, causing Cillian to choke slightly on his wine. He regretted what he had said almost instantly, causing awkwardness between you.
‘Well yeah, I think you are an attractive woman’ Cillian said quietly. ‘In a totally objective way of course’ he added, while, just in this moment, you observed his facial expressions.
You observed him drop his eyes to your lips as he said it, and then lower to the place where your shirt opens at the collar, the buttons undone to below your collarbone.
He pressed his lips together. ‘I think I should probably get go…’ he said, and, before he could finish his sentence, you leaned in and kissed him suddenly, like the peck you give a boy you like on the school bus the second before you jump up and get off – a brief bravery without a plan.
He was caught by surprise.
‘Y/N’ he said and, before he could say something else, you apologised to him for what just happened.
‘I am sorry Cilly, I don’t know what just came over me’ you said.
‘It’s alright, I shouldn’t have said what I said. It was inappropriate’ Cillian said.
But, with Cillian’s response, you couldn’t leave it alone and asked ‘So, you don’t think that I am attractive?’ you asked, giggling slightly with some embarrassment.
‘Any man who thinks that you aren’t attractive is clearly blind. But, with that being said, it doesn’t matter what I think, you are 18 years younger than me and it would be wrong for us to take this further. Despite, I don’t want to fuck up our friendship’ Cillian said calmly.
You didn’t know what to say to his comment and, instead of using any words, you ran your hand gently over the side of his perfect face while biting your lip.
‘Just one kiss between friends then, we can blame the red wine after’ you whispered as a comfortable hot feeling washed over you. You felt some sort of attraction towards Cillian since the moment you met him, but didn’t want to admit it to yourself, let alone to him.
‘I don’t know Y/N’ Cillian said as you leaned closer towards him and pressed your lips onto his. You knew he was reluctant but he didn’t push you away.
To the contrary, as you kissed him, his hand came up in a rush to the back of your neck, pulling you in closer. Within seconds, his tongue slipped between your lips, whispering over your teeth and began dancing with your tongue.
You noticed the brush of his stubble on your cheek, the press of his lips on yours and the way his mouth tasted, a mix of minty gum and red wine.
It shouldn’t have been so hot, but it was. The taste of him, the smell and flavour, and it made you whimper in your throat. You knew this was one off and you didn’t want this moment to end.
‘Are you ok?’ he asked after he pulled back a little and paused. He was scanning your eyes and there was a cautious considering from his side. You could tell that he was surprised about what had just happened.
‘Yeah, you?’ you said as you couldn’t help yourself but stare into his baby blue eyes.
‘Yes’ he said as he cleared his throat slightly.
There was an awkward silence in the room and you couldn’t stand it.
You build up all of your courage again and leaned over him, pressing your lips onto his once more.
Cillian didn’t hesitate then.
His tongue slipped right back into the same spot than before, before his lips then moved over your face and down to your neck, leaving gentle bites and kisses.
Cillian’s hands were busy touching you at the same time his lips were trailing over your neck.
One of his hands was in your hair at the back of your head while his other hand was moving down to press the small of your back so that your body was pulled forward into his.
As you were exchanging passionate kisses, you could feel the shape of him, the firmness of his body against yours, your legs pressing into his and his chest pressing into your breasts. You could also feel his erection through his jeans, hard as anything, rigid and warm against your tummy.
By this time, you wanted more than just kisses.
‘Sleep with me, just that once’ you whispered.
‘I can’t Y/N, you are 24, it is not right’ Cillian said pulling away from you.
‘It’s just sex Cilly, I am old enough for that’ you laughed.
‘Yes, but I don’t want this to ruin our friendship’ Cillian said.
‘It won’t. There are no strings attached, it’s just sex. Unless you don’t want me’ you responded. ‘Although I think you do’ you giggled as you ran your hand over his pants, feeling his erection.
Your comment made Cillian chuckle.
‘This is a one off, alright?’ Cillian asked, causing you to nod.
‘One off…and it stays our little secret’ you said before smashing your lips back onto his for another minute or two.
After you exchanged more passionate kisses you stood up.
‘Common, I show you my bedroom’ you said cheekily, taking his hand and guiding him towards the bed.
‘Can you help me with this please’ you asked, turning around to face the bed. Your back was now facing Cillian and you pulled your hair aside so that he can open the zipper of your dress.
Cillian unzipped your dress carefully, exposing your black lace underwear.
As you pushed your dress down onto the floor, Cillian began kissing your back and neck, while running his hands over your breasts and stomach, all the way down in between your legs.
You let out a brief moan before turning around to face him and help him pull his t-shirt over his head, exposing his perfectly shaped biceps.
Looking into his eyes, your hand glided gracefully, for once, past Cillian’s belt buckle and into the holy crevice of his Calvin Klein briefs. His cock was hard and ready.
You moved it between my your slowly, relishing his obvious eagerness.
You used the other hand to unbuckle his belt and unzip his jeans, shortly after which he pushed them down to the floor while your other hand never left his warm and hard cock.
After the jeans came off, Cillian pressed his lips back onto yours while using his skilled hands to unclip the back of your bra. The bra also landed on the floor within seconds.
‘Lie down’ he whispered into your ear. You obliged and crawled onto the bed, facing him.
He loomed over you, climbing on to the bed as you scooted backwards further so that he could straddle your hips while you pushed up against him, wanting the rub and friction against you.
Cillian kissed you passionately as one of his hands moved in between your legs.
He could feel your body tensing up as he ran his fingers over the top of your panties
After all, he knew that it had been a while since you’ve been with anyone. He knew to take it slow and give you some reassurance.
‘Just relax’ he whispered into your ear with his thick Irish accent as he edged his fingers over the lace of your panties, his hand leisurely rubbing up and down the length of your squirming crotch, until he pulled your underwear aside and slipped two fingers inside of you.
You could feel your mouth widen and a loud moan escaped you as he teased the full mound of your clit. The stroke of his thumb was purposeful and steady on your firm, dripping pulse while his fingers plunged in and out of you, sinking further and further.
You held onto him tightly as the slipperiness he found made it easy for him to penetrate you with his fingers. You were so wet.
You shuddered at the pattern, shocked to find it could still stun you, unlocking newfound levels of moisture and desire, even when you began to meet the repetition of his thrusts. You naturally tilted and buckled beneath him.
As he was pushing his fingers in and out of you, he trailed kisses down your neck while your hands clutched at his shoulders, scratched down his back, held him tighter to you as I screamed into his skin.
Cillian’s breath grew more desperate and rugged.
‘It seems like we should take these off’ he said, causing you to nod with anticipation.
‘Don’t move’ Cillian ordered as he lowered himself on the bed while removing your lace undies.
Within seconds, Cillian’s lips were an inch away from your crotch, where he painted your inner thigh with tiny and soft kisses.
Cillian pushed your legs apart gently and you knew what would be next. You have read about this many times but this was the first time any man had gone down on you before and you were nervously biting your lip.
You tried hard to relax as Cillian’s lips finally reached your entrance, tasting the evidence of how much you wanted him.
‘Oh god, fuck’ you moaned as his head dove between your legs. His tongue prodded you softly, short licks against your clit.
Instantly, all restraint and reservations you had vanished. You were relaxed completely as his tongue danced and writhed inside of you.
With each skillful stroke, your thighs clenched. But you still needed more and he read you just right; he didn’t stop as you pushed yourself up the bed. Instead, he held you steady, causing you to look down at him and watching his eyes widen as they met yours, reacting to the rush of your wetness.
‘Cillian, oh god…you need to stop, I am so close’ you moaned, not wanting it to be over. You never came more than once so you wanted to feel him inside of you first.
‘That’s good, just let go’ Cillian said quietly with a grin before he continued and slid two fingers back inside of you while whirling his tongue over your clit.
You couldn’t hold on any longer, no matter how hard you tried. Your exhales began to emerge as deepening sighs and you leaned my head back and lived out the fantasy that had flashed through your mind all along.
‘Oh god Cillian’ you moaned as your back arched and a rush of ecstasy flew through your body. You grabbed onto Cillian’s hair as he sucked every drip from you as your orgasm flooded your body.
As you came down from your orgasm, Cillian shuffled himself back up the bed, kissing you passionately.
You could taste yourself on his lips and you were ready for more.
‘I want to feel you’ you whispered after your lips drifted apart and while reaching for Cillian’s hard cock.
‘Do you have a condom?’ he asked, causing you to nod. You had purchased some before your Valentine’s Date, just in case you needed them.
You reached for the bedside table and opened the pack of condoms, handing one to Cillian.
Cillian was quick to get rid of his briefs and put on the condom, before positioning himself on top of you, in between your legs.
He shuddered a great rushing gasp of breath as he entered you. He couldn’t believe how good you felt, so tight.
You felt him push into you then, slowly and carefully, filling you completely.  
‘Cillian’ you moaned as you held onto him tightly as he slowly began to move.
With every thrust, you gasped, whimpered, soft mewling noises, begging for more.
You felt him all the way to your belly button and screamed out with pleasure, your hands taking the heat as he thrusted fast and deep.
As he picked up his pace, you got louder, groans becoming moans becoming shouts, and the bed frame thumped against the wall, louder and faster and louder and faster.
‘Oh god, don’t stop’ you moaned, his skin slapping against yours.
‘You are so beautiful’ Cillian said in between his moans before pulling out of you slowly and lifting up your legs above his shoulders.
He knew exactly that, this way, he would be reaching your g-spot while he was fucking you.
You were slightly surprised by this position but were flexible enough to run with it.
As he entered you again slowly, you let out a loud moan.
‘Fuck’ you moaned in between the high-pitched noises that escaped you.
‘Does this feel alright?’ Cillian asked, wanting to ensure that you are comfortable.
You nodded eagerly and whimpered a shaky ‘yes’ as he continued to thrust into you. He was right at your g-spot and you could barely control yourself.
He slowly picked up the speed and you could feel another orgasm coming on as the tip of his cock kept hitting your g-spot over and over again.
‘Cillian, oh my god, don’t stop…’ you moaned as you held onto his arms tightly.
You began to shake heavily as your orgasm washed over you and tears of joy escaped your eyes.
‘Fuck, Y/N’ Cillian groaned loudly as he felt your walls tightening around him. The sensation coupled with the sounds you were making sent him over the edge and he almost came in sync with you.
As soon as he came, you released your legs from his shoulders and he collapsed on top of you, kissing you passionately.
You could still feel Cillian pulsing inside you when the sudden oddness of what you had done washed over you.
‘Are we ok?’ Cillian asked as he slowly pulled out of you and removed the condom, disposing of it discreetly.
‘I think so’ you said shyly.
‘Good…because I really enjoyed this’ Cillian said as he ran one of his hands over your cheek gently.
‘Me too…plus, I’ve got some inspiration for my book now’ you said cheekily.
‘I am glad to having been of assistance. Make sure you credit me in the end notes’ Cillian said jokingly.
‘Hmm, if I did, it may become a best seller…Sex Scene Inspired by Cillian Murphy’ you said with laughter, causing Cillian to laugh also.
‘I should better get home’ Cillian said as he was playing with your hair. He really didn’t want to leave, but he felt as though it was inappropriate for him to stay the night.
‘You can stay here if you like…’ you offered, but Cillian declined.
After all, this was supposed to be a one off. You are nothing more than friends, or are you?
You accepted Cillian’s decision to leave and weren’t upset by it. You enjoyed your time with Cillian and slept well that night, snugging up in the doona which smelled like his aftershave.
Finishing the Book
The next morning, you got up early to begin writing the intimate chapter of your book. This was the chapter you had struggled with for a while and you finally felt comfortable writing it. If readers would know that, in this particular scene of your book, you were basically reliving your night with your friend, Cillian Murphy, that would be scandalous.
So, you decided to make sure that no one would ever find out about your little adventure.
Unfortunately for you, your grandma seemed to have a good sense of what was going on.
She was on time as usual and dropped Max back at your house at 10am.
‘Had a good night my dear? I can see you are working on your book.’ She said.
‘Yes nan, the play last night was lovely. It has given me some inspiration’ you said.
‘The play has given you some inspiration to write about orgasms?’ your grandmother asked with laughter as she read the screen on your lap top.
‘Nan! Oh my god, don’t read what I am writing’ you said with embarrassment.
‘Oh dear, it’s alright. Believe it or not, I used to write novels myself with a little hint of filth now and then. But, somehow, I don’t think that it was the play that gave you the inspiration to write this little naughty chapter. By looking at the bruises on your neck, perhaps it was your friend Mr Murphy who gave you this inspiration?’ your grandmother said with sarcasm.
‘Nan, no Jesus, please’ you said as your face became flushed.
‘Don’t be embarrassed dear’ your grandmother said. ‘It is good for you. I mean, he is handsome and I saw the way you looked at him yesterday evening…and the way he looked at you’ your grandmother continued.
‘There is nothing between us nan, we are just friends’ you explained with total embarrassment.
‘Alright dear, whatever you say’ your grandmother said, not believing a single word that came out of your mouth.
‘I better go, I have lunch with Alma later… I love you my dear’ your grandmother said before heading out of the door.
‘Love you too nan’ you said.
 WHO WANTS A SECOND PART OF THIS?
596 notes · View notes
tipsydipsydo · 4 years ago
Text
Tumblr media
Pairing: tall! & sub! Reader x dom! OT7 BTS
Gender of the Reader: male
Word Count: 2.3k  
Rating: 18+
Genre: Smut/PwP
Warnings: Dirty Language + Dirty Talk; Dom-/Sub-Dynamics; accidental overhearing of a phone call, Mentions of Exhibitionism & Voyeurism; Mentions of Sex Toys & Masturbation; slightly mentioned Double Penetration; mentions of Anal play; Praising; Petnames; some Degradation; Daddy-Kink; Teasing; slight Edging; the boys are teasing the poor reader to Death
A/N: Well- that was a quick writing. Instead of studying I decided to write this funny request and to use my procrastination in a better way than scrolling stressed through TikTok. I hope y’all like it!!
Status: unedited bc I am lazy and should study. 
Request: i want to request a drabble/one shot: sub taller male reader and his seven boyfriends in which he confidently talks naughty things with his friend on phone but when he realized his bf are watching, he became crazily shy because he is just a big cute boy, then his bf decided they want to test those ‘words’ he has said, poor boy =))
Requested by: anonymous 
[Links]:
▪My Writings
▪Blog Navigation
Tumblr media
「© tipsydipsydo」
This following story is my intellectual property and belongs only to my blog tipsydipsydo.tumblr.com!
I’ll not accept any kind of reposting, stealing or using/editing my work!
That includes reposting my content on other social media platforms too, even when you link me as the original author.
Thank you.
Tumblr media
After too many and super busy weeks full of work, you’ve finally managed to find a free afternoon in your schedule where your best friend and you have enough time for a nice, long telephone call on the couch. You are already over one and a half hour on the phone, exchanging the newest stuff that happened in your life with each other and joking around. Slowly your conversation turns their focus to your more private life and your bestie asks you about your polyamorous relationship with your boyfriends. At first just normal things like, how’s it going in general, how you all manage the relationship with all the different time schedules, how often it comes to fights and how you deal with that etc. Just normal stuff and  the ‘typical’ questions you’re already used to, when people realize that you’re not in a monogamous relationship. 
Your best friend and you grew up together. You met each other in elementary school, went through the curses of puberty as an inseparable team and even survived middle and high school thanks to the other one. Already in your teens, where both of you made your first experiences and got into your first relationships, your best friend had a guess that you’re not as straight as you want him to believe. No, they even assumed that you’re maybe not made for the typical monogamous relationship which the society preach every fucking day. 
Well, turns out that your best friend really knew you better than you did yourself back then but honestly, nowadays you’re thankful for their suggestions and that they gave you the save space you needed to dare to make new experiences in those directions. 
Nevertheless, they were still more than surprised when you introduced him to not only two or three boyfriends, no that you brought seven (!) other men to their birthday party two years ago. At first they were a little worried if you didn’t overload yourself with such a complex relationship dynamic and that it’ll turn out as a serious burden and not an enrichment for your life. Turns out, now it was their turn to make a false assumption about what’s the best for you and theu were more than happy to admit that everything turned out just fine. It truly makes their heart swell to hear the happiness in your voice through the phone everything you mention something about the boys. 
Quickly your phone call turn into an even more private talk and dedicate itself to the really interesting stuff. You’re sharing every detail in your life with another, so why should it stop when it comes to sex talk? You have absolutely no problem and any shame to talk freely with your best friend about your kinks and dirty thoughts. Sometimes you even think that you’re better informed about each other’s preferences better than your actual partner(s) are. 
“I think, I already told you that idea more than once... that I have a thing for exhibitionism and the thought of getting catched doing something ‘forbitten’ or ‘dirty’, right? Uhm... TMI but I don’t give a shit, whenever I am alone at home because they’re busy and we can’t meet for some days... I mastubate with some of the toys they’ve bought for me and imagine that they catch me. You know, when we have sessions with Dom and Sub Dynamics, they’re only temporarily and usually we go back to normal in the moment when the scene is over... that means, when I am alone and horny, I can do whatever I want to. I can jack off or fuck myself as much I desire and they wouldn’t say anything about it. It’s not like, I don’t appreciate my personal freedom when it comes to masturbation or that I want something completely different, no! We both already talked about that too, I don’t like the idea of Total Power Exchange, I prefer to be an independent person as soon as I walk out of the bedroom- okay, not only bedroom, we have sex in other places than the bedroom too- ANYWAY, what I wanted to say with that: ...”, you mutter and take a deep breath into your lungs. 
After holding such a long monologue your mouth dried up terribly and now you need quickly something to drink. You get up from the couch and walk over to the kitchen island to pour some soda into a glass. A satisfied hum leaves your throat after you took some gulps of your favourite sparkling sugar bomb. 
The whole time, where you moved around in the eat-in kitchen of the apartment, you are not that alone anymore as you thought you’d be, especially right in this moment. Namjoon, Hoseok and a boyish smirking Jimin joined you around ten minutes ago, leaning casually against the wall next to the door of the room and listen very interested to the conversation you have with your friend right now. They didn’t mean to overhear your private talk, they just wanted to know what kind of take-out food you’d prefer for tonight. 
Unfortunately your conversation turned out to be very, very interesting for them, so they decided to give you some more time to talk with your best friend about the sexual fantasies you have which they don’t know about... well, until now.
Hoseok texted the other boys in the group chat to join them in the living room as well, they need to hear those very important information too! 
Poor you, completely oblivious and naïve to what’s happening in this moment, not getting any kind of hint that not only your best friend would get those significant informations...
“...-what I actually wanted to say with that: I prefer to be independent in relation to all other non-sexual life-responsibilities. Well, that doesn’t mean we couldn’t increase the Erotic Power Exchange, right? To be very honest, I can’t get the fantasy of them taking my sextoys away and to forbid me to touch myself without their permission out of my head. I love to be their good boy and to get praises, I really do... but there is this thrill to be break the instructed rules, getting caught while doing it and getting punished for it. I want... I want to get called bad, filthy and dirty names, I want to be a disobedient, greedy and insatiable slut for them. I want to get spanked, edged and overstimulated, I want to get fucked into the mattress so bad, up to the point where I can’t get a single clear thought together and my brain turned to mush... I want to get used, ruined and wrecked by their cocks, getting my holes stuffed full with their cum and then plugged up, so nothing can run out anymore- God fuck, I should stop talking like that or I’ll get a serious problem! Well... sorry for so much detailed TMI, you know that this shit always happens when you tell me to stop overthinking and encourage me to spill everything that comes to my mind. Now you got every filthy detail you’ve asked for, you’re welcome.”, you joke sarcastically and facepalm yourself. You can’t believe how incredibly blunt and shameless you just threw your latest sex fantasy in every fucking detail at your poor best friend. 
Usually you’re more than shy to talk about such things, in your understanding the magic for your shameless mouth towards your best friend has to reside in the deep thrust you have in him and simply the knowledge that your relationship is platonic. It’s not like that you couldn’t trust your boyfriends wholeheartedly, god no! You know, that they would never kinkshame you for anything, 
it’s just... after sharing those thoughts it would result something out of it. You don’t want that they  think you’re a weirdo or that they only do specific things because they know it would turn you on. 
The other one just snorts in amusement when you voice this slight helpless apology, they can imagine the significant blush which has settled down on your cheeks. 
“Hey buddy, don’t apologize for that. There is nothing to apologizing for, I am way too curious for my own good as well and I need to make sure that you’re happy in your relationship, especially when it comes to the point if they are able to fulfill your sexual desires. I need to know that, believe me. Okay, there’s one thing... I knew you were submissive, my dude. But I didn’t expect that you’d be such a masochistic hoe and that you’d have such a thing for degradation, Jesus! Nevermind, more important: did you talked with them about that fantasy? Would they be down for this idea and would they like to be more in charge? Please do not tell me that you’re too shy to talk with them about it, not again! I tell you this every goddamn time, communication is key!”, your best friend says to you in a serious tone. 
Here you go again, getting scolded by your friend all over again. He is right, you know that... y’all already talked about ‘how to deal with certain kinks some of them or you have but the others aren’t into and how to not make them feel bad or insecure about it’ several times, you tend to overthink everything you have ever said to them all over again. You are always so flustered when seven pairs of eyes are looking at you, waiting for an answer. You are tall, even taller than Namjoon, but under their curious stares you feel always so small, fiddling with your fingers around like a little schoolboy. You love that about them, putting you into such a submissive place just with their aura and charisma and giving you the feeling as if they overtower you physically too. 
“I can absolutely agree with Y/BF/N, communication is key. Why didn’t you told us those nasty fantasies you have in your cute head up here, right away? Too shy again? Do we really need to call your best friend the next time to get some hints to your secret kinks, Babyboy?”, Taehyung rasps into your earshell and wraps his arms around you. He chuckles slightly as you squeak high-pitched in surprise. 
An equal surprised yelp of your best friend comes out of the speaker of your phone which takes Yoongi out of your hand and excuse you with the apology that ‘they need to have an important talk with you now and that you have to hang up unfortunately’. 
The display of your phone turns dark and Yoongi puts it on the surface of the kitchen island before he flashes you a dirty smile. That you’re mortified that they caught you spilling all those filthy fantasies to your best friend is the understatement of the century. Never and you mean never did you hoped so bad that the floor opens up and swallows you whole, saving you from this embarrassing misery. But Yoongi give you much time to drown in shame, coming up to you and connect your lips to a rough kiss. 
“God, I love it when our so sweet and shy Baby has such nasty and indecent fantasies in his head... why don’t you tell us these ideas in every single filthy detail once again? I think we could turn the information into some very good use, big boy~”, whispers the smaller one with blown-out eyes against your lips.
“...or would you prefer that we call you a needy cumslut, hm? The things I’ve heard give me the assumption that you want to get fucked stupid and pumped full with cum as if you are our personal playtoy?”, growls Jungkook and grabs himself a handful of your right asscheek, kneading it with a firm grip in his big palm. 
“Come on, big boy, admit that you want exactly the things Jungkook just said... I can feel how fucking hard you just got from his words... already so hard and swollen against my palm even though we barely touched you. You’re truly such a pathetic, needy slut... I bet you’d already cum in your pants if we just tease you enough... Am I right?”, chuckles Namjoon in his deep, arousal soaked timbre against your neck, nibbling at the sensitive spot of your Adam’s apple. 
“...what about we change our location to the bedroom and talk about the things you’ve said to Y/BF/N? Maybe we could try some of your newest kinks out? Would you like the thought of us watching you from the couch while you prepare your needy asshole for us? Showing us how you stuff you clenching rim with a girthy dildo? Wearing a cockring so you couldn’t cum without our permission? Prepping yourself all messy, whining for our finger, tongues and dicks in your ass like the greedy slut you are? Yeah, you’d love that thought.”, Seokjin teases you mercilessly, rolling your sensitive balls in his palm, just how you like it.  “Y-Yes, Daddies... I’d love to be a greedy cumslut for you... please turn me into one!”, you wisper. 
Tumblr media
@cys-mental-escapades​; @bangtanloverboys​; @btsxmalereaders​
448 notes · View notes
super-ion · 1 year ago
Text
I awaken to the smell of bacon and coffee and an empty spot next to me in the bed.
Damnit.
Even on her birthday she's making me breakfast. Five years since peace unexpectedly broke out and she still can't let herself sit still. On top of that, her augments make it so she only needs three hours of sleep.
I sigh and pull on one of her t-shirts. It hangs off my shoulders like a dress. I'm not a short person by any stretch, but she's got a good two feet on me. She won't say so in words, but I know she finds the sight adorable.
I wander into the kitchen, careful not to be too quiet… she really doesn't like being snuck up on. Seven years fighting Vesperians will do that.
There's a cup of coffee waiting for me… the #1 wife mug. She's got the #2 wife mug, half empty next to the stove. My coworkers at the mechanics corps got us the mugs as a joke wedding gift… The only time I've ever gotten her to drink from the #1 mug was when both of her legs needed to be serviced and she was bedridden for three days.
I wrap my arms around her thick frame and bury my face in her back.
"Oats and bacon will be ready soon," she mumbles flatly.
She's like that, direct and to the point, reluctant to speak too loudly, her voice is always flat and neutral. I suppose most people find off putting... It definitely took me a while to get used to it.
"Why are you cooking breakfast?" I murmur demandingly into her back. "It's your birthday."
It isn't really her birthday. She doesn't exactly have one specific date that she can point to between not existing and existing. Shortly after we started dating, I managed to badger her into picking one that we could celebrate. She picked the date that we met... and then I kissed her for the first time.
See, she may be a terrifying augmented super soldier, but deep down inside, she's a cinnamon bun.
"I like cooking breakfast," she replies.
I huff grumpily and release her from my embrace. She turns and leans down so I can plant a quick kiss on her lips.
I grab my coffee and wander into her workshop to see what she's been working on. It's not quite complete, tall jagged mountains (the Tetons I think), bathed in red gold by the sunrise. I'm pretty sure it's a commission, but she's working on it with the exact same love and joy that she would for one of her personal pieces.
I'm leaning close to admire the minute brushwork when the door chime rings.
"I got it!" I shout and scramble for the door. Lucky for me, she's preoccupied with cooking and I make it to the door before she can.
I swing the door open to greet the delivery bot. It's right on time. My face splits in a wide grin at the sight of the package it's holding before it.
I quickly sign the delivery slip and thank it profusely as I try my hardest not to snatch the package from its hands.
I close the door and I'm practically bouncing with excitement. She must have picked up my elevated heart rate because she pokes her head out of the kitchen.
"What is that?" she asks.
"This…" I reply, "is your birthday present."
She cocks her head and regards it as I offer it excitedly.
After a moment's consideration, she takes it cautiously and opens it. Her confusion deepens as she pulls out a swath of white fabric patterned with pink and red roses. She lets out a tiny gasp as she unfurls the dress.
"Okay, so…" I announce. "I found a tailor online who specializes in clothing for augments. I had this custom made."
She's staring at the dress in wonder.
"You wanna try it on?" I prompt.
She blinks at me like she's still surprised someone would encourage her to wear something like that… old habits die hard I guess.
I shoo her into the bedroom and start serving breakfast for the two of us (making sure to swap out the coffee mugs in the process, it's her birthday, she's #1 wife today, damnit).
She emerges from the bedroom a few minutes later and…
Oh my god, she looks radiant. She's trembling slightly and there are tears in her eyes, but she's grinning. It's more emotion than I see on her face most days. The dress fits her frame perfectly and she can't stop running her hands along the skirt. She unconsciously makes a little twirl, billowing the skirt out.
She hesitates slightly when she sees me staring. It's like she's almost embarrassed by the idea of being seen taking joy in something as frivolous as a dress.
I'm her wife and I love her. Her happiness is anything but frivolous. I bound out of my chair and wrap her in a tight hug.
"You look amazing," I tell her. "You like it?"
She nods, and tears are falling down her cheeks now. I grin and rub them away with my thumbs.
"Happy birthday," I whisper. "I love you."
"I love you too," she says, her voice cracking with the tiniest bit of emotion.
She’s a battle-scarred, jaded super-soldier loaded with biomechanical upgrades and chemical augments. All she wants to do is wear cute clothes and paint.
16K notes · View notes
rebeccccccaaa · 4 years ago
Text
ʜᴏʟᴅ ᴀ ʟᴏᴠᴇʀ ᴄʟᴏsᴇ
_________________________________
ғʀᴀᴛ ʙᴏʏ!sᴛᴇᴠᴇ ʀᴏɢᴇʀs x ʀᴇᴀᴅᴇʀ
sᴜᴍᴍᴀʀʏ: you and steve hooked up once and neither of you can forget that night
ᴡᴀʀɴɪɴɢs: smut 18+ minors dni plz, kinda rough? but of course major fluffy aftercare from soft boi stevie, bit of inexperienced reader and insecure reader
(accidentally written unprotected sex but this is fanfiction lmao plz be safe irl)
ᴀᴜᴛʜᴏʀ’s ɴᴏᴛᴇs: ive never participated in a challenge before and i think @honeysucklesteve is just the sweetest so hope you like it el! And congrats on 4k :T
__________________________________
Tumblr media
“And the interesting thing about that, mind I add…” the words of your professor falling short because you can’t shake the feeling of his eyes looking at you.
You kept your head low fighting the urge within you not to look back. A couple nights ago you landed yourself in the bed of the infamous frat president Steve Rogers and to make matters worse, you both major in American Studies meaning you share all of your classes.
You didn’t have much experience with guys in high school so it wasn’t surprising when you had the same experience in college. What was surprising was the fact you spent a night in the arms of one of the most handsome men you’ve ever laid your eyes on. Steve Rogers was a huge catch. Teachers loved him, girls chased him,and guys wanted to be him.
You remember that night so vividly.
The way his hands fit so perfectly on your hips. The way his lips felt so hot against your own burning skin; and moved perfectly against yours. The things he whispered in your ear. They way he held you close when you fell asleep in his arms. The way you hated yourself the next morning when you snuck out. The way your tummy flutters simply because he’s looking at you right now.
You breathed out shakily before turning your head to find his eyes with yours; he looked away the moment you did shyly, very unlike him. Fuck he was gonna be the death of you.
“And that should be the end of the lecture. I’m gonna go ahead let you guys go a little early. Have a good weekend everyone and make sure to check your emails,” the professor gathered his things and left.
You packed your things quickly trying your best to avoid his gaze that you knew was still on you. Steve packed quickly too before walking hot on your tail, just about to call your name until…
“Hey, Y/n,” Bucky called out.
“Oh, hey Buck.”
“It’s the weekend and as usual the guys and I want to party tonight. But the dean said one more noise complaint about our house and we get on academic probation so we’re asking a couple of people who might wanna come to the club with us.”
Behind Bucky you could see Steve walking towards you two and your stomach sank. Bucky and Steve were best friends and you don’t know if Steve told him that you guys slept together last weekend. What if something happens again tonight if you say yes. Why are you even thinking that something could happen again? Steve Rogers is way out of your league it was a miracle that you landed a chance to be his bed warmer in the first place.
“I’ll see you for lunch, man,” Steve said to Bucky patting his best friend's shoulders. His eyes lingering with yours until you had to pull away.
“I don’t think I should,” you told him, walking towards the door.
“Come on, Nat told me you're quite the party animal and you left early last week I didn’t get to see you in action,” Bucky chuckled, walking with you. You didn’t leave early…
“Buck,” you looked at him.
“Please?” he asked. You exhaled sharply rolling your eyes before walking away to your next class.
“Is that a yes?” he shouted, making you turn around with a cheeky grin. You got to your next class and noticed Steve sitting in a new seat today, particularly the one next to the seat you usually sit in. None of his housemates or regular friends took this specific lecture so he usually sat in the very back corner alone. But today here he is.
His head snapped up when you entered the room. You hesitantly sat down next to him still avoiding his eyes. You set up your laptop on the small table as did Steve; both your eyes glancing at each other quite awkwardly until Steve finally interrupts the silence.
“You coming tonight?” he whispered.
“What’s in it for me if I do?” you said playfully.
“A repeat of the best night you’ve ever had,” he said cheekily.
“Oh, really,” you chuckled sarcastically as he nodded with an overly proud smirk.
“Probably not,” you answer his question.
“Seriously? Why not? I can pick you up,” he said.
“Steve,” you warned.
“What? Afraid you won’t be able to resist me?”
“You’re so full of it,” you said, making you both laugh.
“You were full of my dick last week,” he whispered.
“Steve!” you punched his side making him laugh hard enough for other students to take notice of your ruckus.
“Welcome class, we’ll begin the lecture in one minute. I’m just gonna pull it up on the projector,” the professor said rushing in.
“Please come tonight,” he whispered.
“Why are you obsessed with me?” you joked.
“Fuck off,” he chuckled.
“If I say ok, will you shut up for the rest of the lecture?”
“Maybe,” he grinned.
“Then maybe I’ll come,” you smirked.
Throughout the lecture Steve paid absolutely no attention whatsoever. Steve had been thinking about that night just as much as you had. The way your neck craned to the side a bit, reminding him of when he littered marks and bruises all over last week. The way you subtly bit your lip in concentration but all that clouded his mind was lust remembering how you looked so pretty from above when he was settled between your legs.
He wanted you again so badly. He wasn't going to lie, it sort of hurt him when he woke up and you weren't there. He thought maybe there was something between you two, god knows the tension was overwhelming that night. You weren't the most frisky woman he'd been with but you were sweet; slight innocence with your intimacy. He craved you.
Steve leaned towards you, his fingers twiddling with yours. You tried your best to ignore his advances despite how much you equally craved him. He ran his nose along your cheek and jaw and your breathing quickened inhumanly.
"What are you doing?" you whispered.
"Nothing, just relax," he responded. As much as he wanted to drag you out of class and fuck you so good, he knew you'd rip him a new one if he did. No matter how he'd make you feel.
"No, we're in the middle of a lecture," you argued.
"I'm not doing anything," he said humorously, you were not humored though.
"Steve," you scolded when he pressed a faint kiss under your ear.
You knew a guy like Steve was horny practically twenty-four seven, but you didn't take him to be quite clingy. Especially with someone like you. His arm wrapped under yours. His other resting on your thigh. His head tucked in the crook of your neck. It wasn't particularly sexual, but it was intimate. Something normal to couples, and you two were not a couple.
"Please come tonight," he whispered, “If not I’ll come over.”
"Ugh fine," you grunted, your voice breaking into a giggle because you did somewhat enjoy this unfamiliar attention.
Steve continued to sit next to you during the rest of your classes for the day absent mindedly teasing you, playing with your fingers, twirling your hair between his fingers, leaning his head on your shoulder while he held your hand. Like geez, take a girl out already.
By the time you got back to your shared apartment with two of your closest friends you felt conflicted. Why the sudden shift in Steve? You two weren't exactly best friends before, just two people who shared classes and accidentally slept with each during a drunken night at a frat party.
"Hey, everything ok?" Wanda asked you noticing your inner battle.
"Uh, yeah. Kinda. No," you said defeatedly making the girls chuckle.
"What happened?" Nat asked.
"That guy, that I… you know."
"Fucked?"
"Nat!" you said embarrassed.
"Go on," Wanda encouraged.
"Well, I never told you guys but the guy was Steve," you said shyly.
"What!" the girls exclaimed simultaneously.
"You're lying," Nat laughed.
"You really went from zero to a hundred," Wanda giggled.
"Guys stop," you whined.
"All day today, he's been like super clingy. Holding my hand and pretending he's like my boyfriend."
"Wait, I thought you liked him?" Nat asked, confused.
"I mean I do, but it's sudden and I'm pretty sure it's only because he wants to get in my pants again, you know?" you rationed.
"Awe, I don't think that's true. I've known Steve for a bit and yeah he sleeps around sometimes but he's not a giant dick. Doing that would be way too shallow, especially for Steve," Nat said.
“Yeah but don’t you think it’s weird?” you asked.
“Look did Bucky ask you about tonight?” Nat asked.
“Yeah, he did- how do you know that?” you asked, confused.
“Oh- Uh,” Nat paused.
“She asked Buck to invite you,” Wanda snickered.
“Why?” you asked.
“Well, you never go out with us and the last time you did we thought you just went home but apparently you were getting laid,” Nat cackled.
“Oh my- shut up,” you huffed before storming off to your room.
“Wait! Can you at least come with us tonight?” Wanda followed you.
“No,” you giggled.
“Please!” both girls said at the same time. As you closed your door with a grin on your face not responding.
Hours later you laid on your bed lowly listening to the soft rumbling chaos from your comedic roommates. You stayed in your not so sexy undergarments and not so sexy sweatpants along with a hoodie you stole from your brother before you moved.
You ate the junk you’ve stocked up on the past few weeks feeling a bit glum. It’s not that you didn’t necessarily want to go, you would love to spend another night in that gorgeous man’s arms but there’s absolutely no way Steve is gonna want you the way you’d like him too. Not sober.
There was a subtle knock on your door and you called out knowing the girls were probably ready to leave.
"How do we look?" Nat asked, walking into your room with Wanda.
"Wow, you guys look hot," you said sitting up.
"You think Vis would like this or is it too much?" Wanda asked sheepishly, she's had a crush on the foreign exchange student Vis for the longest time and had yet to make a move.
"I think someone's gonna have a lucky night," you wiggled your brows suggestively, making her roll her eyes and blush.
"What about you, still chasing Bryce?" you turned to Nat looked extra sexy tonight.
"His name is Bruce," she rolled her eyes.
"And yes, I am," she chuckled.
"You're so weird," you giggled, Bruce didn't seem to particularly be Nat's type but hey, no judgement.
"I heard he's got like a monster cock," you said.
"Shut up," she pushed you playfully.
“It’s always the nerds,” Wanda giggled.
"Anyways, are you sure you don't want to come?" Wanda asked sincerely.
"I'm sure," you smiled.
"Steve's gonna miss you," Nat teased.
"Yeah, I doubt that."
"Well, stay safe, cutie," the girls waved heading to the Uber that waited outside for them.
"You too!"
You sighed before grabbing more snacks to stuff your face with. A couple hours went by of sitting around watching nonsense on TV for a bit. You ate dinner that was far from fine dining but it was available before slouching on your bed until the late hours of the night.
You were practically falling asleep, tired and dry eyes glued to the screen of your small TV when you got a knock at the front door. You check the clock by your bed wondering if maybe either of the girls left their keys, but it wasn’t even midnight yet.
You clutched your phone walking hastily to the front door as quietly as possible creeping up to the peehole to see who would be your unexpected guest.
“What the hell are you doing here?” you swung the door open.
“What the hell are you wearing?” Steve retorted.
“My jamas,” you rolled eyes stepping to side to let him in.
“Seriously what are you doing here?”
“I told you earlier, you didn’t come tonight so I came to you,” he said, taking his jacket off.
“Seriously?” you tried not to smile, but the action gave you butterflies.
“You promised to come. I missed you,” he said walking up to you.
“You’re so full of shit,” you giggled, staring at his devilishly handsome grin.
“Come on, whatcha doing?” he said, grabbing your hand and taking you to the room. You three had a fairly small apartment and your light was obviously the only one on in the whole apartment making it easy for him.
“Well, before you rudely invaded my home, I was stuffing my face with all kinds of junk watching TV,” you said to him making him scowl playfully at you.
“Well, then let’s finish the rest of your junk food then,” he said laying on your bed. You still couldn’t wrap your head around the sudden shift in attention. Steve was a guy who could have anyone and he’s chasing you for some reason.
You weren’t a blonde bombshell with a perfect hourglass figure that made guys want you left and right. You had flaws that drew people away and you don’t think Steve remembers that night like you do. What if he hates your body? What if he thinks you're annoying and suddenly leaves?
“Everything alright?” Steve asked you.
“Uh, sorta,” you answered honestly.
“Come here, talk to me,” he said, opening his arms. You couldn't help your eyes narrowing at him.
“What?”
“Do you even remember anything from that night?” you whispered.
“Where’s this coming from?” he asked.
“Steve, come on,” you chuckled.
“What?”
“Do you just wanna fuck now? Make it quick so you can go back to the party-”
“Woah, who said anything about fucking?” he stood up towering over you making you suddenly feel really small and shy.
“I mean that’s why you’re here, right?”
“I came because I told you if you didn't go out with us that I was gonna hang with you. I didn’t say anything about sleeping with you. If you really want I can go home but I wanted to hang out with you,” he said sincerely.
“Oh, I- uh,” you stuttered; well now you feel like a dick.
“We can just sit and keep watching TV until you want to go to sleep and I can head out,” he said, sitting back down on your bed. You sat beside him carefully watching his movements. He kept his eyes trained on the TV for a bit before locking his eyes with yours. You turned away quickly hearing him chuckle before sudden movement escalated behind.
Steve grabbed you from behind gently and leaned back so you laid on his chest. You could feel the hard plains of muscles on your back. And the way his strong wrapped perfectly around your waist, it felt heavenly.
Steve’s jaw tightened from the hypnotizing scent of your shampoo. He remembered it from that night not long ago and he couldn’t get it out of his head.
He wasn't going to lie, since that night all he could think about was how smooth your skin was under his fingertips. How pretty you sounded when he was settled between your legs. How good it felt when your fingers carded through his hair. He wanted you so bad.
He wanted to wake you up between your thighs again. Ravish you once more before breakfast, hell eat you for breakfast. But when you weren't there sleeping as peacefully beside him like the night before, his heart tugged. Did he say something wrong? Did he do something wrong? What if he hurt you?
He gave you space, clearly evident you hadn't wanted to talk to him but those few days went by and the same lingering stares and shy glances came back again and he craved you in his arms again.
When Nat asked him and Bucky to invite you again out to party, he really wanted to be with you that night even if you didn't end the night naked in each other's arms, just being around you was enough for him. Fortunately here he is with you, with arms wrapped around your waist and Steve couldn’t be happier.
You looked so fucking adorable to wearing sweats and a hoodie; he wishes it was one of his own. You had fluffy socks on too that had dog faces on them and he swears his heart melted. What you two were watching was making you laugh and each chuckle or giggle that came from you was like music to his ears.
He couldn’t help himself when his lips pressed against the top of your head. Your body momentarily froze before relaxing again in his arms. Your arms laid over his and tightened so you could cuddle into him even more. Your eyes felt heavy and the feeling of Steve’s lips slowly reaching your neck didn’t help you want to sleep.
When his cool lips grazed your burning skin, you could feel your skin burst into chills. You practically shuddered in his arms and your face grew hot when you did. It all becomes suddenly overwhelming and you jump off on his lap turning to him with a distressed expression.
“What happened? Did I do something wrong?” Steve said worriedly.
“You did just want to sleep with me,” you mumbled tears forming in your eyes.
“What! No, that’s not it,” he panicked; using you was the last thing he wanted you to think he was doing, and wanted in general.
“Then what’s going with you? Ever since we fucked you’re suddenly attached to me, putting your hands all over me, pretending like you're my boyfriend! And I don’t understand why,” you said frustrated.
“I feel like your just using me or something-”
“That is the last thing I want,” he interrupted, his voice low.
“Then why are you doing this; Steve you could have anybody and for some fucking sick reason you keeping mocking me. Making me think I have a chance.”
“And you don’t think you do?” he asked, heart broken, making you scoff and turn away.
“Look, fine I’ll admit that maybe before that night I wouldn’t have made a move; but I’m gonna admit that I haven’t not felt something for you before,” he said, getting closer to you.
“What?”
“I haven’t been able to stop thinking about you since we met. And that night didn’t do shit to help me get over you,” he chuckled.
You crawled to him carefully looking into his eyes for any sign that he was being untruthful; you cupped his face gently.
“Are you drunk?” you whispered.
“Not one bit.”
You pressed your lips to his feverishly and Steve nearly moaned at the feeling. His hands grasped your waist firmly pulling you to sit comfortably on his lap. His hands crept under your hoodie holding you close.
Your hands rested on his broad shoulders holding yourself up as slowly leaned back onto your pillows. Your cold hands cupped his face as you deepened the kiss and his hand went to rest on your bottom.
With this new found position, his chest pressed against yours, his hips grinded up allowing you to feel all of him. Every pushing second you grew needier and whiny, practically clawing at his shirt to feel his skin.
"So needy already. And I've hardly touched you," he chuckled lowly in your ear.
He sat up nonetheless and stripped his shirt revealing his gorgeous physique that kept you up at night and infiltrated your dirtiest dreams. You brushed your hands all over his chest with your bottom lip between your teeth; Steve smirking slightly proud of the effect he had on you simply by having his shirt off.
"Come on, pretty girl. I wanna see you too," he's whispered before kissing you softly.
"Wait, I don't…" you didn't particularly feel very sexy and instantly became insecure about your body compared to Steve's.
"It's ok, we can cuddle," he smiled.
"Well, if I'm being honest I do want you. It's just, I just ate all this junk food and I'm not wearing anything sexy. I didn't shave and-"
"Hey, I don't care. You don't need to impress me or wear anything special for me. I just want you to look pretty sitting on my face and make pretty sounds telling me how I'm gonna make you feel."
Your body trembled at his words, arousal instantly flooding from you. His nose brushed against your cheek dragging along to your jawline before pressing kisses gingerly to your jaw and neck. His hands slowly lifted your hoodie and you raised your hands letting him remove your hoodie.
Your shoulders caved in out of habit, being topless in front of handsome men wasn't normally on your schedule; but the look in Steve's eyes, the look on his face holding a hungry and adorning expression made you more comfortable, reaching out to cup his face kissing him deeply.
You sighed breathlessly into the kiss as Steve's hands rubbed your sides. You pulled away momentarily only to put your lips on Steve's neck. Steve felt himself growing harder and needier to see you, feel you, pleasure you.
"Pretty girl, I need you. Lemme taste you, please," he whined.
He picked you up and laid down on your back to pull your sweatpants down your legs. You lifted your hips for him and he smiled cheekily at you biting his lip. Steve lifted your leg kissing the inside of your calf staring at with those hungry eyes.
"I still wanna see you sitting on my face, pretty girl," Steve said, pulling to him.
"Are you sure? I don't wanna crush you or anything," you whispered, making Steve chuckle.
Steve laid down assuring you that he wanted this and grabbed your hand helping you straddle his face. When you did Steve kissed the inside of your thighs playfully nipping and marking the sensitive skin making you gasp.
Steve wrapped his hands around your thighs bringing your center impossibly close to him, finally licking a long and wet stripe up your slit. Your moans were soft at first but when Steve started circling his tongue around your clit, you could help getting louder and bucking your hips grinding on his face.
Steve’s eyes were close relishing in your sex. You combed your fingers through his hair and Steve moaned loudly against your pussy. He dipped his tongue past your folds and that along with the vibrations from his beautiful moans, you head threw back moaning in pure ecstasy, moaning so loud your neighbors were definitely going to file a complaint.
“Fuck, Steve. Your mouth feels so good; shit!” you whined.
His tongue circled your clit again quicker this time and you bucked your hips, tightening your stomach and squeezing your legs as you approached your high. Steve kneaded the soft flesh of your ass lapping up everything you gave him.
Steve crawled from under you as you held onto the headboard, still standing on your knees, trying to catch your breath. Steve came up behind you rubbing your hips softly, kissing the back of your neck softly. He quickly rid the remaining of his clothes he still wore, his painfully hard cock slapping against his stomach desperate for some sort of attention.
You breathe softly, hyper focused on the cum that slipped down your inner thighs. Your legs lightly trembled from just his mouth you couldn’t wait to feel what his cock would feel like, filling you up like it was only a week ago. Steve sat beside you looking at you with a soft smile on his face, his hand softly rubbing the back of your legs and your bottom too.
He reached around to grab your hip and slowly turned you around settling you between his legs; your back pressed against his chest as it was only moments before, more innocently than now. His lips sucked and kissed your neck as his hands cupped and kneaded the soft flesh of your breasts.
Your hands rested over his own and your hips squirmed a bit for eagerness. The low growl from Steve because your hips grinded against his cock was incredibly arousing.
“Such an eager little slut ain't cha’,” he grabbed your hair.
“Fuck,” you mumbled as he pushed you forward on your hands and knees.
“Want me to fuck you? Remind you how I felt buried so fucking deep inside you? God, I think about you every fucking night; how perfect you were wrapped around me, how beautiful you sounded underneath me,” he whispered huskily in your ear making you shudder.
“Stevie, please,” you whimpered.
His hands rubbed up and down your back as he chuckled darkly.
“Oh, I’ve been waiting to take care of you again, pretty girl,” he kissed your back softly.
He wrapped his hand around his cock slowly and languidly pumping it. He couldn’t help but tease slightly circled his tip along your entrance pulling desperate whines from you. He finally reached his own breaking point, unable to stand not being able to feel you so he pushed his hips forward moaning loudly at how tight you felt around him.
“So good, pretty girl,” he moaned.
“Fuck, Stevie. Filling me up so good; you’re so big,” you sighed.
“Damn right, pretty girl. Taking my cock so well. Fucking made for me,” he grunted.
His snapped in and out increasingly quicker with each thrust; the vulgar sounds of his movements and skin slapping against each other echoed loudly in the room. Harmonizing with both your pleasurable moans.
Chasing both your releases, Steve’s hips jerked rougher and harder in and out of you making you practically shriek at the feeling. He leaned forward wrapping his hand around your throat before pulling you flush against his chest.
“Such pretty baby,” he bit your ear.
“Fuck! Stevie I need to come,” you whined.
“Yeah, you want to come all over my cock? Make a fucking mess?” he growled.
“Please!”
“Hold on, pretty girl. I’m almost there,” he sighed, throwing his head back and closing his eyes in pleasure.
You whined and whimpered, tears brimming your eyes from that overwhelming feeling. You couldn’t help but clench hard around his cock desperately holding back for your release.
“Fuck, do that again, pretty girl,” Steve gasped.
“God, yes. I’m close, pretty girl. You ready to come?” he pulled your head back to look at your face.
Tears fell inelegantly down your cheeks, sweat lined your forehead, your chest moved rapidly up and down; to Steve, you looked ethereal.
“Please,” you whimpered.
“Let go, pretty girl. I gotcha,” he whispered against your lips.
Your eyes rolled back as your body shook against Steve’s, releasing onto his dick profoundly. Steve swallowed your louds moans, roughly pressing his lips to yours, moaning himself. You clenched hard around Steve one last time feeling his throbbing cock shoot hot ribbons of cum, coating your walls.
When you eased your way slowly down from your high, Steve laid you down gently pulling out to see his cum mixed with yours spilling from you. You looked so fucked out breathing heavily, whimpering at the loss of Steve inside you. He wanted to, but held back from taking you again. But not wanting to hurt you, he treaded towards the bathroom and turned on the water to run you two a hot bath. He picked you up gently pressing kisses all over your face and neck before planting one delicious kiss on your lips; your hands reaching around his neck to deepen it if that was even possible.
“You’re so beautiful,” he whispered, coating your arms with soap to wash you. You laid against him with your eyes closed desperately trying not to fall asleep in his arms.
“I didn’t hurt you?” he asked softly.
“Mh-m,” you shook your head slightly with a blissful smile on your face.
“Good,” he wrapped his arms around you tightly, kissing you passionately.
“Thank you,” you mumbled, barely audibly.
“For coming to hang out with me tonight,” you chuckled. Your eyes felt too heavy, simply remembering the way he carried you carefully back to your bed and held for the rest of the night.
ᴛᴀɢʟɪsᴛ: (For all my work)
@mathletemadison​
@buckybarnes101​
@l-sofiamia-l
@pluto-grl
@partr1dge
@stefans-wife
@cordeliaswhore
@fleurlovesbucky
@wandanatasha0720
472 notes · View notes